EN/Firmware Manual SystApplProg6.x

EN/Firmware Manual SystApplProg6.x
ACS 600
This manual includes:
• Start-Up Data
• Software Description
• Signals
• Parameters
• Overview of the CDP312 Control Panel
• Fault Tracing
• Terms
Firmware Manual
System Application Program 6.x
for ACS 600 Frequency Converters
System Application Program 6.x
for ACS 600 Frequency Converters
Firmware Manual
ACS 600
Code: 3BFE 63700177 R0425
EFFECTIVE: 02.05.2001
SUPERSEDES: 20.06.2000
FIDRI\EIF
 2001 ABB Industry Oy. All rights reserved.
Safety
General Safety
Instructions
Note: Complete safety instructions can be found in the Safety and
Product Information Manual (ACS 600 MultiDrive), or in the
Hardware Manual (ACS/ACC 607).
These safety instructions are intended for all work on the ACS 600
MultiDrive and the ACS/ACC 607 (630 to 3000 kW) units. Neglecting
these instructions can cause physical injury and death.
WARNING!
All electrical installation and maintenance work on the ACx 600
should be carried out by qualified electricians.
Any installation and maintenance work must be done with the power
off and power is not to be reconnected until the installation work is
complete. Dangerous residual voltages remain in capacitors when the
disconnecting device is opened. Wait 5 minutes after switching off the
supply before starting work. Always ensure that the measured voltage
between terminals UDC+ and UDC- and frame is close to 0 V and that
the supply has been switched off before performing any work on the
equipment or making main circuit connections.
If the main circuit of the inverter unit is live, the motor terminals are
also live even if the motor is not running!
Open the fuse switches of all parallel connected inverters before
installation or maintenance work in any of them.
Check the cable connections at the shipping split joints before
switching on the supply voltage.
If the auxiliary voltage circuit of the ACS 600 is powered from an
external power supply, opening the disconnecting device does not
remove all voltages. Control voltages of 115/230 VAC may be present
on the digital inputs or outputs even though the inverter unit is not
powered. Before starting work, check which circuits remain live after
opening of the disconnecting device by referring to the circuit diagrams
for you particular delivery. Ensure by measuring that the part of the
cabinet you are working on is not live.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
i
Safety
In ACx 600 frequency converters, control boards of the converterunit
may be at the main circuit potential. Dangerous voltages may
bepresent between the control cards and the frame of the
converterunit, when the main circuit voltage is on. It is critical that the
use of measuring instruments, such as an oscilloscope, are used with
caution and safety and always a priority. The fault tracing
instructionsgive a special mention of cases in which measurements
may be performed on the control boards, also indicating the measuring
method to be used.
Live parts on the inside of doors are protected against direct contact.
Special attention shall be paid to safety when handling shrouds made
of sheet metal.
Do not make any voltage withstand tests on any part of the unit while
the unit is connected. Disconnect the motor cables before making any
measurements on the motors or motor cables.
WARNING! Close fuse switches of all parallel connected inverters
before starting the frequency converter.
Do not open the drive section switch fuses when the inverter is
running.
Do not use Prevention of Unexpected Start for stopping the drive
when the inverter is running. Give a Stop command instead.
CAUTION! Fans may continue to rotate for a while after the
disconnection of the electrical supply.
CAUTION! Some parts, like heatsinks of power semiconductors inside
of cabinet remain hot for a while after the disconnection of the
electrical supply.
ii
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Table of Contents
Safety.....................................................................................................................................................................i
General Safety Instructions ..........................................................................................................................i
Table of Contents ...............................................................................................................................................iii
Chapter 1 – Introduction to This Manual ...................................................................................................... 1-1
Overview ................................................................................................................................................. 1-1
Before You Start...................................................................................................................................... 1-1
What This Manual Contains .................................................................................................................... 1-1
Chapter 2 – Start-up ........................................................................................................................................ 2-1
Overview ................................................................................................................................................. 2-1
General Start-up Instructions .................................................................................................................. 2-1
POWER-UP............................................................................................................................................. 2-2
START-UP DATA.................................................................................................................................... 2-3
Entering and Checking Data ......................................................................................................... 2-3
Activating the Optional Modules.................................................................................................... 2-4
Checking the I/O Communication ................................................................................................. 2-4
Checking the Prevention of Nexpected Start-up and Emergency Stop Circuit. ............................ 2-4
Checking the Motor Fan Circuit (if exists). .................................................................................... 2-4
MOTOR ID RUN = MOTOR IDENTIFICATION RUN ............................................................................. 2-5
Checking the Speed Measurement and Rotation Direction .......................................................... 2-5
Selecting the Motor ID Run Mode ................................................................................................. 2-7
Multi-Motor Drives ......................................................................................................................... 2-8
OPTIMISING THE STARTING TIME AND TORQUE ............................................................................. 2-8
MOTOR PROTECTIONS........................................................................................................................ 2-9
Motor Thermal Model Protection................................................................................................... 2-9
Motor Protection with Temperature Measurement...................................................................... 2-10
TUNING THE SPEED CONTROLLER ................................................................................................. 2-11
Step Response Test.................................................................................................................... 2-11
Low Speed Fine Tuning .............................................................................................................. 2-13
Suppression of Oscillations ......................................................................................................... 2-13
SCALAR CONTROL ............................................................................................................................. 2-14
Selecting the Scalar Control........................................................................................................ 2-14
IR Compensation ........................................................................................................................ 2-14
CONTROLLING THE DRIVE USING AN OVERRIDING SYSTEM ...................................................... 2-15
CONTROLLING THE DRIVE USING THE I/O SIGNALS ..................................................................... 2-16
FIELDBUS ADAPTERS ........................................................................................................................ 2-17
UNDERVOLTAGE CONTROL.............................................................................................................. 2-17
Activating the Undervoltage Control............................................................................................ 2-17
AUTO RESTART FUNCTION............................................................................................................... 2-18
Activating the AUTO RESTART Function ................................................................................... 2-18
CHECKING THE MASTER/FOLLOWER COMMUNICATION.............................................................. 2-18
Checking the Mode and Signals ................................................................................................. 2-18
DriveWindow Backup/Restore Function ................................................................................................ 2-20
Before You Start.......................................................................................................................... 2-20
Complete Backup........................................................................................................................ 2-20
Parameter Saving ....................................................................................................................... 2-21
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
iii
Table of Contents
DriveWindow Restore ................................................................................................................. 2-22
Chapter 3 – Software Description.................................................................................................................. 3-1
Drive Functions ....................................................................................................................................... 3-1
General ......................................................................................................................................... 3-1
Application Program Identificatinon.................................................................................. 3-2
Program Boot ................................................................................................................... 3-2
Control Diagrams .......................................................................................................................... 3-2
Control Modes............................................................................................................................... 3-5
REMOTE Mode ................................................................................................................ 3-5
HAND/AUTO Function ..................................................................................................... 3-5
LOCAL Mode.................................................................................................................... 3-5
Emergency Stop............................................................................................................................ 3-5
Emergency Stop Hardware .............................................................................................. 3-5
Torque Limit Ramping beginning of Emergency Stop...................................................... 3-6
Emergency Stop Modes ................................................................................................... 3-6
Action if the Motor Is Stopped .......................................................................................... 3-6
Action if the Motor Is Running .......................................................................................... 3-6
Prevention of Unexpected Start-Up .............................................................................................. 3-7
Communication ....................................................................................................................................... 3-8
DDCS Channels in NAMC CONTROLLERS ................................................................................ 3-8
Fieldbus Communication Adapters on the Channel CH0.............................................................. 3-8
Fieldbus Signals ............................................................................................................... 3-9
Addressing of Data Using Data Sets 10…33 ................................................................... 3-9
The Mail Box Function...................................................................................................... 3-9
Integer Scaling on the DDCS Link.................................................................................... 3-9
Received Data Set Table ............................................................................................... 3-10
Transmitted Data Set Table ........................................................................................... 3-11
Using the NPBA-02 PROFIBUS Adapter Module .......................................................... 3-12
PROFIBUS Parameters in Cyclic Communication ......................................................... 3-12
I/O Devices on Channel CH1 ...................................................................................................... 3-13
Master/Follower Link on Channel CH2 ....................................................................................... 3-13
Commissioning and Supporting Tools on Channel CH3............................................................. 3-13
Modbus Link................................................................................................................................ 3-13
Register Read and Write ................................................................................................ 3-14
Register Mapping ........................................................................................................... 3-14
Charging Logic of Inverter........................................................................................................... 3-15
ABB Drive Profile................................................................................................................................... 3-15
Drive States................................................................................................................................. 3-15
Main Control Word (MCW).......................................................................................................... 3-17
I/O Configurations ................................................................................................................................. 3-24
Digital Inputs ............................................................................................................................... 3-24
Hardware Source Selection for Digital Inputs................................................................. 3-24
Digital Outputs............................................................................................................................. 3-24
Hardware Source Selection for Digital Outputs.............................................................. 3-25
Analogue Inputs .......................................................................................................................... 3-25
I/O Speed Reference...................................................................................................... 3-25
NIOC-01 Basic I/O Board .............................................................................................. 3-26
NBIO-21/NIOB-01 Analogue Inputs ............................................................................... 3-26
NAIO-03 Analogue I/O Extension Module...................................................................... 3-27
Analogue Outputs ....................................................................................................................... 3-28
NIOB-01 Basic I/O....................................................................................................................... 3-31
Board Connections...................................................................................................................... 3-31
Pulse Encoder Interface NTAC-02.............................................................................................. 3-34
iv
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Table of Contents
The Master / Follower Link .................................................................................................................... 3-34
General ....................................................................................................................................... 3-34
Link Configuration ....................................................................................................................... 3-34
Master Drive ................................................................................................................... 3-34
Follower Drive(s) ............................................................................................................ 3-35
Flying Switching between Speed and Torque Control ................................................... 3-35
Follower Diagnostics ...................................................................................................... 3-36
Master/Follower Link Specification................................................................................. 3-36
Diagnostics ............................................................................................................................................ 3-36
General ....................................................................................................................................... 3-36
Fault and Event Loggers ............................................................................................................. 3-36
AMC Time Format and Counting.................................................................................... 3-36
Data Loggers 1 and 2.................................................................................................................. 3-37
Positioning Counter ............................................................................................................................... 3-37
Positioning Counting Function .................................................................................................... 3-38
Back-Up of Parameters or Software...................................................................................................... 3-39
Spare NAMC Boards................................................................................................................... 3-39
DriveWindow Back-Up Function ................................................................................................. 3-40
DriveWindow Restore Function................................................................................................... 3-40
Memory Handling .................................................................................................................................. 3-41
User Macros .......................................................................................................................................... 3-41
Oscillation Damping............................................................................................................................... 3-42
Tuning Procedure........................................................................................................................ 3-42
AUTO RESTART Function.................................................................................................................... 3-43
Chapter 4 – Signals ......................................................................................................................................... 4-1
Overview ................................................................................................................................................. 4-1
How to Read the Signal Table ...................................................................................................... 4-1
AMC Table Signals.................................................................................................................................. 4-2
Group 1 Actual Signal ................................................................................................................... 4-2
Group 2 Actual Signals ................................................................................................................. 4-4
Group 3 Actual Signals ................................................................................................................. 4-5
Group 4 Information ...................................................................................................................... 4-8
Group 7 Control Words ................................................................................................................. 4-9
Group 8 Status Words................................................................................................................. 4-11
Group 9 Fault Words................................................................................................................... 4-14
Chapter 5 – Parameters .................................................................................................................................. 5-1
Overview ................................................................................................................................................. 5-1
Parameter Groups................................................................................................................................... 5-1
How to Read the Parameter Table.......................................................................................................... 5-2
Group 10 Start/Stop/Dir................................................................................................................. 5-3
Group 11 Reference Select........................................................................................................... 5-6
Group 13 Analogue Inputs ............................................................................................................ 5-6
Group 14 Digital Outputs............................................................................................................... 5-7
Group 15 Analogue Outputs ......................................................................................................... 5-9
Group 16 System Control Inputs................................................................................................. 5-12
Group 17 DC Hold....................................................................................................................... 5-13
Group 18 LED Panel Control ...................................................................................................... 5-14
Group 19 Data Storage ............................................................................................................... 5-15
Group 20 Limits........................................................................................................................... 5-16
Group 21 Start/Stop Functions.................................................................................................... 5-19
Group 22 Ramp Functions .......................................................................................................... 5-22
Group 23 Speed Reference ........................................................................................................ 5-24
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
v
Table of Contents
Group 24 Speed Control ............................................................................................................. 5-26
Proportional Gain Parameter of the Speed Controller.................................................... 5-27
The Adaptive Speed Control as a Function of the Torque Reference............................ 5-27
Set Point Weighting........................................................................................................ 5-28
Integration Time Parameters of the Speed Controller.................................................... 5-29
Derivation Parameters of the Speed Controller.............................................................. 5-29
Acceleration Compensation Parameters........................................................................ 5-29
Adaptive Speed Control as Function of the Speed ........................................................ 5-30
Group 25 Torque Reference ....................................................................................................... 5-31
Group 26 Torque Reference Handling ........................................................................................ 5-32
Group 27 Flux Control................................................................................................................. 5-33
Group 28 Motor Model ................................................................................................................ 5-35
Group 29 Scalar Control ............................................................................................................. 5-37
Group 30 Fault Functions............................................................................................................ 5-39
Motor Thermal Model User Mode................................................................................... 5-40
Stall Protection ............................................................................................................... 5-42
Underload Protection...................................................................................................... 5-43
Motor Thermal Model User Mode Alarm and Fault Limits.............................................. 5-45
Motor Temperature Feedback to the Motor Model......................................................... 5-45
Group 31 Fault Functions............................................................................................................ 5-46
Group 35 Motor Fan Control ....................................................................................................... 5-46
Group 36 Motor Cable Protection ............................................................................................... 5-47
Group 50 Speed Measurement................................................................................................... 5-47
Group 51 Master Adapter (Field Bus Adapter)............................................................................ 5-50
Group 70 DDCS Control ............................................................................................................. 5-51
Group 71 DriveBus Communication............................................................................................ 5-54
Group 90 Data Set Receive Addresses ...................................................................................... 5-54
Group 91 Data Set Receive Addresses ...................................................................................... 5-55
Group 92 Data Set Transmit Addresses ..................................................................................... 5-55
Group 93 Data Set Transmit Addresses ..................................................................................... 5-56
Group 97 Drive............................................................................................................................ 5-56
Group 98 Option Modules ........................................................................................................... 5-56
Group 99 Start Up Data .............................................................................................................. 5-62
Chapter 6 - Overview of the CDP 312 Control Panel.................................................................................... 6-1
Overview ................................................................................................................................................. 6-1
Panel Link ..................................................................................................................................... 6-1
Display.............................................................................................................................. 6-2
Keys ................................................................................................................................. 6-2
Panel Operation ...................................................................................................................................... 6-3
Keypad Modes .............................................................................................................................. 6-3
Identification Display ........................................................................................................ 6-3
Actual Signal Display Mode.............................................................................................. 6-3
Parameter Mode............................................................................................................... 6-7
Function Mode.................................................................................................................. 6-9
Copying Parameters from One Unit to Other Units ........................................................ 6-11
Setting the Contrast........................................................................................................ 6-11
Drive Selection Mode ..................................................................................................... 6-11
Operational Commands .............................................................................................................. 6-14
Start, Stop, Direction and Reference.............................................................................. 6-14
Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing ............................................................................................................................... 7-1
Overview ................................................................................................................................................. 7-1
Protections .............................................................................................................................................. 7-1
vi
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Table of Contents
I/O- Monitoring .............................................................................................................................. 7-1
Communication Monitoring ........................................................................................................... 7-1
Inverter Overtemperature Fault..................................................................................................... 7-1
Ambient Temperature ................................................................................................................... 7-1
Overcurrent ................................................................................................................................... 7-1
DC Overvoltage............................................................................................................................. 7-2
DC Undervoltage........................................................................................................................... 7-2
Local Control Lost Function .......................................................................................................... 7-3
RUN ENABLE Interlocking Function ............................................................................................. 7-3
START INHIBITION Interlocking Function .................................................................................... 7-3
Short Circuit .................................................................................................................................. 7-3
Intermediate DC Link Current Ripple Fault ................................................................................... 7-3
Overspeed Fault............................................................................................................................ 7-3
Earth/Fault Logics ......................................................................................................................... 7-4
Indicator LEDs in the NINT Board ........................................................................................................... 7-5
Interpretation of the LEDs ............................................................................................................. 7-5
Speed Measurement Fault............................................................................................................ 7-6
Switching from Measured Speed to Estimated Speed ..................................................... 7-7
Overswitching Frequency Fault..................................................................................................... 7-7
System Fault ................................................................................................................................. 7-7
Short Time Overloading ................................................................................................................ 7-7
Overloading between I AC_Nominal and I AC_1/5 min ...................................................................... 7-7
Overloading between the I AC_1/5 min and Maximum Current ................................................ 7-8
Motor Protections .................................................................................................................................... 7-9
Motor Thermal Protection Functions ............................................................................................. 7-9
Motor Thermal Model ....................................................................................................... 7-9
Usage of PT100, PTC or KTY84-1xx Temperature Sensors ...................................................... 7-10
Stall Function .............................................................................................................................. 7-11
Underload Function..................................................................................................................... 7-12
Motor Phase Loss Function ........................................................................................................ 7-12
Earth Fault Protection Function................................................................................................... 7-13
Motor Fan Diagnostics ................................................................................................................ 7-13
Diagnostics.................................................................................................................................. 7-13
Fault and Alarm Messages.................................................................................................................... 7-14
Fault Message Table................................................................................................................... 7-14
Alarm Message Table ................................................................................................................. 7-21
Event Messages.......................................................................................................................... 7-25
Other Messages.......................................................................................................................... 7-25
Chapter 8 - Terms ............................................................................................................................................ 8-1
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
vii
Table of Contents
viii
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 1 – Introduction to This Manual
Overview
This chapter describes the purpose, contents and the intended
audience of this manual. It also explains the terms used in this
manual and lists related publications.
Before You Start
The purpose of this manual is to provide you with the information
necessary to control and program the drive.
Read through this manual before commencing start-up.
The installation and commissioning instructions given in the ACS 600
MultiDrive Hardware Manual must also be read before proceeding.
Study carefully the Safety Instructions before attempting any work on,
or with, the unit.
What This Manual
Contains
Safety Instructions can be found at the beginning of this manual.
Chapter 1 – Introduction to This Manual, the chapter you are reading
now, introduces you to this manual.
Chapter 2 – Start-Up, explains the Start-up procedure.
Chapter 3 – Software Description, explains the operation of the
System Application Program.
Chapter 4 – Signals, introduces you to the measured or calculated
signals.
Chapter 5 – Parameters, lists the System Application Program
parameters and explains their functions.
Chapter 6 – Overview of CDP 312 Control Panel, describes the
operation of the CDP 312 Control Panel used for controlling and
programming.
Chapter 7– Fault Tracing, introduces you to the protections and fault
tracing of ACS 600.
Chapter 8 – Terms, gives complete listing of the terms used in this
manual.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
1-1
Chapter 1 – Introduction to This Manual
1-2
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 2 – Start-up
Overview
This chapter describes the basic start-up procedure of the ACS 600.
The instructions are given as a step-by-step table. A more detailed
description of the parameters involved in the procedure is presented
in the chapter Parameters.
General Start-up
Instructions
The ACS 600 frequency converter can be operated:
•
locally from its Control Panel or the DriveWindow PC tool.
•
externally via the I/O connections on the NIOC or NIOB board or
fieldbus connection to the NAMC board.
The start-up procedure presented uses the DriveWindow program.
(For information on the functions of DriveWindow, see its on-line
help.) However, parameter settings can also be given via the Control
Panel. To display references without Data Logger, connect and scale
the analogue outputs to an oscilloscope.
The start-up procedure includes actions that need only be taken
when powering up the ACS 600 for the first time in a new installation
(e.g. entering the motor data). After the start-up, the ACS 600 can be
powered up without using these start-up functions again. The start-up
procedure can be repeated later if the start-up data needs to be
altered.
Refer to the chapter Fault Tracing in case problems should arise.
In case of a major problem, disconnect mains power and wait for 5
minutes before attempting any work on the unit, the motor, or the
motor cable.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
2-1
Chapter 2 – Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
Follow the safety instructions during the start-up procedure.
The start-up procedure should only be carried out by a qualified electrician.
Check the mechanical and electrical installation and the commissioning of the drive
section from the ACS 600 XXX Hardware Manual (Code 3AFY 63700118).
Connect optical cables temporarily between the NAMC board channel CH3 and the DDCS
communication (NISA) card or PCMCIA card in the PC.
When using a PCMCIA card, follow the instructions included in the DriveWindow kit.
Disconnect the overriding system link from channel CH0 of the NAMC board.
1.
POWER-UP
Apply mains power.
Start the DriveWindow program.
Select the DDCS protocol.
Switch the DriveWindow program into Local control mode.
2-2
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 2 – Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
2.
START-UP DATA
2.1
Entering and Checking Data
Upload the parameter and signal list.
Select the language (if available). Reload the
parameter and signal list from the Drive menu.
99.01 LANGUAGE
_____________
Enter the motor data from the motor nameplate into
the following parameters (Parameter Group 99):
99.02 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE
_____________
Set all motor data exactly as indicated on the motor nameplate.
(For example, if the motor nominal speed is given as 1440 rpm on
the nameplate, setting the value of Parameter 99.05 MOTOR
NOM SPEED to 1500 rpm would result in the wrong operation of
the drive.)
ABB Motors
3 ~ motor
M2AA 200 MLA 4
CE
99.03 MOTOR NOM CURRENT
_____________
99.04 MOTOR NOM FREQ
_____________
99.05 MOTOR NOM SPEED
_____________
IEC 200 M/L 55
No
Ins.cl. F
IP 55
V
Hz
kW
r/min
A
cos ϕ IA/IN
690 Y
50
30
1475
32.5
0.83
400 D
50
30
1475
56
0.83
660 Y
50
30
1470
34
0.83
380 D
50
30
1470
59
0.83
415 D
50
30
1475
54
0.83
440 D
60
35
1770
59
0.83
Cat. no.
t E/s
99.12 MOTOR NOM COSFII
_____________
3GAA 202 001 - ADA
6312/C3
6210/C3
99.06 MOTOR NOM POWER
_____________
180 kg
If the nominal COS ϕ of the motor is
unknown, set Parameter 99.13 POWER
IS GIVEN to POWER.
IEC 34-1
ABB Motors CE
3 ~ motor
HXR 500 LH6
IEC
No
Ins.cl. F
0
379
379
IP 55
379
kW
V/ Y
0
615
660
660
0
26.1
28.0
75.3
Hz
0
528
507
404
A
0
520
558
1499
rpm
0
0.70
0.68
0.86
cos ϕ
Field Weakening Point Values!
Cat. no.
Download the parameters.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
The Alarm Message
"ID MAGN REQ" is displayed.
2-3
Chapter 2 – Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
2.2
Activating the Optional Modules
Activate all optional modules connected to channel
CH1 of the NAMC board.
Parameter Group 98
OPTION MODULES
Note: If the pulse encoder is used with NIOB-01 basic
I/O board, set also Parameter 98.01 = YES
2.3
Checking the I/O Communication
Check the possible I/O signal selections.
2.4.
Parameter Groups 10 - 15
Checking the Prevention of Nexpected Start-up and Emergency Stop Circuit.
Check that the prevention of unexpected start-up
circuit works including digital input START INHIBIT
function.
Signal 8.02 AUX STATUS
1 = Active (NGPS-xx 230/115 VAC circuit is open)
0 = Normal State (circuit is closed)
WORD bit B8
START_INHIBITION.
10.08 START INHIB DI
2.5.
Set the mask for Preventation of Unexpected Start-up
alarm for ALARM /FAULT logger, if the NGPS-xx is
often de-energised. Otherwise the alarm / fault logger
will be filled with START INHIBIT alarms.
31.02 START INHIBIT ALM
Check that the emergency stop circuit is functioning
correctly (DI1 and DO1).
1 = NO OFF 3.
Signal 8.01 MAIN STATUS
WORD bit B5 OFF_3_STA
Select the emergency stop mode.
21.04 EME STOP MODE
Checking the Motor Fan Circuit (if exists).
Check the fan control circuit, set any required
functions by parameters.
2-4
35.01 MOTOR FAN CTRL
35.02 FAN ACK DELAY
35.03 FAN OFF DELAY
35.04 FAN ON DELAY
10.06 MOTOR FAN ACK
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 2 – Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
3.
MOTOR ID RUN = MOTOR IDENTIFICATION RUN
3.1
Checking the Speed Measurement and Rotation Direction
With a pulse encoder
↓
Without a pulse encoder
Check the rated speed value of the motor (e.g.
1485 rpm).
50.01 SPEED SCALING
Set Parameter 50.03 SPEED FB SEL to
INTERNAL (default value).
50.03 SPEED FB SEL
Set the number of pulses per revolution for the
encoder.
50.04 ENCODER PULSE NR.
Check the other parameters settings in
Parameter Group 50.
Parameter Group 50
SPEED MEASUREMENT
Reset and start the motor.
DriveWindow Drives Panel
The stator resistance and other electrical
losses are identified and stored into FPROM
memory. The motor shaft is not rotating during
the FIRST START.
The Alarm Message "ID MAGN"
is displayed.
The motor stops after the FIRST START has
been performed.
The Alarm Message "ID DONE"
is displayed.
Start the motor again.
DriveWindow Drives Panel
Enter a small (e.g. 50 rpm) value for the speed
reference.
DriveWindow Drives Panel
Check that the motor shaft actually turns to the
correct direction and the polarity of the speed
measurement is correct.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
2-5
Chapter 2 – Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
When the motor is rotating in the correct direction and the speed reference is
positive, then the actual speed in Signal 1.03 SPEED MEASURED must be
positive as well and equal to Signal 1.02 SPEED ESTIMATED. If this is not the
case, the incorrect connection can be located as follows:
•
If the direction of rotation is correct and signal 1.03 SPEED MEASURED is negative, the
phasing of the pulse encoder channel wires is reversed.
•
If the direction of rotation is incorrect and signal 1.03 SPEED MEASURED is negative, the
motor cables are connected incorrectly.
•
If the direction of rotation is incorrect and signal 1.03 SPEED MEASURED is positive, both
the motor and the pulse encoder are connected incorrectly.
Changing the direction:
•
Disconnect mains power from the ACS 600, and wait about 5 minutes for the intermediate
circuit capacitors to discharge!
•
Do the necessary changes and verify by applying mains power and starting the motor
again.
Check that the speed actual value is positive.
+V2
1k
22k
22k
CH_+
-
220pF
0V
22k
+V2
1k
22k
CH_220pF
0V
+
22k
15k
An input channel connection of the NTAC-02.
Stop the motor.
Set Parameter 50.03 SPEED FB SEL to 2 =
ENCODER.
50.03 SPEED FB SEL
Start the motor.
Check that the signals SPEED ESTIMATED
and SPEED MEASURED are the same.
1.02 SPEED ESTIMATED
1.03 SPEED MEASURED
Stop the motor.
2-6
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 2 – Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
3.2
Selecting the Motor ID Run Mode
Warning!
The motor will run at up to approximately 50% - 80% of nominal speed during the Motor ID
Run. BE SURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE
MOTOR ID RUN!
Select the Motor ID Run.
During the Motor ID Run, the ACS 600 will identify the
characteristics of the motor for optimum motor control. The ID Run
may take a few minutes, depending on motor size.
Select the STANDARD OR REDUCED ID Run if
•
operation point is near zero speed,
•
maximum dynamic torque performance is required
(motor model optimisation) and operation without a
pulse encoder is required.
Select the FIRST START ID Run if
•
it is a pump or fan application,
•
there are drive sections in which more than one
motor is connected to one inverter. See 3.3
Multi-Motor Drives.
Note: The Motor ID Run cannot be performed if scalar control
mode is selected for motor control (Parameter 99.08 MOTOR
CTRL MODE is set to SCALAR).
The Standard Motor ID run can also be performed if the
machinery is coupled and there is only inertia but no continuous
load. In this case the ID Run may take much longer than without
any load.
WARNING! If the Standard ID run is to be performed with the
machinery coupled to the motor, make sure the machinery is able
to with stand the fast speed changes during the ID Run. Otherwise
select the Reduced ID Run.
If you select the Standard ID Run, uncouple the
driven equipment from the motor!
99.07 MOTOR ID RUN
1= NO (FIRST START)
The Motor ID Run is not performed. If the
start command has been given, the
motor model is calculated by the ACS
600 by magnetising the motor for 20 to
60 s at zero speed.
2 = STANDARD
Performing the Standard Motor ID Run
guarantees the best possible control
accuracy. The motor and the driven
equipment must be uncoupled for the
Standard ID Run.
3 = REDUCED
The Reduced ID Run should be selected
(instead of Standard) if mechanical
losses are higher than 20% (i.e. the
motor cannot be uncoupled from the
driven equipment), or flux reduction is not
allowed when the motor is running (e.g. a
braking motor in which the brake
switches on when the flux falls below a
certain level).
99.07 MOTOR ID RUN
Check that starting of the motor does not cause any danger!
Start the motor.
The motor stops after the ID Run has been performed.
When the ID Run has been successfully performed, AUX STATUS WORD signal 8.02 B7
IDENTIF_RUN_DONE is set to 1. Parameter 99.07 MOTOR ID RUN also changes back to NO.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
2-7
Chapter 2 – Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
Note: If the Motor ID Run has not been successfully
performed (for example it does not finish), see
Chapter Fault Tracing.
3.3
FAULT MESSAGE
"ID RUN FLT"
Multi-Motor Drives
These are drive sections in which more than one motor is connected to one inverter.
The motors must have the same relative slip, nominal voltage and number of poles.
Notice! If scalar control is used, then these limitations are not effective.
Set the sum of motor nominal currents.
99.03 MOTOR NOM CURRENT
Set the sum of motor nominal powers.
99.06 MOTOR NOM POWER
If the powers of the motors are close to each other or
the same, but nominal speeds vary a little, Parameter
99.05 MOTOR NOM SPEED can be set to an
average value of the motor speeds.
99.05 MOTOR NOM SPEED
If the powers of the motors vary a great deal, then use of scalar control is recommended.
Notice! If scalar control is used then these limitations are not effective.
4.
Set the frequency of the motors (must be same).
99.04 MOTOR NOM FREQ
The Motor ID Run can be performed with all the
motors connected or without load.
99.07 MOTOR ID RUN
OPTIMISING THE STARTING TIME AND TORQUE
Select the start function.
21.01 START FUNCTION
The fastest starting is achieved when Parameter
21.01 START FUNCTION is set to 1 (AUTO, flying
start).
The highest possible starting torque is achieved when
Parameter 21.01 START FUNCTION is set to
2 = DC magnetising or 3 = constant DC magnetising.
Note: No support for flying start function.
•
When CONST DC MAGN mode is used:
shaft movement during the magnetising can be
minimised.
Set the limit parameters according to process
requirements.
2-8
21.11 START JERK COMP
Parameter Group 20 LIMITS
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 2 – Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
5.
MOTOR PROTECTIONS
5.1
Motor Thermal Model Protection
Select the motor thermal model protection mode.
30.01 MOTOR THERM PMODE
Note: DTC mode is used for ABB motors with IN up to
800 A. Above that USER MODE is the only valid
selection.
With USER MODE set according to motor manufacturer data.
↓
With DTC mode
Select the protection function for the motor
thermal model protection. FAULT / WARNING
/ NO.
30.02 MOTOR THERM PROT
Set the time for 63% temperature rise
30.09 MOTOR THERM TIME
Set the motor load curve current.
30.10 MOTOR LOAD CURVE
Set the zero speed load. Especially with forced
cooling of the motor.
30.11 ZERO SPEED LOAD
Set the break point value for motor load curve.
30.12 BREAK POINT
Set the temperature alarm limit of the motor
thermal model.
30.28 THERM MOD ALM L
Set the temperature trip limit of the motor
thermal model.
30.29 THERM MOD FLT L
Set the motor nominal temperature rise. If ABB
motor specifies MNTRC value on the rating
plate, multiply value by 80 °C and enter the
result here.
30.30 MOT NOM TEMP RISE
Set the typical ambient temperature of motor.
30.31 AMBIENT TEMP
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
2-9
Chapter 2 – Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
5.2
Motor Protection with Temperature Measurement
Sensor Type
Unit / Symbol
Scaling
PT100
Celsius / °C
PTC
Ohm / Ω
Normal 0…1,5 kΩ
Overtemperature ≥ 4 kΩ
KTY84-1xx
Silicon temperature sensor
Ohm / Ω
90°C == 939 Ω
110°C == 1063 Ω
130°C == 1197 Ω
150°C == 1340 Ω
Select the motor temperature measurement function for
MOTOR 1.
30.03 MOT1 TEMP AI1 SEL
Set the temperature alarm limit for MOTOR 1.
30.04 MOT1 TEMP ALM L
Set the temperature trip limit for MOTOR 1.
30.05 MOT1 TEMP FLT L
Select the motor temperature measurement function for MOTOR
2.
30.06 MOT2 TEMP AI2 SEL
98.06 AI/O EXT MODULE 1
98.06 AI/O EXT MODULE 1
2 - 10
Set the temperature alarm limit for MOTOR 2.
30.07 MOT2 TEMP ALM L
Set the temperature trip limit for MOTOR 2.
30.08 MOT2 TEMP FLT L
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 2 – Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
6.
TUNING THE SPEED CONTROLLER
When tuning the drive, change one parameter at a time, then monitor the response to a
speed reference step possible oscillations. To achieve the best possible result, the step
response tests should be carried out at different speeds, from minimum speed up to
maximum speed.
The speed control values obtained depend mainly on:
•
Flux reference 27.03 FLUX REF.
•
The relationship between the motor power and the rotating mass.
•
Backlashes in the drive's mechanical structure (filtering).
Note: The Thyristor Supply Unit TSU may have to be set to normal operation mode for
step response tests (signal 10407=0). If the TSU is in the diode bridge mode, an
overvoltage alarm may trip the drive section when a stepped change down is given. Extra
"jumps" may also appear in the step when the DC voltage rises, because no braking
occurs.
6.1.
Step Response Test
Automatic Tuning
The speed controller includes an automatic speed tuning function Parameter 24.01 PI
TUNE. The function is based on an estimate of the mechanical time constant. If this does
not bring a satisfactory result, manual tuning can be performed as well.
Manual Tuning
Select, for example, the following signals on the DriveWindow Monitoring Tool:
•
•
1.07 MOTOR TORQUE FILT2, actual torque
1.03 SPEED MEASURED, actual speed
•
2.03 SPEED ERROR NEG, filtered speed difference
Start the motor. Increase the speed slightly. Give a speed
reference step and monitor the response. Repeat at a few
test values across the whole speed range.
DriveWindow Drives Panel
Set step changes of 1% or 2% from the maximum speed of
the drive for DriveWindow.
23.10 SPEED STEP
Optimise the P part of the speed controller: Set integration
time to the maximum value. This turns the PI controller into
a P controller.
24.09 TIS
Give a step change up, e.g. 20 rpm.
When the speed is stabilised, give a step change down e.g.
20 rpm.
23.10 SPEED STEP
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
2 - 11
Chapter 2 – Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
Increase the relative gain until the response is
sufficient.
24.03 KPS
Reduce the integral time constant until overshoot is
observed in the response.
24.09 TIS
The integral time constant is then adjusted such that
there is no overshoot or only a slight overshoot
(depending on the drive application). The function of
the integral part is to remove the difference caused by
the proportional control between the reference and
the actual value as quickly as possible.
If the drive is stable and allows a high proportional gain, the integral time constant can be
set short and an overcompensated step response is obtained.
2 - 12
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 2 – Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
6.2
Low Speed Fine Tuning
In order to eliminate potentially harmful oscillations at
low speeds (for example, during start), parameters
50.13 ZERO DETECT DELAY and 50.14 SPEED
HOLD TIME should be adjusted at this point.
50.13 ZERO DETECT DELAY
50.14 SPEED HOLD TIME
The larger the mass of the driven equipment, the
higher the value of 50.13 should be. As a rule of
thumb, 50.14 should be set to approx. 60 % of 50.13.
For example, typical values for a drive rotating a dryer
section of a paper machine would be 50 ms and 30
ms respectively.
6.3
Suppression of Oscillations
The measured speed always has a small ripple because of gear play and flexible
couplings. However, a small ripple is acceptable as long as it does not affect the control
loops. Reduction of this ripple with filters may cause tuning problems later on. A long filter
time constant and a fast acceleration time contradict each other.
If the speed measurement shows rapid oscillation,
filter it by means of speed error filter and setting the
time constant of the first order actual speed filter. With
the combination “no gear box” and “ pulse encoder
feedback”, decrease SP ACT FILT TIME to a
minimum if fast oscillation is observed.
23.06 SPEED ERROR FILT
If there is substantial backlash in the drive, and if the
drive oscillates at low torque due to the mechanism,
the situation can be remedied by means of the
adaptive control parameters. If the adaptivity has to
be made abrupt (24.03 KPS high and 24.04 KPS MIN
low), the drive may start to oscillate as the load varies.
Use a step to test the functioning of the adaptivity.
The step can be higher than 20 rpm (e.g. 50 rpm).
24.04 KPSMIN
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
50.06 SP ACT FILT TIME
24.05 KPS WEAKPOINT
24.06 KPS WP FILT TIME
2 - 13
Chapter 2 – Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
7.
SCALAR CONTROL
7.1
Selecting the Scalar Control
The scalar control mode is recommended for multimotor drives when the number of
motors connected to ACS 600 is variable.
Scalar control is also recommended when the nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6
of the nominal current of the inverter, or the inverter is used for test purposes with no
motor connected.
Start the drive with DTC mode (FIRST START) before
selecting the scalar control mode.
99.07 MOTOR ID RUN
Select the scalar control mode.
99.08 MOTOR CTRL MODE
Parameter group 29 becomes visible after selection of
scalar control. Parameters 29.02 FREQUENCY MAX
and 29.03 FREQUENCY MIN are updated by
software according to parameters 20.02 MAXIMUM
SPEED and 20.01 MINIMUM SPEED.
7.2
IR Compensation
IR compensation, or boosting the inverter output voltage, is often necessary to obtain an
optimal start torque, or when the motor must rotate slowly, i.e. at a low frequency. Due to
the stator winding resistance an additional voltage will be needed when even a slight load
torque exists.
Set the operating range for the IR compensation.
29.04 IR_COMPENSATION
Starting voltage Ua (at zero frequency), can be set to
0% to 30% of motor nominal voltage. Select a
combination at which the motor is able to start and run
at a constant speed over the whole speed range.
U(%)
Umax
Ua
Field weakening point Umax
f(Hz)
U/F characteristic
2 - 14
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 2 – Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
Always supervise the temperature rise in motors running at low speeds with IR
compensation, particularly if no separate fan or temperature monitoring is included.
The adequacy of IR compensation must be checked under actual load conditions.
8.
CONTROLLING THE DRIVE USING AN OVERRIDING SYSTEM
The drive can be controlled from an overriding system by using data sets 1, 2 or 10…33
with DDCS and DriveBus communication protocols.
Select the data sets used in the overriding system.
Typically FBA DSET10.
98.02 COMM MODULE
Connect the overriding system optic fibres to the channel CH0 of the NAMC board.
Set the node address for channel CH0 according to
the application of the overriding system.
Controller
Node
Addresses
DDCS
Node
Addresses
DriveBus
APC2
1
-
AC70
-
-
AC80
DriveBus
-
1-12
AC80
ModuleBus
-
FCI (CI810A)
-
-
Node
Addresses
ModuleBus
17-125
70.01 CH0 NODE ADDR
Par. 71.01 CH0
DRIVEBUS MODE
NO
NO
YES
17-125
NO
17-125
NO
Select the communication mode for channel CH0. See 71.01 CH0 DRIVEBUS MODE
the table above.
Note: This parameter is valid after the next power-up.
Check that the communication is working.
Set the delay time before a communication break fault
is indicated.
70.04 CH0 TIMEOUT
Select the action upon a communication fault on
channel CH0.
70.05 CH0 COM LOSS CTRL
Select RING, if the CH0 channels on the NAMC
boards have been connected to ring. (Default is STAR
that is typically used with the branching units NDBU95 / -85).
70.19 CH0 HW CONNECTION
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
2 - 15
Chapter 2 – Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
Set the node address for channel CH3. This is used
for DriveWindow. Use addresses 1…75 and
124…254. Rest of the addresses have been reserved
for branching units (NDBU-95 or NDBU-85).
70.15 CH3 NODE ADDR
If the CH3 channels of several drives have been connected in a
ring or star (using a branching unit configuration), each one must
be given a unique node address. The new node address becomes
valid only on the next NAMC-03 power-on.
Select RING, if the CH3 channels on the NAMC
boards have been connected to ring. (Default is STAR
that is typically used with the branching units NDBU95 or NDBU-85).
70.20 CH3 HW CONNECTION
Select the addresses for Receive and Transmit data
according to the application of the overriding system.
Note the different update intervals. See tables in the
Chapter 3 Fieldbus Communication Adapters on the
Channel CH0.
Parameter Groups
90…93
Test the functions with received and transmitted data.
9.
CONTROLLING THE DRIVE USING THE I/O SIGNALS
The drive can be controlled, instead of an overriding system, by using I/O signals. See
also Par. 10.07 HAND/AUTO.
Select the I/O control mode (1=NO).
98.02 COMM MODULE
Digital inputs are selected in Group 10 Digital Inputs.
To see the analogue selections see description of
Parameter 98.06 AI/O EXT MODULE 1.
When an NIOC-01 I/O board is used, an mA-type
speed reference signal can be selected with the
parameter 11.01 EXT REF1 SEL.
2 - 16
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 2 – Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
10.
11.
FIELDBUS ADAPTERS
See the appropriate Installation and Start-up Guide.
The fieldbus communication is set up with Parameter
Group 51.
Parameter Group 51
Select the DRIVEBUS MODE OFF and reconnect the
power to the NDCU-unit.
71.01 CH0 DRIVEBUS MODE
UNDERVOLTAGE CONTROL
11.1 Activating the Undervoltage Control
It is possible to keep the drive running during a short power supply failure (max. 5
seconds) on the following provisions:
• The NAMC board must be powered through a UPS.
• Digital input DI2 circuit must remain closed during the power supply failure.
• The inverter is permitted to run for max. 5 seconds without inverter fans.
Please contact an ABB representative for more information.
Check that the auxiliary control circuit functions
correctly during power supply failure.
Activate the undervoltage controller.
30.22 UNDERVOLTAGE CTL
Deactivate the Adaptive UDC measurement if
undervoltage control is in use with several drives
connected to the same DC bus.
20.14 ADAPTIVE UDC MEAS
Tune the generating load level according to the load
with the gain of the P-controller.
20.16 UNDERVOLT TORQ DN
and (20.15)
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
2 - 17
Chapter 2 – Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
12.
AUTO RESTART FUNCTION
12.1 Activating the AUTO RESTART Function
It is possible to restart the drive automatically after a short power supply failure using
the AUTO RESTART function.
Activate the AUTO RESTART function if required.
21.09 AUTO RESTART
It is possible to restart the drive after a short power
supply failure (max. 5 seconds) on the following
provisions:
• The NAMC board must be powered through a
UPS.
• Digital input DI2 circuit must remain closed during
the power supply failure.
• The inverter is permitted to run for max. 5 seconds
without inverter fans.
13.
Set the maximum allowed power supply failure time.
21.10 AUTO RESTART TIME
Set the PPCC FAULT MASK to prevent PPCC link
fault indications.
30.24 PPCC FAULT MASK
CHECKING THE MASTER/FOLLOWER COMMUNICATION
13.1 Checking the Mode and Signals
Required only if the application includes master/follower drives.
V17
V18
V17
V18
V17
V18
V18
TRA
REC
CH 2
TRA
REC
CH 2
TRA
REC
CH 2
NAMC
NAMC
NAMC
NAMC
MASTER
FOLLOWER 1
FOLLOWER 2
Select the Master/Follower mode.
FOLLOWER 3
70.08 CH2 M/F MODE
In the Master: If the speed reference is sent from the
master drive to the follower drive, select the signal (to
be sent to the follower).
2 - 18
V17
TRA
REC
CH 2
70.10 MASTER SIGNAL 2
Note: If Parameter 70.08 CH2 M/F
MODE is set to 3 = FOLLOWER, this
parameter is not used.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 2 – Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
In the Master: The torque reference is sent from the
master drive to the follower drive. Select the signal to
be sent as the torque reference (from the master drive
to the follower).
70.11 MASTER SIGNAL 3
Note: If Parameter 70.08 CH2 M/F
MODE is set to 3 = FOLLOWER, this
parameter is not used.
In the Follower: If the speed reference is read from
the master drive, set Parameter 70.17 FOLL SPEED
REF to 1 = MASTER in the follower.
70.17 FOLL SPEED REF
Test the load sharing in practice. Also test the function
with an emergency stop.
25.03 LOAD SHARE
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
2 - 19
Chapter 2 – Start-up
DriveWindow
Backup/Restore
Function
When finishing the ACS 600 commissioning it is recommend making
a backup file of the NAMC board parameters. If required the
parameters can then be downloaded into a spare board of the same
type.
Before You Start
For COMPLETE BACKUP function the
DriveWindow shortcut must be edited as follows.
1. Add parameter ’ /A’ to command line, e.g.
’C:\ABBTOOLS\DRIWIN\CDW.EXE /A’
2. Mark the Run in separate memory Space field.
DriveWindow Complete Backup:
COMPLETE BACKUP saves the PARAMETER.DDF file from the NAMC board including nominal values of the
inverter. The file extension is *.DDB.
Make Complete Backup always after changing parameter values! Save also the parameter list after making
changes.
Complete Backup
1
Start the DriveWindow; all the connected drives are
shown on tree display.
2
Select a drive by clicking on the icon with left mouse
button.
3
In the DriveWindow select: Drive >> Backup >>
Create complete backup >> OK.
2 - 20
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 2 – Start-up
4
Select the disc and directory for saving the backup
(e.g.
D:\1234XF\pm007\dw_data\backups\complete).
5
Write file name (for example the drive number),
maximum 8 characters.
Notification Backup Successfully Created appears
when Backup is completed.
Parameter Saving
1
Select the drive by clicking the icon with left mouse
button. Open parameter list.
2
Open all parameter groups.
3
Select the disc and directory for saving the
parameters (e.g. D:\1234xf\pm007\dw_data\param).
4
Write the file name (for example drive number),
maximum 8 characters.
5
In the next window you can also write a comment.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
2 - 21
Chapter 2 – Start-up
DriveWindow Restoring Complete Backup:
Restoring a COMPLETE BACKUP downloads the whole contents of the PARAMETER.DDF file to FPROM
(Flash PROM memory) on the NAMC board. This is the easiest and the recommended way to download
parameters to a spare board, because it also restores the inverter nominal values. The board and loading
package types (e.g. NAMC-21 and AM4B5230) of the original and spare board must match. See signal
4.1 in the drive.
DriveWindow Restore
1
Disconnect CH0 optical cable from the NAMCboard.
Connect DriveWindow directly to NAMC-board CH3
with optical cable.
Power-on the NAMC-board.
2
In the DriveWindow select: Drive >> Restore and
select the directory, where complete Backup files is
stored. Note: Complete Backup must not use for
version updates (e.g. AM4B5230 -> AM4B5250).
(e.g. D:\1234xf\pm007\dw_data\backups\complete)
3
From list files of type selection box chance file type
to ‘Complete Backup Files’
4
Select file (e.g.11.DDB) and click OK.
5
Reset the error message Version Conflict by
clicking Yes, if the only difference is that the Backup
and Target Node numbers are different.
2 - 22
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 2 – Start-up
6
After the notification Restore successfully done
and the error message (see the picture on right)
have appeared, turn off and on the auxiliary voltage
of the NAMC-board (restart). Connect DW to the
drive and check parameters, step 8.
Version Conflict message, see step 7.
7
Notification Version Conflict: the system program
and the backup file are of different versions. Load
the correct system program. See a separate guide.
Otherwise continue from step 8.
8
Open parameter list and open all parameter groups:
Signals and Parameters >> Group >> Open All
Groups.
9
Compare the opened list to the saved parameter file:
File >> Compare, select the Parameter-file, e.g.
(D:\1234xf\pm007\dw_data\param) ’11.DWP’.
10
Some parameter groups may have different values,
like reference values, limits and data (parameter
groups: 19, 20, 21, 23, 25, 26), because the control
system (AC 80, APC) updates the values.
11
Reinstall all connections as they were before making
restore. Reconnect +24 V DC to the NAMC-51
board.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
2 - 23
Chapter 2 – Start-up
2 - 24
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 3 – Software Description
Drive Functions
This chapter describes the typical functions of the ACS 600 drive.
General
Figure 3 - 1 Block Diagram of the Direct Torque Control Method
The motor control of ACS 600 frequency converter is based on the
direct control of motor torque (DTC) by means of the stator flux. The
inverter power semiconductors (swithes) are regulated to achieve the
required stator flux and torque of the motor. The power module
“switching reference” is changed only if the values of the actual
torque and the stator flux differ from their reference values more than
the allowed hysteresis. The reference value for the torque controller
comes either from the speed controller or directly from an external
source.
The motor control requires the measurements of the intermediate
circuit voltage and two phase currents of the motor. The stator flux is
calculated by integrating the motor voltage in vector space. The
torque of the motor is calculated as a cross product of the stator flux
and rotor current. By utilising the identified motor model, the stator
flux estimate is improved. The measurement of the shaft speed is not
needed for the motor control. Good dynamic control performance is
achieved providing the identification run is done during the
commissioning.
The main difference between traditional control and the DTC is that
the torque control is made at the same time level as the control of
power switches (25 µs). There is no separate voltage and frequency
controlled PWM modulator. All selections of the switches are based
on the electromagnetic state of the motor.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
3-1
Chapter 3 – Software Description
The DTC can only be applied by using high speed signal processing
technology. Digital signal processors (MOTOROLA 560xx) are used
in ACS 600 products to achieve this performance.
Application
Program
Identificatinon
Each ACS 600 product has a product specific loading package, which
contains all necessary software files to be downloaded to the NAMC
board. The loading packages define for example the inverter ratings
which are different for AC and DC supplied inverters. Loading
Package type information can be identified from the signal 4.01 SW
PACKAGE VER. There are two different types of loading packages
for ACS 600 System Application:
• AM4G6xxx for non parallel connected inverters (e.g. 100 kVA)
• AM5G6xxx for parallel connected inverters (e.g. 4 x R11i)
The downloaded application program version can be identifiable from
signal 4.03 APPLIC SW VERSION.
3-2
Program
Boot
The application program on the NAMC board is saved into FPROM
memory. After switching on the auxiliary power, the program starts
routines for initialisation and loading of all tasks, parameters and
application program from FPROM to RAM memory. This takes about
6 seconds. A reset is given at the end of the boot procedure, and the
control mode of the drive is changed to REMOTE.
Control Diagrams
The speed control is executed once per millisecond in the fixed part
of the software (speed ramp every 2 ms). The following figures show
the speed and torque control chains.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Figure 3 - 2
TORQ REF A
SPEED REF
MCW
MINIMUM AI1
AI2 HIGH VALUE
AI21 LOW VALUE
MINIMUM AI2
13.12
13.04
13.05
13.06
MINIMUM AI3
FILTER AI3
13.10
13.11
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
10.09
10.02
AI2
AI3
RESET
REVERSE
FORWARD
STOP
START
LOC/REM
REF
LOCAL CTRL
PANEL
PROGRAMMABLE
FUNCTIONS:
DI3...DI6, EXT2:DI1
and EXT2:DI2
START, STOP
REVERSE
RESET
SYNC CMD
KLIXON
MOTOR FAN ACK
HAND/AUTO
RUN ENABLE DI2
NO EME STOP DI1
DIGITAL
INPUTS
PULSE ENCODER
SPEED MEASUREMENT
NTAC-02
NIOB-01
AI3 HIGH VALUE
AI31 LOW VALUE
13.09
10.01
AI1
EXT1:AI2
13.08
FILTER AI2
FILTER AI1
13.03
13.07
AI1 LOW VALUE
EXT1:AI1
AI1 HIGH VALUE
13.02
LOCAL
LOCAL
DIRECTION
CONTROL
LOCAL
STARTING
HANDLING
LOCAL
LOCAL REF
(Default)
DI5 Reset
MOTOR2
MOTOR1
PTC, PT100
MOTOR
TEMP
98.06
11.01
B
1.02
ENCODER ALM/FLT
50.05
MAIN CONTROL
WORD
LOCAL DIRECTION
MCW
RESET
START/STOP
RUN ENABLE
NO EME STOP
START/STOP
CONTROL
ENCODER MODULE
ENCODER PULSE NR
50.04
98.01
SPEED FB SEL
SPEE D MEAS MODE
SPEE D SCALING
50.03
50.02
50.01
SPEED
ESTIMATED
1
-1
LOCAL
DIRECTION
MCW
1
-1
7.01
70.17
FOLL
SPEED
REF
LOCAL REF1
SPE ED
MEASUREMENT
B TORQ REF B
>1
MOTOR
MODEL
DI3 Start/Stop
(Default)
(Default)
DI4
Reverse
SPEED
MEASURED
1.03
30.06
98.06
ACT2
TORQ REF 2
COMM MODULE 98.02
ACT1
Dataset 2
MSW
CH0
REF2
REF1
MCW
Dataset 1
COMM. MODULE
= FBA DSET 1
MSW
30.0 3
A
MCW
98.02
FIELD BUS
ADAPTER
SPEED ACT
ANALOGUE
INPUTS
CH0
Datasets 11...33
CH0
Datasets 10...32
FBA DSET10
CO MM. MODULE =
13.01
98.02
FIELD BUS
COMMUN.
MAXIMUM SPE ED
MI NIMUM S PEED
LIMITE R
50.06
MCW
23.05
MOTOR
SPEED
FILT
1.01
.
1.04
MOTOR
SPEED
SPEED
REF2
2.01
0
70.11
70.10
70.09
70.08
ACW B 2
22.08
ACW B 3
22.07
22.06
22.05
22.04
22.03
22.02
22.01
MCW B5
MCW B6
MCW B4
HO LD
RAM P
0
CH2
dV/dt
MASTER REF1
MASTER REF2
MASTER REF3
CH2 M/F MODE
= MASTER
MASTER
DRIVE
RAMP BYPASS
BAL RAMP REF
BAL RAMP OUT
VARIABLE SLOPE
RATE
VARIABLE SLOPE
RAMP SHPE TIME
EME STOP RAMP
ACC/DEC TIME SCALE
DECELER TIME
SPEED
MAXIMUM
SPEED
MINIMUM
LIMITER
+
+
SPEED
ACTUAL
SPEED
REF4
2.18
23.09
23.08
23.07
70.08
SET_POINT_WEIGHT
SET_P_WEIGHTING
CH2
Dataset 41
MCW
SPEED REF
TORQ REF A
CH2 M/F MODE
= FOLLOWER
FOLLOWER
DRIVE
(not shown in the signal
23.01 SPEED REF)
W INDOW WIDTH NEG
W INDOW WIDTH POS
WINDOW INTG ON
SPEED ERROR FILT
(-1)
FILTER
WINDOW
SPEED STEP 23.10
23.06
24.08
24.07
ACC COMPFILT TIME
24.15
Fast Master / Follower
DDCS Link
2.16
20.02
20.01
SP EED RE F3
2.02
23.04
ACC/DEC/SHAPE
ACCELER TIME
(INCHING 1)
CONST SPEED 2 23.03
(INCHING 2)
CONST SPEED 1 23.02
MCW B8, B9
SPEED CORRECTION
ACC COMP DER TIME
24.14
ACCELERATION
COMPENSATION
2.03
+
+
_
24.11
2.20
2.19
DERIV. FILT TIME
DERIVATION TIME
TIS VAL MIN FREQ
KPS VAL MIN FREQ
KPS TIS MAX FREQ
KPS TIS MIN FREQ
TIS INIT VALUE
TIS
KPS WP FILT TIME
C See next figure
24.13
24.12
24.20
24.19
24.18
24.17
24.10
24.09
24.06
KPS MIN
KPS W EAKPOINT
24.04
24.05
KPS
SPC TORQMIN
24.03
20.08
PI
D
TIS
KPS
T ORQ
R EF2
FIGUR2_1_60.dsf
KPS TIS MAX FREQ
KPS TIS MIN FREQ
m o to r freq
TIS VAL MIN FREQ
KPS VAL MAX FREQ
K PS
T IS
KPS
TORQUE INTEG REF
SPC TORQ
MAX LIM
SPC TORQ
MIN LIM
SPC TORQ MIN
SPC TORQ MAX
LIMITER
TORQUE PROP REF
TORQUE DER REF
PID- CONTROLLER
SPC TORQMAX
BAL_NCONT
BAL REF
24.02
DROOP RATE
SPEED CONTROL
20.07
ACW b8
SPEED ERROR
NEG
2.07
TORQ ACC COMP REF
ACS 600 SYSTEM APPLICATION v. 6.0
TIME: 500 ms
FILTER
S P ACT FILT TIME
FILTER
SPEED SHARE
23.01
SPEED REF
20.02
20.01
LOCAL
SPEED REFERENCE CHAIN
2.06
2.05
8.03 bit 2
8.03 bit 1
2.09
TORQ REF2
2.04
.
Chapter 3 – Software Description
Speed Control Chain
3-3
3-4
See previous figure
TORQ REF B
FLUX MIN LIMIT
FLUX_MIN
FLUX_MAX
27.04
27.05
FLUX OPTIMIZATION
27.01
8.03 bit 9
27.02
20.10
20.09
8.03 bit 8
TREF TORQ MAX LIM
D C MAG NETIZE
START CO NTRO L
27.02
20.18
1.05
1.10
FLUX BRAKING
27.05
P GENERATING LIM
P MOTORING LIM
P GENERATING LIM
P MOTORING LIM
27.05
D C M A G NE T IZ E O N
FLUX_MIN
FIELDWK_POINT_ACT
FREQUENCY
DC_VOLTAGE
FIE LD
W EAKEN IN G
8.04 bit 1
27.04
PULLOUT TCOEF MIN
20.13
8.04 bit 0
MINIMUM TORQUE
PULLOUT TCOEF MAX
20.12
MAXIMUM TORQUE
TORQUE LIMITER
2.09
20.06
20.05
27.03
FLUX REF
2.24
TORQ POW
LIM REF
TORQ REF2
POWER LIMIT
CALCULATION
FLU X REF
SELECTOR
8.03 bit 13
8.03 bit 12
2.08
26.01
26.07
26.06
26.05
26.04
SPEED CONTROLLER OUTPUT
8.03 bit 7
TREF TORQ MIN
2.08
TORQ REF1
1.02
SPEED ACT UAL
2.02
SPEED REF3
TREF TORQ MIN LIM
20.17
1.05
LIMITER
TREF TORQ MAX
FREQUENCY
2.23
TORQ DC
LIM REF
FLUXBRAKE_CUR_REF
FLUX BRAKING
FLUX BRA KE
DC OVERVOLT LIM
DC UNDERVOLT LIM
DC OVERVOLTAGE
DC UNDERVOLTA GE
DC-VOLTAGE
LIMITER
FLUX CONTROL CHAIN
27.03
FLUX REF
F LUX
O PTIMIZATION
8.03 bit 15
FREQ LIMIT
1.10
8.03 bit 11
20.11
8.03 bit 10
FR EQ TRIP MARGIN
29.03
FREQ MIN LIMIT
FREQUENCY MIN
29.02
2.22
DC VOLTAGE
FREQ MAX LIMIT
FR EQUENCY MAX
TORQ RAMP DN TIME
TORQ RAMP UP TIME
RAMPING
TORQ FREQ
LIM REF
25.06
FREQ LIMITER
TORQ REF 5
LOCAL TORQU E REF
(LOCAL REF 2)
25.05
TORQ REF A FTC
FILTER
LOCAL
25.04
I/O TORQUE
REF
LOAD SHARE
25.03
25.02
TORQ REF A
B
TORQ REF A
25.01
FOLL TORQ REF
DS TORQ REF A
M/F link TORQUE REF C
2.20
FIELD BUS TORQUE REF A
70.18
FLU X R EF
S ELECTOR
5 6
INV MA X CURR ENT
TORQUE LIMIT
CALCULATION
4
2 1
3
0
8.03 bit 4
8.03 bit 3
FLUX_USED_REF
8.03 bit 0
TORQ MOTOR LIM
8.03 bit 5
TORQ MIN LIM
8.03 bit 6
2.13
FLUX USED
REF
TORQ MAX LIM
TORQ INV CUR LIM
2.10
TORQ REF3
TORQ
USED REF
26.02
TORQ USER CUR LIM
2.14
TORQU E STEP
LOAD COMPEN SAT ION
26.03
MAXIMUM CUR REN T
FLUX MIN_LIMIT
FLUX_MIN
FLUX_MAX
F LU X
RA M P IN G
20.04
1.06
MOTOR
CURRENT
+
ADD
+
MAX
MIN
T ORQ REF SEL
TORQUE REFERENCE
SELECTOR
OSCILLATION GAIN
OSCILLATION PHASE
OSCILLATION FREQ
OSC COMPENSATION
OSCILLATION
DAMPING
1.07
>1
8.03 bit 14
TORQUE LIMIT
ESTIMATE AND
CALCULATE
MOTOR PARAMETERS
ACTUAL VALUES
CALCULATE
MOTOR MODEL
2.15
FLUX BITS
TORQ BITS
FILTER AO2
SCALE AO2
15.10
SCALE AO3
15. 15
CURRENT
MEASUREMENT
SCALE AO 4
S1,S2,S3
15. 20
AO4
M
MINIMUM AO4
15. 18
FILTER AO 4
INVERT AO 4
15. 17
15. 19
AO3
ANALOGUE OUTPUT 4
FILTER AO 3
15. 14
15. 16
MINIMUM AO 3
15. 13
ANALOGUE OUTPUT 3
INVERT AO 3
15. 12
DC VOLTAGE
MEASUREMENT
OPTIMAL
SWITCHING
LOGIC
ASICS
MINIMUM AO2
15.09
15. 11
INVERT AO2
15.08
AO2
ANALOGUE OUTPUT 2
AO1
15.07
SCALE AO1
FILTER AO1
MINIMUM AO1
INVERT AO1
ANALOGUE OUTPUT 1
ANALOGUE
OUTPUTS
NIOC-01
DO3 BIT NUMBER
15.06
15.05
15.04
15.03
15.02
15.01
FIGURE_2_2_60.dsf
CNTRL BITS
2.12
MOTOR TORQUE
TORQ_HYST
FLUX ACT
FLUX_HYST
HYSTERESIS CONTROL
DIRECT TORQUE and FLUX
2.11
TORQ REF4
TORQ REF5
14.07
DO3 GROUP+INDEX
DO2 BIT NUMBER
14.06
DO2 GROUP+INDEX
14.05
DO1 BIT NUMBER
DO1 GROUP+INDEX
DO1 CONTROL
14.04
14.03
14.02
14.01
DIGITAL
OUTPUTS
NIOC-01
OUTPUT SIGNAL SELECTIONS
Available with optional NAIO -0x module
TORQUE CONTROL CHAIN
Chapter 3 – Software Description
Figure 3 - 3 Torque Control Chain
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 3 – Software Description
Control Modes
The ACS 600 System Application Program has two main control
modes: REMOTE and LOCAL. The mode is selected by the
LOC/REM key on either from the CDP 312 control panel or the
DriveWindow tool.
REMOTE
Mode
A drive is controlled either through the DDCS communication link
from an overriding system or from the drive I/O. The desired
alternative is selected by parameter 98.02 COMM MODULE. A digital
input can also be selected for changing the control location.
HAND/AUTO
Function
This mode is suitable for applications requiring alternation between
an overriding system (connected to CHO) and the digital and the
analogue inputs. The active control location can be switched from the
overriding system to I/O by using a digital input in REMOTE mode.
See Parameter 10.07 HAND/AUTO.
LOCAL
Mode
The local control mode is mainly used when commissioning and
servicing. Local control is selected by the LOC/REM key on either the
CDP 312 control panel or DriveWindow. The controls from the
overriding system have no effect in this mode. Changing the control
location to LOCAL can be disabled with Parameter 16.04 LOCAL
LOCK. Parameter values can always be monitored and changed
regardless of the selected control mode.
Emergency Stop
The emergency stop function follows the principles of the Safety of
Machinery standards EN 292-1: 1991, EN 292-2: 1991, EN 418:
1992, EN 954-1: 1996 and EN 60204-1: 1992 + Corr. 1993.
ACS 600 MultiDrive hardware and System Application Program fulfils
the following emergency stop category classes:
• Class 0 Immediate removal of power.
• Class 1 Controlled emergency stop.
See also ACS 600 MultiDrive Safety and Product Information (Code
3AFY 63982229).
Emergency
Stop
Hardware
The Emergency stop signal is connected to digital input 1 (DI1) of
the Basic I/O board (NIOC-01) or NDIO Extension module 1 and is
activated by setting DI1 or Main Control Word (MCW) bit 2 to FALSE
(0).
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
3-5
Chapter 3 – Software Description
The emergency stop feedback signal is sent through relay output
RO1 of NIOC-01 or NDIO module 1 to the ACU (Auxiliary Control
Unit) which contains the control relays for the common emergency
stop circuit. The purpose of the feedback signal is to confirm that the
emergency stop function has been received and the drive program is
running. If no feedback is received, the main AC supply will be
switched off by hardware after the short delay defined by the ACU
(Auxiliary Control Unit) adjustable relays.
Note: When an emergency stop signal is detected, the emergency
stop cannot be cancelled even though the signal is cancelled
(emergency stop push button is released).
Torque Limit
Ramping
beginning of
Emergency
Stop
Emergency
Stop Modes
The maximum and minimum torque limits ramping to low value for a
while can be used to guarantee smooth direction change of power
with regenerative supply units. This function can be selected by
Parameter 21.08 EM STOP TORQ RAMP.
Action if the
Motor Is
Stopped
The following actions are taken it the motor is already at zero speed
when the drive receives an emergency stop signal.
The emergency stop mode can be pre-selected by Parameter 21.04
EME STOP MODE. On an emergency stop, the torque selector is
always set to position SPEED CONTROL except when in the
FOLLOWER STOP mode.
• Run and magnetising of motor is prevented.
• Bit 5 is set to a 0 of the MAIN STATUS WORD (MCW)
• Bit 1 of ALARM WORD 1 (9.04) is set to 1.
• Relay output RO1 is energised until the MCW bit 0 is set to 0.
Action if the
Motor Is
Running
The following actions are taken it the motor is running when the drive
receives an emergency stop signal.
• The drive is stopped according to the emergency stop mode
Parameter EME STOP MODE (21.04).
• The application program locks the emergency stop procedure and
energises the relay output1 until the motor has reached zero
speed and the (MCW) MAIN CTRL WORD (7.01) bit 0 is set to “0”
state.
3-6
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 3 – Software Description
• The application program supervises that the deceleration of the
drive is within the window defined by Parameters 21.05 EMSTOP
DER MIN L and 21.06 EMSTOP DER MAX L. This supervision
starts according to 21.07 DECEL MON DELAY. If the drive is not
able to decelerate the motor within the window, it is stopped by
coasting and (ASW) AUX STATUS WORD (8.02) bit 2
(EMERG_STOP_COAST) is set to 1.
Prevention of
Unexpected StartUp
The ACS 600 MultiDrive can be equipped with an optional prevention
of unexpected start-up circuit. It conforms to the following standards:
EN 292-1: 1991, EN 292-2: 1991, EN 954-1: 1996, EN 60204-1: 1992
+ Corr. 1993 and EN 1037: 1995.
The function is realised by disconnecting the control voltage of the
inverter power semiconductors. Thus it is not possible for the power
semiconductors to switch and generate the AC voltage needed to
rotate the motor.
WARNING! Prevention of unexpected start-up does not
disconnect the voltage from the main and auxiliary circuits.
Therefore, maintenance work on electrical parts can only be
carried out after switching off the mains supply of the drive
system.
The prevention of unexpected function operates as follows:
The operator activates the prevention of unexpected start-up with a
switch mounted on the control desk. The drive application program
diagnostics routine receives an internal signal from the NINT board
that a prevention of unexpected start-up input has been detected.
Then the voltage supply of the NGPS-0x board is disconnected.
The program performs the following actions:
• Drive is stopped by coasting, if the function has been activated
during run. This is at first hardware-controlled; the program only
provides diagnostics at this point.
• Activates the alarm “START INHIBI” (start inhibition).
• ALARM WORD_1 (9.04) bit 0 is set to 1.
• AUXILIARY STATUS WORD (8.02) bit 8 is set to 1.
If a start command is given while the prevention of the unexpected
start-up function is active, the fault “START INHIBI” is activated (start
inhibition).
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
3-7
Chapter 3 – Software Description
Communication
DDCS Channels in
NAMC
CONTROLLERS
In the following table there is described how the DDCS channels on
the NAMC board is used.
The types of the optic components are also given (5 MBd or 10
MBd).
Table 3 - 1 Usage and Type of DDCS Channels in NAMC
Controllers.
CH
No
STANDARD
USAGE
ACS 600 MD
CH0
CH1
CH2
CH3
- Applic. Controller
NAMC-51
DDCS Communication
Option
NAMC-51
NDCO-01
NDCO-02
-
10 MBd
5 MBd
- Fieldbus Interface
- Basic I/O
DDCS/
DriveBus
5 MBd
-
-
- Master / Follower
-
10 MBd
10 MBd
- DriveWindow
-
10 MBd
10 MBd
- Optional I/O
(PC, 1 Mbit/s)
Several communication protocols are supported by fieldbus adapters
connected to DDCS channel 0 (CH0) on the NAMC board. The
communication protocol of channels CH0...CH3 is DDCS (Distributed
Drives Communication System). The NAMC-51 board CH0 supports
either DriveBus or DDCS protocol. The Drivebus master can send
one message that contains 1 data set for 10 drives during a 1 ms.
The DDCS link between the overriding system and the drive uses
data sets for the information exchange. The link sends the
information of a transmitted data set to the data set table in the drive
program and returns the content of the next data set to the overriding
system as a “return message”. The data received from the overriding
system affects only the RAM (not FPROM) memory on the NAMC
board.
Fieldbus
Communication
Adapters on the
Channel CH0
3-8
Fieldbus communication mainly uses data sets 1 and 2 between the
fieldbus adapter and the NAMC board. Some of the adapters can
transfer more data. For that purpose there is an offset parameter for
the first transmitted data set in Parameter Group 51. For example, by
setting the offset to 9, the first data set written to data set 10. Set
parameter 71.01 CH0 DRIVEBUS MODE off and reconnect the
auxiliary power to NAMC-board.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 3 – Software Description
Fieldbus
Signals
Signal sources and targets have been fixed as shown in the table
below. This mode is applied with selection FBA DSET 1 for
Parameter 98.02 COMM MODULE. The signal updating interval is 10
ms.
Table 3 - 2 Fieldbus Signals
Data Set
1
Index
Signal
Source or Target
1
2
MCW
REF1
3
index 1
index 2
index 3
REF2
MSW
ACT1
ACT2
7.01
23.01
29.01
25.04
MAIN CTRL WORD
SPEED REF in DTC or
FREQ REF in Scalar control
TORQUE REF B
8.01
1.01
1.08
MAIN STATUS WORD
MOTOR SPEED FILT
MOTOR TORQUE
index
index
index
2
Addressing
of Data
Using Data
Sets 10…33
This mode is typically used when the overriding system is able to
communicate using the DDCS protocol and there is a need to
transfer several control signals and actual values. This is selected by
setting Parameter 98.02 COMM MODULE to FBA DSET10. Every
data set has a specified read and write task interval in the drive
program. See the sections ”Received Data Set Table” and
”Transmitted Data Set Table”. Addresses are assigned in the drive
according to Parameter Groups 90...93, not sent through the link
except the last data sets 32 and 33 which are dedicated for “mail
box” use.
The Mail
Box
Function
Individual parameter values can be read and set from the overriding
system simply by using data sets 32 and 33. Parameter transmit and
receive addresses and data for data sets 32 and 33 are defined in
the Overriding System application. They can be used as a “mail box”
for setting or inquiring parameter values.
Integer
Scaling on
the DDCS
Link
05
Index
unit: A
Due to the effectiveness of the communication method, the data is
transferred as integer values through the link. Therefore the actual
and reference values have to be scaled to 16-bit integers for the
DDCS link. The integer scaling factor is mentioned in the AMC table
parameter list in the column Integer scaling.
(161.3)
Description:
type: R
CURRENT
Measured motor current absolute value.
Min: 0
Max:
Integer scaling: 10 == 1A
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
3-9
Chapter 3 – Software Description
Each parameter has two different gateways to write the value: integer
format or decimal. Finally, the result is exactly same in the NAMC
program. This relationship is always shown in the signal and
parameter table as shown above.
Received
Data Set
Table
Data set target addresses are assigned by the CDP 312 control panel
or DriveWindow into Parameters 90...93, or by means of transmit
data set 32.
Addresses for Data Received from the Overriding System
Data Set
Number
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
Data Set
Index
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
Interval
NAMC-51
2 ms
2 ms
2 ms
4 ms
4 ms
4 ms
10 ms
10 ms
10 ms
10 ms
10 ms
10 ms
100 ms
100 ms
100 ms
100 ms
100 ms
100 ms
100 ms
100 ms
100 ms
100 ms
100 ms
100 ms
100 ms
100 ms
100 ms
Default
Parameter Name
Address (default values)
701
2301
2501
702
MAIN CTRL WORD
SPEED REF
TORQ REF A
AUX CTRL WORD
Address Set
Parameter
90.01
90.02
90.03
90.04
90.05
90.06
90.07
90.08
90.09
90.10
90.11
90.12
90.13
90.14
90.15
90.16
90.17
90.18
91.01
91.02
91.03
91.04
91.05
91.06
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Transmit address in NAMC program
Transmit data
Inquire address
Note: The given update times are the times within the drive is
reading data from data sets to the AMC parameter table. Since the
drive is a follower of the communication master, the actual
communication cycle time depends on the communication cycle time
of master.
3 - 10
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 3 – Software Description
Transmitted
Data Set
Table
Data set source addresses are set by the CDP 312 control panel or
DriveWindow into Parameters 90...93, or by means of transmit data
set 32.
Signal Addresses for the Data Transmitted to the Overriding System
Data Set
Number
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
Data Set
Index
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
Interval
NAMC-51
2 ms
2 ms
2 ms
4 ms
4 ms
4 ms
10 ms
10 ms
10 ms
10 ms
10 ms
10 ms
100 ms
100 ms
100 ms
100 ms
100 ms
100 ms
100 ms
100 ms
100 ms
100 ms
100 ms
100 ms
Default
Address
801
102
209
802
101
108
901
902
906
904
905
MAIN STATUS WORD
SPEED MEASURED
TORQUE REF 2
AUX STATUS WORD
MOTOR SPEED
TORQUE
FAULT WORD 1
FAULT WORD 2
FAULT WORD 3
ALARM WORD 1
ALARM WORD 2
803
804
LIMIT WORD 1
LIMIT WORD 2
111
115
TEMPERATURE (of heat sink)
MOTOR MEAS TEMP
27
29
31
33
1
2
3
Parameter Name
(default values)
100 ms
100 ms
100 ms
Address Set
Parameter
92.01
92.02
92.03
92.04
92.05
92.06
92.07
92.08
92.09
92.10
92.11
92.12
92.13
92.14
92.15
92.16
92.17
92.18
93.01
93.02
93.03
93.04
93.05
93.06
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Transmit address feedback
Inquired data
Inquired address feedback
Note: The given update times are the times within the drive is writing
data from the AMC parameter table to the data sets. Since the drive
is a follower of the communication master, the actual communication
cycle time depends on the communication cycle time of master.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
3 - 11
Chapter 3 – Software Description
Using the
NPBA-02
PROFIBUS
Adapter
Module
The NPBA-02 PROFIBUS Adapter Module is compatible with the
PROFIBUS-FMS and PROFIBUS-DP protocols. Configuration
parameters of the module are set in Parameter Group 51. Note that
the new settings take effect only when the module is powered up for
the next time.
PPO type 5 supports 10 DW (16 bit) transmit and receive. See
Parameter Groups 90...93 for information on assigning the data. The
parameter service is also available (see parameter identification).
PPO5 Messages
Process Data
Parameter Identification
Data set
16 & 17
data data data data data data data
data data data data data data data
Data set 10 & 11 Data set 12 & 13
ID
IND
VALUE
MCW REF data
MSW ACT data
Data set 14 & 15
Set: (51.02) PROFIBUS MODE
DP-PPO5
(51.03) STATION NUMBER
According to configuration of the PROFIBUS Master device
(51.05) NO. OF DATA SETS 4
(51.06) DATA SET OFFSET
9
(70.01) CH0 NODE ADDR
1
(70.03) BAUD RATE
4 Mbit/s
(51.08) COMM PROFILE
ABB DRIVES
(98.02) COMM MODULE
FBA DSET10
(71.01) CH0 DRIVEBUS MODE NO
Figure 3 - 4 PROFIBUS configuration example using NPBA-02
adapter module to transfer 10 words between the drive and the
overriding system in both directions.
See the chapter Programming in the Installation and Start-up Guide
for PROFIBUS Adapter Module NPBA-12 (Code 3BFE 64341588) or
NPBA-02 (Code 3AFY 58995789).
PROFIBUS
Parameters in
Cyclic
Communication
In addition to Process Data, parameters can be read and written
using the protocol types PPO1, PPO2 and PPO5. See the chapter
Communication in the Installation and Start-up Guide for PROFIBUS
Adapter Module NPBA-12 (Code 3BFE 64341588) or NPBA-02
(Code 3AFY 58995789).
With the formulas below you can calculate the Profibus parameter
numbers (25 parameters / group) for the ACS 600 parameter groups
10...51:
The groups 10...51 and 98...99 have 25 parameters per group.
Profibus parameter number is calculated as follows:
Profibus parameter = 25 * {Group no. - Offset + (Index/25)}
The offset has the following values:
3 - 12
•
Group no. 10 to 41
==>
Offset = 6
•
Group no. 50 to 51
==>
Offset = 10
•
Group no. 98 to 99
==>
Offset = 22
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 3 – Software Description
The groups 52...97 have 18 parameters per group instead of 25.
Profibus parameter number is calculated as follows:
Profibus parameter = 1050 + (Group no. - 52) * 18 + Index no.
The signals in the groups 1 to 3 are translated into Profibus
parameters as follows:
•
Group no.1: parameter no. 1 to 50=> Profibus parameter no. 1 to 50
•
Group no.2: parameter no. 1 to 25=> Profibus parameter no. 51 to 75
•
Group no.3: parameter no. 1 to 25=> Profibus parameter no. 76 to 100
Example: Parameter 22.01 ACCELER TIME corresponds to
PROFIBUS address
ADDR10 = 25 * {22 - 6 + (1/25)} = 40110 = 19116
(Add 4000 in FMS Mode)
I/O Devices on
Channel CH1
All of the drive I/O devices are connected in a ring to channel 1 (CH1)
on the NAMC board. The NAMC is the master in the communication
link. Each device has an individual address, set with DIP switches on
the device. Before use, each I/O device must be activated from
Parameter Group 98.
Master/Follower
Link on Channel
CH2
A Master/Follower link can be formed by connecting the CH2
channels of two or more drives in a ring. Parameters 70.07 to 70.14
define the mode and the references. The message type is broadcast.
Commissioning
and Supporting
Tools on Channel
CH3
The DriveWindow commissioning and other tools can be connected
to channel CH3 on the NAMC board, either in a ring, or a star
connection using NDBU-xx branching boards. Node numbers must
be set for each drive unit before starting the communication through
the connection: see Parameter 70.15 CH3 NODE ADDR. This setting
can be made by a point to point connection with either the control
panel CDP 312 or DriveWindow. The new node address becomes
valid after auxiliary power shutdown of the NAMC-board. The NAMCboard channel 3 (CH3) has been configured to Slave in the
communication point of view.
Modbus Link
The CDP 312 Control Panel, NLMD-01 Led Monitoring Display panel
or DriveWindow can be connected to the ACS 600 drive through a
Modbus link. The communication speed is 9600 bit/s (8 data bits, 1
stop bit, odd parity). The connected device is the master of the
communication link. An NBCI-01 bus connection units must be used
if the distance between the panel and drive is over three metres.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
3 - 13
Chapter 3 – Software Description
Terminal block X28 of
NIOC-01
Transmit/Receive
GND
BA+
GND
+24V
1
2
3
4
5
6
RS485
GDN
TXD/RXD+
TXD/RXD-
Note!
Terminating resistor
Figure 3 - 5 RS 485 Connection Principle
Modbus is designed for integration with Modicon PLCs or other
automation devices, and the services closely correspond to the PLC
architecture. The ACS 600 drive looks like a Modicon PLC on the
network.
Register
Read and
Write
The ACS 600 drive parameter and data set information is mapped
into the 4xxxx register area. This holding register area can be read
from an external device, which can modify the register values by
writing to them.
There are no setup parameters for mapping the data to the 4xxxx
registers. The mapping is pre-defined and corresponds directly to the
drive parameter grouping which is being used by the local drive
panel.
All parameters are available for both reading and writing. The
parameter writes are verified for correct value and for valid register
addresses. Some parameters never allow write access (including
actual values), some parameters allow write access only when the
drive is stopped (including setup variables), and some parameters
can be modified at any time (including actual reference values).
Register
Mapping
The drive parameters are mapped to the 4xxxx area so that:
40101 – 40999 registers are reserved for the signal values
41000 – 49999 registers are reserved for the parameter data
In this mapping, the thousands and hundreds correspond to the
group number, while the tens and ones correspond to the parameter
number within a group.
3 - 14
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 3 – Software Description
Charging Logic of
Inverter
Digital input DI2 is also used in the R2i…R6i inverter frames to
indicate the position of the DC switch (optional) to the charging logic.
Three conditions must be
fulfilled before the
charging relay can be
energised: DC voltage
level or DC voltage,
derivative = 0, DI2 = 1.
DC bars
DC switch
DI2
Charging
Logic SW
Charging
Relay
M
When the DC switch is
opened, control pulses of
the inverter are blocked as
in the RUN ENABLE
function and the charging
relay is opened. In case of
undervoltage in the
supply, the charging relay
opens after the
undervoltage trip.
ABB Drive Profile
Drive States
The ABB Drive Profile is a PROFIBUS-based model to describe the
drive interface between the state transitions under control of an
overriding control system. In order to achieve this, the ABB Drive
Profile defines general states. A control word generally commands
transitions between these states. The table below gives an
interpretation for the most important states and also the ABB names
for these states.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
3 - 15
Chapter 3 – Software Description
Table 3 - 3 ABB Drive Profile States, see Chapter 4 – Signals for
more Information on Status and Commands.
3 - 16
Action
Name of state
Explanation
Switch on inhibit
ON_INHIBIT
The drive is moved to this state after the EMERGENCY
OFF/STOP or TRIPPED state. The main idea is to guarantee that
the ON command is removed.
Drive is moved to an OFF -state after the ON command has been
removed.
Not ready for
switch on
OFF
The drive stays in this state as long as the EMERGENCY
OFF/STOP commands are active.
After these commands have been deactivated and the command
“Control from the automation unit” is activated, the drive is moved
to the RDYON state.
Ready to switch
on
RDY_ON
After an “ON” command the drive is allowed to perform equipment
specific actions. For drives these are:
- Flux ON
- Stator pulses inhibited
Ready
RDY_RUN
Enable operation
RDY_REF
After a “RUN” command the drive performs
- enabling internal controllers,
When all internal controllers are ready, the drive is moved to
RDYREF state.
The drive is following the given references.
RFG: enable
output
This is actually the speed ramp control, all drive controllers are
activated but the output of the speed ramp is clamped to zero.
This causes the drive to decelerate to zero speed and regulate
zero speed.
RFG:
Acceleration
enabled
This is also the speed ramp control, the ramping can be started or
stopped (HOLD).
Operating status
OFF 1 active
This is also the speed ramp control, the input of ramp is released.
The ON command is removed. The drive deactivates all of its
functions which were commanded by the ON command e.g.
Drive is first decelerated to the zero speed by emergency stop
ramp.
- Stator and flux current to zero.
OFF 2 active
OFF_2_STA
EMERGENCY
OFF
OFF 3 active
OFF_3_STA
EMERGENCY
STOP
Fault
TRIPPED
After this the drive is shifted to the OFF-state.
The voltage of the drive is immediately removed (coast stop), all
functions created by the ON command are removed and after that
the drive is shifted to ON INHIBIT state.
The drive is decelerated to zero speed according to the parameter
21.04 EME STOP MODE, all of the functions created by the ON
command are removed and after that the drive is shifted to the
ON INHIBIT state.
After tripping the drive remains in this state as long as the rising
edge of the RESET-signal is sent to the drive. The drive is shifted
to the ON INHIBIT state, so the ON command must first be turned
OFF before the sequence is allowed to continue.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 3 – Software Description
Main Control Word
(MCW)
The table below defines the use of the ABB Drive Profile command
word for drives application.
Table 3 - 4 Main Control Word Bits 0 to 7, see Chapter 4 – Signals
for more Information on Status and Commands.
Bit
Name
0
ON
1
Command to “RDYRUN” –state.
OFF1
0
Command to “OFF” state. (Can go immediately to “RDYON” -state
if there are no other interlockings (OFF 2 / OFF 3).
1
OFF 2
Value
1
0
2
OFF 3
1
0
3
RUN
1
0
4
RAMP-OUTZERO
1
0
5
RAMP-HOLD
1
0
6
7
RAMP-INZERO
RESET
Description
Drive stops down to the zero speed by ramp. Ramp time is defined
by parameter 22.04 EME STOP RAMP. All pulses are removed,
when in zero speed. Restart is not possible before zero speed.
No OFF 2 (Emergency OFF)
Command to “ON INHIBIT” state.
Inhibit pulses and drive coasts down.
Sequence control handles:
- Stator and flux current to zero
- All pulses are removed
No OFF 3 (Emergency STOP)
Command to “ON INHIBIT” state. Digital input 1 in the hardware
operates parallel with this bit.
Fast stop: The fastest possible deceleration, by current limit, fast
ramp or coast stop. Defined in the parameter 21.04 EME STOP
MODE.
After zero speed the sequence control handles:
- Stator and flux current to zero
- All pulses are removed
Enable Operation
Command to RDYREF -states.
Enable stator/armature pulses.
Raise flux to the nominal reference if not already in that value.
Then accelerate via speed ramp to the given speed reference setpoint.
Inhibit Operation.
Inhibit inverter pulses and the drive coasts, and goes into the
“READY” status (refer to control word bit 0)
Operating condition.
Ramp-function generator output is set to zero.
Drive ramps down along the current limit or at the DC-link voltage
limit.
Enable ramp-function generator.
1
Speed ramping stopped. Freeze the actual setpoint from the rampfunction generator.
Enable setpoint
0
Inhibit setpoint. Speed ramp input is forced to zero.
1
Fault resetting with a positive edge.
0
No significance
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
3 - 17
Chapter 3 – Software Description
Table 3 - 5 COMMAND WORD Bits 8 to 10 meaning, see Chapter 4
– Signals for more Information on Status and Commands.
Bit
Name
8
INCHING_1
Value
1
0
9
10
3 - 18
INCHING_2
REMOTE_CMD
1
Description
Drive accelerates as fast as possible to inching setpoint 1, if
following conditions are fulfilled:
- bit RAMP-OUT-ZERO = 0
- bit RAMP-HOLD = 0
- bit RAMP-IN-ZERO = 0
Drive brakes as fast as possible if INCHING_1 was previously ON
0
Drive accelerates as fast as possible to inching setpoint 2, if
following conditions are fulfilled:
- bit RAMP-OUT-ZERO = 0
- bit RAMP-HOLD = 0
- bit RAMP-IN-ZERO = 0
Drive brakes as fast as possible if INCHING_1 was previously ON
1
Overriding computer is requesting to control the drive
0
No control from the overriding system, except OFF1, OFF2 and
OFF3 commands.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 3 – Software Description
Voltage
switched off
Switch on
inhibit
Power ON
OFF 1 (MCW Bit0=0)
not ready
to switch on
AB C DE F
operation
disabled
ready to
switch on
Inhibit inverter pulses
Status: Operation Disabled
(MSW Bit2=0 RDY_REF)
ABB Drive Profile
for AC-drives
Control and
States
from every device status
Fault
from every device status
OFF1 (MCW Bit0=0)
Stop by EMESTOP_RAMP
(MSW Bit1=0 RDY_RUN)
Stop drive
Status:
TRIPPED
(MSW Bit3=1)
Fault
Status Ready for startup
RDY_ON (MSW Bit0=1)
Error corrected
confirm by
RESET (MCW Bit7= 1)
ON (MCW Bit0=1)
Ready
OFF1
active
Status Not ready for startup
OFF (MSW Bit0=0)
Main Control word basic condition
(MCW=XXXX X1XX XXXX X110)
disable operation
(MCW Bit3=0 RUN)
Inhibit
Operation
active
Status Disable
ON INHIBIT (MSW Bit6=1)
Status Ready for operation
RDY_RUN (MSW Bit1=1)
Release
from every device status
operation
RUN
Emergency Stop
OFF3 (MCW Bit2=0)
(MCW Bit3=1)
Stop drive
OFF3
according to
active
EME_STOP_MODE
from every device status
Emergency Off
OFF2 (MCW Bit1=0)
OFF2
active
OFF_3_STA
(MSW Bit5=0)
n(f)=0 / I=0
Coast Stop
(no torque)
Status:
OFF_2_STA
(MSW Bit4=0)
n(f)=0 / I=0
B CD
RFG-output
disable
(MCW Bit4=0
RAMP_OUT_ZERO)
Enable
Operation
CD
A
RFG stop
(MCW Bit5=0
RAMP_HOLD)
Release electronics and pulses
RDY_REF (MSW Bit2=1) Status Operation released
RFG-output free
RAMP_OUT_ZERO
(MCW Bit4=1)
RFG: Enable
output
D
B
Setpoint
disabled
(MCW Bit6=0
RAMP_IN_ZERO)
MCW: Bit 4 = 0 and Bit 5 = 0 and Bit 6 = 0
Purpose: Main speed ref. is deactivated
INCHING 1 ON (MCW Bit 8 = 1)
Inching 1 Active
Drive Running
RFG-output released
RAMP_HOLD
(MCW Bit5=1)
E
INCHING 1 OFF (MCW Bit 8 = 0)
RFG: Accelerator
enable
MCW = Main Control Word
C
MSW = Main Status Word
n
= Speed
I
= Power input current
RFG = Ramp Function Generator
f
= Frequency
D
INCHING 2 ON (MCW Bit 9 = 1)
Setpoint released
RAMP_IN_ZERO
(MCW Bit6=1)
Operating
state
Inching 1 setpoint
to speed control
Inching 2 Active
Drive Running
n = n_set
AT_SETPOINT
(MSW Bit8=1)
Inching 2 setpoint
to speed control
F
INCHING 2 OFF (MCW Bit 9 = 0)
CONTROL5.DRW 2.12.1999
Figure 3 - 6 Control and State Diagram, see Chapter 4 – Signals for
more Information on Status and Commands.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
3 - 19
Chapter 3 – Software Description
START by AUTO- or DC MAGN-mode, STOP by Ramp Generator Control
State
DC Voltage ON
1
100%
FLUX
30% FLUX ACTUAL
0%
23.01 SPEED REF
Par. 50.10 ABOVE_SPEED_LIMIT
MOTOR SPEED
MCW 7.01 bits
ASW 8.02 bits
ACW 7.02 bits
MSW 8.01 bits
Control by Overriding System
Par. 20.03 ZERO_SPEED_LIMIT
0 ON, OFF1
1 OFF2
2 OFF3
3 RUN
4 RAMP_OUT_ZERO
5 RAMP_HOLD
6 RAMP_IN_ZERO
7 RESET
8 INCHING1
9 INCHING2
10 REMOTE_CMD
0 rpm
2
3
6
4
7
1
1
0
RAMP_BYPASS
BAL_RAMP_OUT
FLUX_ON_DC
FLUX_ON
0
...
3 MAGNETIZED
...
11 ZERO_SPEED
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 RDY_ON
1 RDY_RUN
2 RDY_REF
3 TRIPPED
4 OFF_2_STA
5 OFF_3_STA
6 ON_INHIBITED
7 ALARM
8 AT_SETPOINT
9 REMOTE
10 ABOVE_LIMIT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
5
Time
1
0
Figure 3 - 7 Control example: Start by AUTO or DC MAGN Mode,
Stop by Ramp Generator, see Chapter 4 – Signals for
more Information on Status and Commands.
3 - 20
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 3 – Software Description
FLUX ON, START, STOP by Torque Limit, FLUX ON
State
DC Voltage ON
1
100%
FLUX
0%
23.01 SPEED REF
Par. 50.10 ABOVE_SPEED_LIMIT
MOTOR SPEED
MCW 7.01 bits
ASW 8.02 bits
ACW 7.02 bits
MSW 8.01 bits
Control by Overriding System
Par. 20.03 ZERO_SPEED_LIMIT
0 ON, OFF1
1 OFF2
2 OFF3
3 RUN
4 RAMP_OUT_ZERO
5 RAMP_HOLD
6 RAMP_IN_ZERO
7 RESET
8 INCHING1
9 INCHING2
10 REMOTE_CMD
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
9
4
6
10
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0 RDY_ON
1 RDY_RUN
2 RDY_REF
3 TRIPPED
4 OFF_2_STA
5 OFF_3_STA
6 ON_INHIBITED
7 ALARM
8 AT_SETPOINT
9 REMOTE
10 ABOVE_LIMIT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
RAMP_BYPASS
BAL_RAMP_OUT
FLUX_ON_DC
FLUX_ON
0 rpm
1
0
0
1
1
0
5
0
0
0
0
8
3
0
...
3 MAGNETIZED
...
11 ZERO_SPEED
1
0
7
Time
1
0
Figure 3 - 8 Control example: Start by FLUX ON DC Command,
Stop by Torque Limit, see Chapter 4 – Signals for more
Information on Status and Commands.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
3 - 21
Chapter 3 – Software Description
FAULT, RESET, INCHING 1, INCHING 2, RUN by SPEED REF
State
DC Voltage ON
100%
FLUX
0%
23.01 SPEED REF
MOTOR SPEED
Par. 50.10 ABOVE_SPEED_LIMIT
Par. 23.02 CONST SPEED1
Par. 20.03 ZERO_SPEED_LIMIT
0 rpm
MCW 7.01 bits
ASW 8.02 bits
ACW 7.02 bits
MSW 8.01 bits
Control by Overriding System
Par. 23.03 CONST SPEED2
0 ON, OFF1
1 OFF2
2 OFF3
3 RUN
4 RAMP_OUT_ZERO
5 RAMP_HOLD
6 RAMP_IN_ZERO
7 RESET
8 INCHING1
9 INCHING2
10 REMOTE_CMD
0 RDY_ON
1 RDY_RUN
2 RDY_REF
3 TRIPPED
4 OFF_2_STA
5 OFF_3_STA
6 ON_INHIBITED
7 ALARM
8 AT_SETPOINT
9 REMOTE
10 ABOVE_LIMIT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
2
6
9
5
3
0
0
0
0
7
8
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
RAMP_BYPASS
BAL_RAMP_OUT
FLUX_ON_DC
FLUX_ON
0
0
0
0
0
...
3 MAGNETIZED
...
11 ZERO_SPEED
1
0
Time
1
0
Figure 3 - 9 Control example: Fault Reset, Run by CONST SPEED 1
(Inching 1), CONST SPEED 2 (Inching 2) and SPEED
REF, see Chapter 4 – Signals for more Information on
Status and Commands.
3 - 22
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 3 – Software Description
EMERGENCY STOP OFF3, Start, AUTO RESTART
State
DC Voltage
100%
UDC 75%
Undervoltage trip limit
0%
100%
0%
FLUX
23.01 SPEED REF
Par. 50.10 ABOVE_SPEED_LIMIT
MOTOR SPEED
ASW 8.02 bits
Internal Control MCW
MSW 8.01 bits
Control by Overriding System
MCW 7.01 bits
Par. 20.03 ZERO_SPEED_LIMIT
0 rpm
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0 ON, OFF1
1 OFF2
2 OFF3
3 RUN
4 RAMP_OUT_ZERO
5 RAMP_HOLD
6 RAMP_IN_ZERO
7 RESET
8 INCHING1
9 INCHING2
10 REMOTE_CMD
0 RDY_ON
1 RDY_RUN
2 RDY_REF
3 TRIPPED
4 OFF_2_STA
5 OFF_3_STA
6 ON_INHIBITED
7 ALARM
8 AT_SETPOINT
9 REMOTE
10 ABOVE_LIMIT
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1)
0
0
2)
1
1
0
0 ON, OFF1
Internal commands with AUTO RESTART
function.
7 RESET
*) MSW and DC UNDERVOLTAGE
fault frozen when AUTO RESTART
enabled.
1) DC Undervoltage alarm
2) AUTO RESTARTED alarm
0
...
3 MAGNETIZED
1
0
...
11 ZERO_SPEED
Time
1
0
Figure 3 - 10 Control example: Emergency Stop with Ramp (OFF3)
and AUTO RESTART after the Short Supply Power
Failure, see Chapter 4 – Signals for more Information on
Status and Commands.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
3 - 23
Chapter 3 – Software Description
I/O Configurations
Digital Inputs
Hardware
Source
Selection for
Digital
Inputs
All the inputs can be read by the overriding controller. See signals
DI6-1 STATUS (1.15) and DI STATUS WORD (8.05). Input functions
are programmable and defined in parameter group 10.
The basic I/O board NIOC-01, NIOB-01 or NBIO-21 can be selected
by parameter 98.07 BASIC I/O BOARD.
The hardware source is selected by Parameters 98.03...98.05 and
98.07. There are five selections available:
1. NIOC-01 basic I/O board.
2. NBIO-21 I/O Unit as the basic I/O board.
3. NIOB-01 I/O Unit as the basic I/O board.
4. NDIO I/O Extension modules replace basic I/O board inputs.
5. NDIO I/O Extension modules extend the I/O.
The maximum number of digital inputs is 12.
Software
NIOC-01 I/O Board
I/O Name
DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 Ext1 Ext1 Ext2 Ext2 Ext3 Ext3
DI1 DI2 DI1 DI2 DI1 DI2
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4 *)
DI5 *)
DI6 *)
EXT1_DI1
EXT1_DI2
EXT2_DI1
EXT2_DI2
EXT3_DI1
EXT3_DI2
NDIO I/O
1
Parameter Selection
1 = Par. 98.03 = NO
1 = Par. 98.04 = NO
1 = Par. 98.05 = NO
2
1
2
1
3
1
3
1
4
1
4
2 = Par. 98.03 = REPLACE
3 = Par. 98.04 = REPLACE
4 = Par. 98.05 = REPLACE
5
5 = Par. 98.03 = EXTEND
6 = Par. 98.04 = EXTEND
7 = Par. 98.05 = EXTEND
5
6
6
7
7
*) Not available with NBIO-21 and NIOB-01 I/O Unit
Digital Outputs
The following digital outputs are available in the AMC program. The
outputs are programmable (see Parameter Group 14) and can also
be controlled from the overriding system.
The use of DO2 and DO3 control upon a communication break can
be defined by Parameter 21.07 COM LOSS RO.
Digital outputs can also be controlled from the overriding system by
means of Auxiliary Control Words 7.01 and 7.02.
3 - 24
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 3 – Software Description
Hardware
Source
Selection for
Digital
Outputs
The hardware source is selected by Parameters 98.03...98.05 and
98.07. There are five selections available:
1. NIOC-01 basic I/O board.
2. NBIO-21 I/O Unit as the basic I/O board.
3. NIOB-01 I/O Unit as the basic I/O board.
4. NDIO I/O Extension modules replace basic I/O board digital outputs and
add EXT2_DO2, EXT3_DO1 and EXT3_DO2.
5. NDIO I/O Extension modules extend the I/O. The maximum
numbers of digital inputs and outputs are 12 and 9 respectively.
EXT2 DO1 and EXT2 DO2 can also be programmed from the
group 14.
Software
NIOC-01 I/O Board NDIO I/O
I/O Name
DO1
DO1
DO2
DO3 *)
1
DO2
DO3
Parameter Selection
Ext1 Ext1 Ext2 Ext2 Ext3 Ext3
DO1 DO2 DO1 DO2 DO1 DO2
1=
2=
3=
4=
5=
6=
7=
2
1
2
1
EXT1_DO1
EXT1_DO2
EXT2_DO1
EXT2_DO2
EXT3_DO1
EXT3_DO2
3
5
5
6
Par. 98.03...05=NO
Par. 98.03=REPLACE
Par. 98.04=REPLACE
Par. 98.05=REPLACE
Par. 98.03=EXTEND
Par. 98.04=EXTEND
par. 98.05=EXTEND
3,6
4,7
4,7
*) Not available with NBIO-21 and NIOB-01 I/O Unit
Analogue Inputs
I/O Speed
Reference
Analogue inputs can be used for motor temperature measurement,
I/O speed / torque references and signals can be read by the
overriding system.
If a bipolar type of analogue input is needed, the scaling to the speed
units (integer value –20000…0…20000) is defined by Parameters
AIx HIGH VALUE and AIx LOW VALUE. The digital input function
DIRECTION is valid only with unipolar signals. See parameter
MINIMUM AI1 in Group 13.
Example:
Bipolar type of speed reference signal is needed. Range is
–10V..0…+10V. Set 13.01 AI1 HIGH VALUE to 20000 and 13.02 AI1
LOW VALUE to –20000. Select –10V with 13.12 MINIMUM AI1.
20000 units equals the speed in Parameter 50.01 SPEED SCALING.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
3 - 25
Chapter 3 – Software Description
Three differential non-galvanically isolated analogue inputs (10 bits,
accuracy +/- 0.5 %) are available on the basic (NIOC-01) I/O board.
The updating interval is 10 ms for the speed reference chain. The
overriding system can read the inputs if the motor temperature
measurement is not selected.
NIOC-01
Basic I/O
Board
NIOC-01
BASIC
I/O board
Input Type
Signal
Description
0 ... 10V DC,
Ri = 200 kΩ
MOTOR 1
_TEMP
Motor temperature measurement
by means of 1...3 PTC thermistor
or 1...3 PT100 sensors.
AI 1
or
SPEED
REFERENCE
BASIC
I/O board
0(4) ... 20 mA
Ri = 100 Ω
SPEED
REFERENCE
or not used
If both functions have been
incorrectly selected to the AI1,
MOTOR1 TEMP is valid, speed
reference is switched to zero and
an alarm ”I/O SP REF” is
indicated.
Alternative for speed reference
(mA) if I/O control control or
HAND/AUTO is selected.
0(4) ... 20 mA
Ri = 100 Ω
TORQUE
REFERENCE
or not used
Torque reference, if I/O control
control or HAND/AUTO is
selected
AI 2
BASIC
I/O board
AI 3
NBIO-21/NIOB01 Analogue
Inputs
Two bipolar 12 bit + sign analogue inputs are available on the NBIO21 and NIOB-01 I/O Unit. The hardware range (–2V…0…+2V or
-10V…0…+10V) is selected by parameters 13.13 NBIO/NIOB AI1
GAIN and 13.14 NBIO/NIOB AI2 GAIN. Voltage / current type input
is selected separately for both channels with switch S2. The node
address is A and selected with switch S1.
NBIO-21/NIOB-01
BIPOLAR MODE
AI1
BIPOLAR MODE
AI2
3 - 26
Speed reference if I/O control or
HAND/AUTO selected
Input Type
Signal
Description
-20 ..0.. +20 mA
0(4) ... 20 mA
Ri = 100 Ω
MOTOR 1 TEMP
-2 ..0.. +2 V DC
-10 ..0.. 10 V DC
Ri = 200 kΩ
SPEED
REFERENCE
-20 ..0.. +20 mA
0(4) ... 20 mA
Ri = 100 Ω
MOTOR 2 TEMP
-2 ..0.. +2 V DC
-10..0..+10 V
DC
Ri = 200 kΩ
Motor 1 temperature
measurement by means of
1...3 PTC thermistors or
PT100 sensors
or
Speed reference of the
drive in the I/O-control
mode
Motor 2 temperature
measurement by means of
1...3 PTC thermistors or
PT100 sensors.
TORQUE
REFERENCE B
or
or
Bipolar torque reference in
the I/O control mode.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 3 – Software Description
NAIO-03
Analogue
I/O
Extension
Module
It is possible to use an NAIO-03 Analogue I/O Extension Module to
replace inputs AI1, AI2 and outputs AO1 and AO2 on the NIOC-01
Basic I/O board. The resolution of the NAIO-03 is 12 bits. The input
range is selectable by DIP switches and the maximum voltage or
milliampere value corresponds an integer value in the software,
defined by parameter AIx HIGH VALUE in the group 13. The module
selection is done by Parameter 98.06.
NAIO-03
UNIPOLAR MODE
(NAIO-01 mode)
AI/O Extension
module 1
Input Type
Signal
Description
0(4) ... 20 mA
Ri = 100 Ω
0 ... 2 V DC
0 ... 10V DC,
Ri = 200 kΩ
MOTOR 1 TEMP
-20 ..0.. +20 mA
0(4) ... 20 mA
Ri = 100 Ω
MOTOR 1 TEMP
-2 ...0.. +2 V DC
-10 ..0..10 V DC
Ri = 200 kΩ
SPEED
REFERENCE
0(4) ... 20 mA
Ri = 100 Ω
0 ... 2 V DC
0 ... 10V DC
Ri = 200 kΩ
MOTOR 2 TEMP
Motor 1 temperature
measurement by means of 1...3
PTC thermistors or PT100
sensors
or
Speed reference of the drive in
the I/O-control mode
Motor 1 temperature
measurement by means of 1...3
PTC thermistors or PT100
sensors
or
Speed reference of the drive in
the I/O-control mode
Motor 2 temperature
measurement by means of 1...3
PTC thermistors or PT100
sensors.
Torque reference in the I/O
control mode.
-20 ..0.. +20 mA
0(4) ... 20 mA
Ri = 100 Ω
MOTOR 2 TEMP
-2 ...0...+2 V DC
-10..0..+10 VDC
Ri = 200 kΩ
TORQUE
REFERENCE B
or
SPEED
REFERENCE
AI1
BIPOLAR MODE
(NAIO-02 mode)
AI/O Extension
module 1
AI1
UNIPOLAR MODE
(NAIO-01 mode)
AI/O Extension
module 1
or
or
TORQUE
REFERENCE B
AI2
BIPOLAR MODE
(NAIO-02 mode)
AI/O Extension
module 1
AI2
or
Motor 2 temperature
measurement by means of 1...3
PTC thermistors or PT100
sensors.
Torque reference in the I/O
control mode.
A/D converter 12 bit
4096
NAIO-03
NAIO-01
NAIO-02
NAIO-03
0
-10.18V
0V
+10.18V
Figure 3 - 11 Resolution of the A/D Converter as a Function of the
Input Voltage
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
3 - 27
Chapter 3 – Software Description
Analogue Outputs
Two non-galvanically isolated analogue outputs (10 bits, accuracy +/1%) are available on the basic I/O board (NIOC-01). The output
updating time is 10 ms.
NIOC-01
BASIC
I/O Board
Output Type
Signal
Description
0(4) ...20 mA
Ri = 700 Ω
AO1_OUT
0(4) ...20 mA
Ri = 700 Ω
AO2_OUT
A programmable analogue output
from the program. The output can
be used also as a constant current
source to supply the temperature
measurement sensor PT100 or
PTC. The current is set
automatically according to the type
of the sensor.
(The overriding system application
can control the output)
AO 1
BASIC
I/O Board
AO 2
If an extension module is used, the resolution is 12 bits.
Programmable analogue outputs can be extended using this module.
See the different configurations at Parameter 98.06.
NAIO-03
I/O Type
Command
Description
AI/O Extension
Module 1
0(4) ...20 mA
Ri = 700 Ω
Isolated from
power supply
0(4) ...20 mA
Ri = 700 Ω
Isolated from
power supply
AO3_OUT
See Parameter 98.06 and Group
15
AO4_OUT
See Parameter 98.06 and Group
15
AO3
AI/O Extension
Module 1
AO4
The NBIO-21 or NIOB-01 I/O Unit can be configured for unipolar
0…20 mA mode with a resolution of 12 bits, or bipolar –10V…0…+10
V mode with a resolution of 11 bits + sign.
NBIO-21/ NIOB-01
AO1
AO2
3 - 28
I/O Type
Command
Description
Voltage output –
10V…0…+10V
1 kΩ min
or
Current Output
0…20 mA
Max load = 800 Ω.
Isolated from
power supply
Voltage output –
10V…0…+10V
1 kΩ min
or
Current Output
0…20 mA
Max load = 800 Ω.
Isolated from
power supply
AO1_OUT
See Parameter 98.07 and
Group 15
AO2_OUT
See Parameter 98.07 and
Group 15
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 3 – Software Description
Terminal Block X21
Motor Temperature
Measurement
1...3 PT100 or PTC
AI1+
AI1-
AO1AO1+
2) If par. 30.03 = 1..3xPT100 or PTC
T
(%)
rpm
(%)
NIOC-01 I/O Board
3
AI1+
4
AI1-
Reference voltage +10 V DC
1 k...10 k ohm
max. 10 mA
2)
Analogue Input 1
Motor temperature measurement
0...10 V
5
AI2+
Analogue Input 2
6
AI2-
0 ... 20mA
7
AI3+
Analogue Input 3
8
AI3-
0 ... 20mA
9
AO1+
10
AO1-
11
AO2+
12
AO2-
Analogue Output 1 1)
Motor Torque
0 ... 20 mA <-> 0 ... Motor nom. torque
Analogue Output 2 1)
Motor Speed
0 ... 20 mA <-> 0 ... Motor nom. speed
1
VREF
2
GND
Terminal Block X22
1) Function according
to the parameter
selections
1
DI1
No Emergency Stop
2
DI2
Run Enable
3
DI3
Start Inhibit
4
DI4
By default not in use 1)
5
DI5
By default not in use 1)
6
DI6
By default not in use 1)
7
+24 V DC
8
+24 V DC
9
DGND
+ 24 VDC max. 100 mA
Digital ground
Terminal Block X23
1
2
+24 V DC
GND
Aux. voltage output 24 V DC, 250 mA
or 130 mA if NLMD-01 option included
Terminal Block X25
Use external power supply,
if the total current consumption
exceeds 250 mA
1
RO11
2
RO12
3
RO13
Relay output 1
1)
Emergency Stop
Terminal Block X26
1
RO21
2
RO22
3
RO23
Relay output 2
Run
1)
(default)
Terminal Block X27
1
RO31
2
RO32
3
RO33
Relay output 3
1)
Fault (default)
Figure 3 - 12 NIOC-01 I/O Board Default Signals when the Drive is
Controlled through the Communication Link (Parameter
98.02 is set to FBA DSET 1 or FBA DSET 10)
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
3 - 29
Chapter 3 – Software Description
Terminal Block X21
Motor Temperature
Measurement
1...3 PT100 or PTC
AI1+
AI1-
AO1- mA-type of
AO1+ alternative for
references
2) If par. 30.03 = 1..3xPT100 or PTC
1) Function
according to the
parameter selection
T
(%)
rpm
(%)
NIOC-01 I/O Board
1
VREF
Reference voltage +10 V DC
2
GND
max. 10 mA
3
AI1+
4
AI1-
Analogue Input 1
Speed Reference
0...10 V
5
AI2+
6
AI2-
7
AI3+
8
AI3-
9
AO1+
10
AO1-
11
AO2+
12
AO2-
(default)
Analogue Input 2
Speed Reference (see par. 11.01)
0(4) ... 20mA
Analogue Input 3
Torque Reference B
0(4) ... 20mA
Analogue Output 1
Motor Torque
0 ... 20 mA <-> 0 ... Motor nom. torque
Analogue Output 2
Motor Speed
0 ... 20 mA <-> 0 ... Motor nom. speed
Terminal Block X22
4) See par. group 10 for
Start/Stop/Direction.
1
DI1
No Emergency Stop
2
DI2
Run Enable
3
DI3
Start Inhibit
4
DI4
4)
5
DI5
Reset
6
DI6
7
+24 V DC
8
+24 V DC
9
DGND
4)
+ 24 V DC max. 100 mA
Digital Ground
Terminal Block X23
1
+24 V DC
2
GND
Aux. voltage output 24 V DC, 250 mA
or 130 mA if NLMD-01 option included
Terminal Block X25
1
RO11
2
RO12
3
RO13
Terminal Block X26
3) Motor Fan Control
Fan on: DO3
Acknowledge:
Selectable DI3...DI6,
EXT2_DI1 or EXT2_DI2
See par. group 10 and 35
1
RO21
2
RO22
3
RO23
Relay output 1
Emergency
Stop
Relay output 2
Run (default)
Terminal Block X27
1
RO31
2
RO32
3
RO33
Relay output 3
Fault (default)
Figure 3 - 13 NIOC-01 I/O Board Default Signals when the Drive is
Controlled from the I/O (Parameter 98.02 COMM
MODULE is set to NO or in HAND/AUTO mode)
3 - 30
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 3 – Software Description
NIOB-01 Basic I/O
Board Connections
Terminal Block X16
Terminal Block Size:
2
0.5 to 2.5 mm (20 to 14 AWG)
NIOB-01 I/O Unit
1
2
3
4
AI1+
AI1AI2+
AI2-
5
AO1U
Analogue Output AO1 (Voltage)
6
AO1I
Analogue Output AO1 (Current)
7
AO1C
Analogue Output AO1 (Common)
8
AO2U
Analogue Output AO2 (Voltage)
9
AO2I
Analogue Output AO2 (Current)
10
AO2C
Analogue Output AO2 (Common)
Analogue Input AI1
Analogue Input AI2
Terminal Block X15
Connector X14 for RS-485 connection.
1
TRANS
2
3
4
5
6
Not Used
DATA DATA +
0V
+24 V
Data direction, transmit / Receive (Open
Collectory). Transmit = Active low.
Negative terminal of differential data
Positive terminal of differential data
RS-485 ground and power supply return
+24 V power supply
1
EA+
Positive pulse encoder input, channel A
2
EA-
Negative pulse encoder input, channel A
3
EB+
Positive pulse encoder input, channel B
4
EB-
Negative pulse encoder input, channel B
5
EZ+
Positive pulse encoder input, zero pulse
6
EZ-
Negative pulse encoder input, zero pulse
7
+24VE
Pulse encoder supply voltage (+24 V DC)
8
+15VE
Pulse encoder supply voltage (+15 V DC)
9
0VE
Pulse encoder supply return (0 V)
10
0VE
Terminal Block X13
1
24V
Positive power supply input (24 V DC)
2
0V
Power supply return
3
24V
Positive power supply input (24 V DC)
4
0V
Power supply return
Terminal Block X12
1
DI1A
Digital Input DI1, terminal A
2
DI1A
3
DI1B
Digital Input DI1, terminal B
4
DI1B
5
Not in use
6
DI2A
7
DI2B
8
Digital Input DI2, terminal A
Digital Input DI2, terminal B
Not in use
9
DI3A
Digital Input DI3, terminal A
10
DI3B
Digital Input DI3, terminal B
Terminal Block X11
1
RO1C
Relay Output RO1
2
RO1NO
3
4
5
Not in use
RO2C
RO2NO
Relay Output RO2
Figure 3 - 14 NIOB-01 I/O Unit Terminal Connections.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
3 - 31
Chapter 3 – Software Description
NBIO-21 I/O Unit
V1
V2
DDCS
24 V DC
TXD
RXD
Optical DDCS Communication Link
(1, 2 or 4 Mbit/s)
Terminal Block X1
B1
24 V
B2
A1
0V
A2
24 V IN
500 mA
Power Supply Input
24 V DC, ± 10 %
215 mA Typ., 250 mA Max
To Next Unit
Motor Temperature
Measurement
1...3 PT100 or PTC
AI 1
B3
AI1+
B4
AI1-
A3
AI2+
I/U
100R
AI1 Speed Ref or Motor 1 Temp
± 20 mA, ± 2 V or ± 10 V
I/U
100R
AI2 Torque Ref B / Motor 2 Temp
± 20 mA, ± 2 V or ± 10 V
AI1+
AI1-
AI 2
A4
AI2-
AO 1
B5
B6
B7
AO1U
AO1I
AO1C
Analog Output 1 Motor Torque
0 (4) ... 20 mA or ± 10 V
AO 2
A5
A6
A7
AO2U
AO2I
AO2C
Analog Output 2 Motor Speed
0 (4) ... 20 mA or ± 10 V
AO1C
AO1I
(*)
U
24 V DC or 115/230 V AC
(*)
B9
B10
A9
A10
DI 1
(Emerg.
Stop
Input)
DI1A
Digital Input 1
No Emergency Stop
DI1B
24 V DC or 115/230 V AC
To Next Drive
DI 2
B12
A12
DI2A
DI2B
See DI 1 above.
Digital Input 2 Run Enable
24 V DC or 115/230 V AC
DI 3
B14
A14
DI3A
DI3B
See DI 1 above.
Digital Input 3 Start Inhibit
24 V DC or 115/230 V AC
B16
RO1NO
24 V DC or
115/230 V AC
DO 1
(Emerg. Stop
Acknowledg.)
A16
RO1C
B18
RO2NO
DO 2
A18
24 V DC or 115/230 V AC
RO2C
2,5 A
2,5 A
Digital Output 1
Emergency Stop Acknowledgement
Max 250 V AC or DC; 2 A AC, 18 W DC
Digital Output 2 Run (default)
Max 250 V AC or DC; 2 A AC, 18 W DC
(*) = Connect to DIN Rail
Figure 3 - 15 NBIO-21 I/O Unit Terminal Connections.
3 - 32
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 3 – Software Description
NIOM-21 I/O MODULE 2
118
NMTU-21 MODULE TERMINATION UNIT 2
B1
A1
5 V OK
V1
V2
TXD
RXD
ADDRESS
DI1
F0 1
789
BCD
S1
7
DI2
3 45
DI3
S2 U/I SEL
1
AI1
2
AI2
U
DO1
I
120
DO2
F1
T2.5A
A18
B18
NBIO-21
F2
T2.5A
X1
8
110
Figure 3 - 16 NBIO-21 I/O Unit Dimension Drawing.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
3 - 33
Chapter 3 – Software Description
Pulse Encoder The pulse encoder module (NTAC-02) is connected to channel CH1
Interface NTAC-02 on the NAMC board and activated by Parameter 98.01 ENCODER
MODULE. The parameter 98.01 must be activated also with NIOB-01
basic I/O board. See also parameter 98.07.
The feedback used is indicated in the AUXILIARY STATUS WORD
(8.02) bit 12.
B12:
0 = External pulse encoder
1 = Internal speed
The Master /
Follower Link
General
The Master/Follower Application macro is designed for applications in
which the system is operated by several ACS 600 drives and the
shafts are coupled to each other via gearing, chain, belt etc. The
Master controls the Followers via a fibre optic serial communication
link. The pulse encoder are recommended to use in both with the
torque controlled followers.
The Master station is typically speed controlled and the other drives
follow its torque or speed reference. In general, Torque control of the
Follower should be used when the motor shafts of the Master and
Follower drives are coupled fixedly to each other via gearing, a chain
etc. and no speed difference between the drives is possible.
Link Configuration
Master
Drive
Channel 2 (CH2) on the NAMC board is used for the Master/Follower
link between the drives. The drive is programmable to be either the
master or a follower in the communication. Typically the speed
controlled process master drive is configured also to the
communication master.
The torque reference source address is defined in the Master Drive
by Parameter 70.11 MASTER REF3 to be sent as data set 41 to the
follower drives. Speed reference 70.10 MASTER REF2 can also be
sent through the link in the same DDCS message, if the follower is
speed controlled. Typical parameter addresses are:
MASTER REF1 (70.09)
MASTER REF2 (70.10)
MASTER REF3 (70.11)
not in use
23.01
2.10
not in use
SPEED REF
TORQ REF 3
The parameters above have no meaning in the follower drive.
The Master Drive cyclically sends Master References 1...3 in one
DDCS message, a broadcast every 2 milliseconds.
3 - 34
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 3 – Software Description
Follower
Drive(s)
If the Follower mode is selected by Parameter 70.08 CH2 M/F
MODE, connections are fixed in the program as follows:
Signal Addresses in the Follower Drive
Dataset
Number
41
Dataset
Index
1
2
3
Interval
2 ms
2 ms
2 ms
Address Parameter Name Signal to be Monitored
23.01
25.01
not in use
SPEED REF
TORQ REF A
2.19 DS SPEED REF
2.20 DS TORQ REF A
The Follower mode includes only fast data read from data set 41 into
the speed and torque reference chain. Therefore this mode can also
be used with the overriding system connected to CH0, typically when
fast communication is required but there is no need for a real
Master/Follower application.
NAMC-xx
Ch3
NAMC-xx
Ch2
Ch1
Ch0
INT
V18 V17
Ch3
Ch2
Ch1
Ch0
INT
V18 V17
FOLLOWER DRIVE
MASTER DRIVE
FOLLOWER DRIVE
RING CONFIGURATION
V17 V 18
INT
Ch0
Ch1
Ch2
Ch3
NAMC-xx
Figure 3 - 17 Master/Follower Fibre Optic Cable Connections
Flying
Switching
between
Speed and
Torque
Control
In some applications, both speed and torque control of the Followers
are required, e.g. if it is necessary to accelerate all drives along the
same speed ramp up to a certain speed before torque control can be
started. In those cases, a “flying” switching between speed and
torque control is required. The switching is done by controlling
parameter 26.01 TORQ REF SEL from the overriding system. See
also ACW (7.02) bit 7 for window control information.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
3 - 35
Chapter 3 – Software Description
Follower
Diagnostics
Master/Follower
Link Specification
All Followers receive the torque reference through the TORQUE REF
A signal. The follower drive is able to detect a communication break,
the action upon which is defined by Parameter 70.13 CH2 TIMEOUT
and 70.14 CH2 COM LOSS CTRL . Diagnostics feedback from the
followers must be handle by the overriding system through channel
CH0 on the NAMC board.
Size of the Link: One Master and maximum 10 Follower stations. If
more than 10 followers are required, an ABB representative should
be consulted. The maximum length of the fibre optic cables (POF) is
10 metres.
Configuration: The Link is configurable by the application in the
overriding system. (See Parameter 70.08 CH2 M/F MODE). This
makes possible to change Master and Follower on-line through CH0
by an overriding system or application without changes in the
hardware.
Transmission Rate: 4 Mbit/s
Total Performance of Link: < 5 ms to transfer references between
the master and follower drives.
Protocol: Distributed Drives Communication System, DDCS
Diagnostics
General
A common method of drive diagnostics is to provide the user with
information on previous conditions. Signals, data loggers, event
loggers, and fault loggers are commonly implemented in most
modern drives.
The following is a description of the data, event, and fault loggers
available in the System Application Program.
3 - 36
Fault and Event
Loggers
The fault logger collects 64 of the most recent faults into the fault
buffer in the RAM memory. The latest 16 faults are stored into the
FLASH memory at the beginning of an auxiliary power loss. The fault
logger records all available information from the drive including faults,
alarms, reset and system messages.
AMC Time
Format and
Counting
The Time for the logger fault is taken from the power-on counter,
whose format is 9999 hr, xx min, yy.yyyy s. However, the counter can
be updated cyclically from the overriding system if the system
includes an overriding controller (for example AC 80). DriveWindow
and the CDP 312 Control Panel show the real date and time.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 3 – Software Description
Data Loggers
1 and 2
The purpose of the Data Logger is to collect the history of signals
related to an incident and store them for later retrieval and analysis.
The contents of the Data Loggers are stored to the RAM memory.
There are two Data loggers in the NAMC-51 board.
The both Data Loggers consist of 1...4 channels and the total
memory size is 1024 bytes. The maximum number of samples
depends on the data type:
•
Integer type signal or parameters reserve 1 byte
•
Real-type values reserve 2 bytes
Example: Four real-type signals are measured in the Data Logger 1.
The maximum number of sample is 1024/(2 bytes x 4 channels) =
128.
The Data Loggers store the selected signals to the RAM memory
every 5 milliseconds.
Default signals and parameters in Data Logger 1 are monitored:
1.01
1.07
23.1
25.1
MOTOR SPEED FILT
MOTOR TORQUE FILT
SPEED REF
TORQUE REF A
Default signals in Data Logger 2 are monitored:
1.02
1.10
1.12
2.15
SPEED ESTIMATED
DC VOLTAGE
PP TEMP
FLUX ACT
The signals to be monitored can be selected from DriveWindow. The
default triggering mode is Fault.
Positioning
Counter
The number of Pulse Encoder pulses can be counted and set using
7.02 ACW bits B9...11. The SYNC_COMMAND can also be given by
I/O to minimise the delays. See Parameter 10.04 SYNC CMD. The
calculation has two output modes: counted number of pulses or
number of revolutions and motor shaft position in degrees.
Actual signals for this function are described in group 3 (3.07...3.10),
commands in the ACW (7.02) and the parameters in Group 50
(50.07...50.12).
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
3 - 37
Chapter 3 – Software Description
DIGITAL
INPUT
&
10.04
&
SYNC COMMAND
VIA DI ENABLED
1
S
7.02 B9
Q
S
Q
8.02 B5
SYNC COMMAND
R
7.02 B10
SYNC RDY
R
SYNC DISABLE
8.01 B3
1
FAULT
1
7.02 B11
RESET SYNC RDY
3.07
50.08
POS COUNT INIT LO
POS COUNT LOW
50.09
3.08
POS COUNT INIT HI
1
POS COUNT HIGH
2
3.09
50.07
POS COUNT DEGREES
POS COUNT MODE
3.10
PULSES FROM ENCODER
+
POS COUNT ROUNDS
+
Figure 3 - 18 Positioning Counting Logic and Calculation Diagram
Positioning
Counting Function
3 - 38
A basic function can be seen in the following diagram. When
synchronisation is enabled (SYNC_DISABLE = 0) and the next
positive edge of the SYNC_COMMAND is encountered, the initial
values of POS COUNT INIT LOW and POS COUNT INIT HIGH are
loaded into the counter and the counting continues. The Initial values
can only be used for the pulse edges count mode. Status signal
SYNC_RDY is set to indicate controlled SYNC_COMMAND. When
the positioning has been completed by the overriding system (i.e. the
motor can be stopped or some other sequence started), parameter
SYNC_RDY can be reset by RESET_SYNC_RDY.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 3 – Software Description
SYNC_COMMAND 7.02 B9
SYNC_DISABLE 7.02 B10
SYNC_RDY 8.02 B5
RESET_SYNC_RDY 7.02 B11
ENCODER PULSES
POS_COUNT_LOW 3.07
POS_COUNT_HIGH 3.08
or
POS_COUNT_ROUNDS 3.10
POS_COUNT_DEGREES 3.09
POS_COUNT_INIT_LO 50.08
POS_COUNT_INIT_HI 50.09
Figure: POSC_TIM.drw
Figure 3 - 19 Example of the Positioning Counting Function
Back-Up of
Parameters or
Software
At the end of the commissioning of the ACS 600, backing up the
(NAMC board) parameters is recommended. The results of the Motor
ID Run should also be backed up. If necessary, the data can be
restored later on (e.g. downloaded to a spare board of the same
type). See instructions in appendix A.
The back-up can be done either with DriveWindow or the CDP 312
control panel (there is an EEPROM memory in the panel). In case of
CDP 312, see Chapter 6.
Spare NAMC
Boards
One spare NAMC board or NDCU unit for each application software
type (e.g. System, Standard, Crane etc.) cover the whole ACS 600
MultiDrive power range, downloaded with the same firmware as in
the drives. See signal 4.01 in the drive for firmware version.
Inverter ratings can be NONE (no ratings entered) or any inverter
type for spare part NAMC board.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
3 - 39
Chapter 3 – Software Description
DriveWindow
Back-Up Function
DriveWindow
Restore Function
DriveWindow has a back-up function. The back-up is activated from
the DRIVE menu, and it has the following alternatives:
•
COMPLETE BACK-UP saves the PARAMETER.DDF file from
the NAMC board including nominal values of inverter. The file
extension is *.DDB.
•
ID RUN results: first start, Standard ID Run or Reduced ID Run.
•
USER’s DATA (parameter groups 10…98). The file extension for
Motor ID RUN and USER’s DATA is *.DWB. See instructions in
appendix A.
Restoring a COMPLETE BACK-UP downloads the whole contents of
the PARAMETER.DDF file to FPROM (Flash PROM memory) on the
NAMC board. This is the easiest and recommended way to restore
parameters to a spare board, because it also restores the inverter
nominal values. The board and loading package types (e.g. NAMC51 and AM4G6000) of the original and spare board must match. See
signal 4.01 in the drive.
By selecting both ID RUN results and USER’s DATA, the saved
parameters can be restored to a spare NAMC board which has the
same or later loading package version. The warning message about
different software versions is accepted in the version update. The
Restore function is also activated from the DRIVE menu.
However, the user must be very careful to select the correct back-up
file to be restored. It must always be verified that the restored inverter
values match actual hardware. The compare function of DriveWindow
can be used for this.
Note: When USER MACROs are in use, the back-up and restore
must be executed for both. First activate USER_MACRO1 by
Parameter 99.11 APPLICATION MACRO and make a back-up, then
activate USER_MACRO2 and make another back-up. When
restoring, save the restored parameters to USER_MACRO1 and
USER_MACRO2 from the original back-up files.
The back-up files should be named logically and clearly to identify the
corresponding ACS 600 drive. The process name of the drive can be
typed into Parameter 97.01 DEVICE NAME (example: Unwinder 1)
and it can be seen in the DriveWindow main menu (when drives are
connected). This also helps the identification of the back-up files.
3 - 40
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 3 – Software Description
Memory Handling
User Macros
•
The Power-Up procedure loads all the needed files to the RAM.
This takes about 6 seconds.
•
Parameter value changes mode with DriveWindow or CDP 312
are stored to RAM and FPROM.
•
Parameter value changes by the overriding system are stored
only to RAM. However, saving to FPROM can be executed by
setting parameter 16.06 PARAMETER BACKUP to SAVE. This
function can be used when the parameter changes made by the
overriding system are to be saved.
•
The factory default settings can be restored in a similar way.
•
The Power Down task saves 16 latest faults or alarms to the
FPROM.
There are three parameter files available in the FPROM memory:
PARAMETER.DDF, USER_MACRO1.DDF and
USER_MACRO2.DDF. There are two user macro parameter sets
available. They can be saved and restored by Parameter 99.09 and
99.11.
Normally, when the user macros are not used, all the parameter
changes are saved automatically to file PARAMETER.ddf. When the
User Macros are in use, all the parameter changes must be saved to
the corresponding User Macro file by parameter 99.11
APPLICATION MACRO.
User Macros can also be activated by ACW2 (7.03) bit 12 (TRUE =
USER MACRO2, FALSE = USER MACRO1), if the function is
enabled by parameter 16.05 USER MACRO CHG. The status of the
active macro can be seen in the ASW (8.02) bit 14 USER MACRO 1
and bit 15 USER MACRO 2.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
3 - 41
Chapter 3 – Software Description
Oscillation
Damping
Oscillation Damping algorithm has been developed in order to damp
mechanical oscillations. As an output the algorithm produces a sine
wave. This sine wave can be summed to torque reference with
suitable gain and phase.
OPTIONAL FUNCTION
OSCILLATION
DAMPING
2.02
SPEED REF3
26.04
SPEED ACTUAL
26.05
1.02
26.06
26.03
TORQUE STEP
LOAD COMPENSATION
TORQ_REF5
26.02
2.12
26.07
TORQ_REF4
2.11
TORQUE REFERENCE
SELECTOR
TORQ_REF3
2.10
TORQ REF SEL
26.01
0
2 1
EXTERNAL TORQUE REFERENCE
TORQ REF1
MIN
3
4
TORQUE
REFERENCE
LIMITING
5 6
2.08
MAX
SPEED CONTROLLER OUTPUT
TORQ REF2
2.09
+
TORQ USED
2.13
LIMITATIONS
+
Figure 3 - 20 Torque Reference Chain
Algorithm has four parameters:
26.04 OSC COMPENSATION
ON/OFF
Enables/disables calculations
26.05 OSCILLATION FREQ
0-60 Hz
Frequency of the oscillation
26.06 OSCILLATION PHASE
0-360°
Phase angle of the sine wave
26.07 OSCILLATION GAIN
0-100%
Tuning Procedure
Relative gain
(scaled according to speed controller gain)
Tuning is done as follows:
1. Set parameter OSC COMPENSATION ON and OSCILLATION
GAIN to value 0%.
2. Calculate the oscillation frequency and set parameter
OSCILLATION FREQ.
3. OSCILLATION PHASE can be in its default value or you can
change it.
4. Increase OSCILLATION GAIN gradually (5%, 10%,...) so that
you can see whether the used phase angle is good (oscillation
amplitude decreases) or bad (oscillation is being amplified).
5. If amplitude of the oscillation decreases, increase gain and
change phase sensitively. Otherwise try a different phase angle
until the oscillation amplitude decreases.
3 - 42
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 3 – Software Description
6. When the OSCILLATION PHASE is set so that oscillation
amplitude decreases, increase the gain to supress the oscillation
totally.
OSCILLATION GAIN = 0%
OSC COMPENSATION: ON
Set OSCILLATION FREQ
Increase OSCILLATION GAIN
so that algorithm effects system
(5...10%)
Oscillation amplitude decreases:
Increase OSCILLATION GAIN
and do minor changes (if needed)
to OSCILLATION PHASE.
Oscillation amplitude increases:
Try other values for OSCILLATION
PHASE.
Increase OSCILLATION GAIN
so that there is no more oscillation.
Figure 3 - 21 Tuning Procedure for the Oscillation Damping
Note: Changing the speed error lowpass filter time constant and
speed controller’s integration time may have an impact on the
oscillation damping algorithm tuning. It is recommended to tune
speed controller before tuning this algorithm. Speed controller gain
can be altered after tuning the oscillation damping algorithm.
AUTO RESTART
Function
It is possible to restart the drive(s) with the AUTO RESTART function
after a short (max. 5 seconds) power supply failure without actions by
the overriding system. This function is enabled by Par. 21.09 AUTO
RESTART. Par. 21.10 AUTO RESTART TIME defines the maximum
duration of the power failure. Actions on the net break are:
•
Main Status Word is frozen and the FW2 bit 2 DC UNDERVOLT
fault is masked in the Fault Word.
•
The undervoltage fault is reset internally
•
An undervoltage alarm is set in the AW2 bit 14.
•
MCW bit 0 is changed 1 --> 0 --> 1
•
Flying start mode is forced temporarily (21.01 = AUTO).
•
After a successful restart: MSW freezing, FW masking and the
original START MODE are reinstated otherwise after 6 seconds.
•
An alarm “AUTORESTARTED” is given.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
3 - 43
Chapter 3 – Software Description
3 - 44
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 4 – Signals
Overview
This chapter describes the measured and calculated actual signals,
and the content of the control, status, limit, fault, and alarm words of
the ACS 600.
How to Read the
Signal Table
Before you start to read the signal table, we first recommend you
read this description.
ACS 600 Signals
Group + Index
1.1...1.27
2.1...2.24
3.1...3.15
4.1...4.3
5.1...5.32
6.1...6.32
7.1...7.3
8.1...8.6
9.1...9.7
Description
Actual Signals
Actual Signals
Actual Signals
Information
(reserved for the application)
(reserved for the application)
Control Words
Status Words, Limit Words
Fault Words, Alarm Words
Quantity
27
24
15
3
Total
05
Index
unit: A
(161.3)
Description:
type: R
3
6
7
85
CURRENT
Measured motor current absolute value.
Integer Scaling
Max:
Min: 0
10 == 1A
Figure 4 - 1 Sample of an Actual Signal table
•
All signals are read-only. However the overriding system can
write to the control words, but it only affects the RAM memory.
•
If the overriding control system reads or writes individual bits of a
word with an Advant CONV_IB element, (for example AUX
CONTROL WORD 7.02) the bit B15 corresponds to the SIGN
outputs of the element.
•
If signal type is R (real value), it also has an integer scaling
relation mentioned in the column Integer scaling. For example, if
the CURRENT signal is read to the overriding system, an integer
value of 10 corresponds to 1 Ampere. All the read and sent
values are limited to 16 bits (-32768...32767).
•
The unit of the signal value can be seen on the lower left-hand
corner of the signal description.
•
Minimum and maximum values are shown in decimal format.
•
Data type is given with a short code:
I = 16-bit signed integer
B = Boolean value
PB = Packed Boolean value
R = Real value
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
4-1
Chapter 4 – Signals
AMC Table Signals
Group 1 Actual Signal
1
Group name:
ACTUAL SIGNALS
Description:
Measured or calculated values
Description:
Filtered actual speed according to the speed feedback selection. Filter time constant is
adjustable by Par. 50.12 MOTOR SP FILT TIME. Default filter time constant is 500 ms +
Parameter 50.06 SP ACT FILT TIME with pulse encoder. See also Parameter 50.03.
Min:
Max:
Integer scaling: see Parameter 50.01
01
Index
unit: rpm
MOTOR SPEED FILT
type: R
02
SPEED ESTIMATED
Index
Description:
unit: rpm
type: R
03
Index
unit: rpm
Description:
type: R
04
05
Description:
unit: Hz
type: R
06
Description:
type: R
Description:
type: R
08
09
Index
Description:
type: R
unit: V
Calculated motor output voltage.
Min:
Max:
100 == 1%
10 == 1%
Integer scaling:
1 == 1V
Integer scaling:
1 == 1 V
MOTOR VOLTAGE
PP TEMP
13
Temperature of the heat sink plate in degrees centigrade.
Min:
Max:
Integer scaling: 1 == 1°
TIME OF USAGE
Description:
type: R
14
Description:
unit: kWh
type: R
4-2
Motor power in percent of the rated motor power.
Min:
Max:
Integer scaling:
Description:
type: R
Description:
unit: °C
type: R
Index
Motor torque in percent of the rated motor torque.
Min:
Max:
Integer scaling:
Measured dc bus voltage
Min:
Max:
12
unit: h
10 == 1A
Filtered motor torque in percent of the rated motor torque. See also parameter 25.07.
Min:
Max:
Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
Description:
type: R
Index
Index
Measured motor current absolute value.
Min:
Max:
Integer scaling:
DC VOLTAGE
11
Index
100 == 1Hz
POWER
10
unit: V
Integer scaling:
MOTOR TORQUE
Description:
unit: %
type: R
Index
Calculated frequency of the motor.
Min:
Max:
MOTOR TORQ FILT2
Index
unit: %
Actual speed to the speed error calculation of the speed controller.
Min:
Max:
Integer scaling: see Parameter 50.01
MOTOR CURRENT
07
Index
see Parameter 50.01
FREQUENCY
Index
unit: %
Measured actual speed from the pulse encoder.
Min:
Max:
Integer scaling:
MOTOR SPEED
Description:
unit: rpm
type: R
Index
Integer scaling: see Parameter 50.01
SPEED MEASURED
Index
unit: A
Internally calculated actual speed.
Min:
Max:
This actual signal is an elapsed mains-on time indicator.
Min:
Max:
Integer scaling: 1 == 1 h
KILOWATT HOURS
This actual signal counts the kilowatt hours in operation.
Min:
Max:
Integer scaling: 1 == 1 kWh
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 4 – Signals
1
Group name:
15
Interval: 10 ms
DI6-1 STATUS
Description:
Status of the digital inputs DI6...DI1 in the software.
Example: DI1 and DI4 are activated.
Table format: 0001001 (CDP 312 display)
DI name 654321
Min: 0
Max: 127
Integer scaling:
Index
unit:
type: I
ACTUAL SIGNALS
1 == 1
16
Interval: 500 ms
MOTOR 1 TEMP
Index
unit: °C
Description:
type: R
Value of analogue input 1 displayed in °C (PT100 measurement) or Ω(PTC measurement).
Min:
Max:
Integer scaling: 1 == 1° or 1 Ω
17
Interval: 500 ms
Index
Description:
unit: °C
type: R
18
Index
unit: °C
MOTOR 2 TEMP
Value of analogue input 2 displayed in °C (PT100 measurement) or Ω (PTC measurement).
Min:
Max:
Integer scaling: 1 == 1° or 1 Ω
MOTOR TEMP EST
Description:
type: R
Calculated motor temperature when the thermal model (DTC or User mode) is used for motor
overtemperature protection.
Min:
Max:
Integer scaling: 1 == 1°
19
Interval: 100 ms
AI1 [V]
Index
Description:
type: R
Non-scaled value of analogue input AI1. See Parameters 13.01...13.02.
Min: 0
Max: 10
Integer scaling: 10000 == 10V or 20 mA
unit:
20
Interval: 100 ms
AI2 [mA]
Index
Description:
type: R
Non-scaled value of analogue input AI2. See Parameters 13.04...13.05.
Min: 0
Max: 20
Integer scaling: 20000 == 20mA, 2 V or 10 V
unit:
21
Interval: 100 ms
AI3 [mA]
Index
Description:
type: R
Non-scaled value of analogue input AI3. See Parameters 13.08...13.09.
Min: 0
Max: 20
Integer scaling: 20000 == 20mA
Interval: 500 ms
NAMC-2x: 100 ms
RO3-1 STATUS
Description:
Status of the basic I/O board relay outputs RO3 ... RO1.
Example: RO2 and RO3 are activated.
Table format: 0000110 (CDP 312 display view)
RO name
321
Min: 0
Max:
Integer scaling:
unit:
22
Index
unit:
23
Index
unit: mA
24
Index
unit: mA
25
Index
unit:
26
Index
unit: %
type:
Interval: 500 ms
NAMC-2x: 100 ms
AO1 [mA]
Description:
Value of analogue output AO1 in milliamperes. See Parameter Group 15 for signal selection
and scaling.
Min: 0 mA
Max: 20 mA
Integer scaling: 20000 == 20mA
type: R
Interval: 500 ms
NAMC-2x: 100 ms
AO2 [mA]
Description:
Value of analogue output AO2 in milliamperes. See Parameter Group 16 for signal selection
and scaling.
Min: 0 mA
Max: 20 mA
Integer scaling: 20000 == 20mA
type: R
Interval: 500 ms
NAMC-2x: 100 ms
CONTROL MODE
Description:
Control mode in use:
1 = Speed control
2 = Torque control (TORQ_REF_1 affects the output of TORQ REF 3)
Min: 1
Max: 2
Integer scaling:
type: I
Interval: 500 ms
NAMC-2x: 100 ms
LED PANEL OUTPUT
Description:
type: R
Output monitoring of the NLMD-01 LED panel. See Parameter Group 18.
Min:
Max:
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
4-3
Chapter 4 – Signals
1
Group name:
27
ACTUAL SIGNALS
CABLE TEMPERATURE
Index
Description:
unit: %
type: R
Output monitoring of the motor cable thermal model. See Parameter Group 36.
Min: 0 %
Max: 100 %
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
Group 2 Actual Signals
2
Group name:
ACTUAL SIGNALS
Description:
Measured or calculated values in the speed and torque reference chain.
01
SPEED REF2
Index
Description:
unit: rpm
type: R
02
Index
unit: rpm
unit: %
Description:
type: R
unit: %
Description:
type: R
unit: %
type: R
unit: %
type: R
type: f
07
08
D part effect at the output of the PID controller. Output of the PID controller is formed from
the output parameters TORQUE PROP REF, TORQUE INTEG REF, TORQ DER REF and
TORQ ACC COMP REF.
Min:
Max:
Integer scaling:
100 == 1%
Output of the acceleration compensation.
Min:
Max:
Integer scaling:
Description:
type: R
Limited torque reference value in the torque reference chain.
Min:
Max:
Integer scaling:
Final torque reference from the speed control chain.
Min:
Max:
Integer scaling:
Description:
unit: %
type: R
Torque reference after the torque selector block.
Min:
Max:
Integer scaling:
10
11
Index
Index
4-4
100 == 1%
TORQUE REF 4
Description:
type: R
12
unit: %
100 == 1%
TORQUE REF 3
Index
unit: %
100 == 1%
TORQUE REF 2
Description:
type: R
unit: %
100 == 1%
TORQUE REF 1
09
Index
I part effect at the output of the PID controller. Output of the PID controller is formed from the
output parameters TORQUE PROP REF, TORQUE INTEG REF, TORQ DER REF and
TORQ ACC COMP REF.
Min:
Max:
Integer scaling:
100 == 1%
TORQ ACC COMP REF
Description:
unit: %
type: R
Index
P part effect at the output of the PID controller. Output of the PID controller is formed from
the output parameters TORQUE PROP REF, TORQUE INTEG REF and TORQ ACC COMP
REF.
Min:
Max:
Integer scaling:
100 == 1%
TORQUE DER REF
Description:
Index
unit: %
Difference between reference and the actual value. If parameter WINDOW_SEL_ON is
enabled, SPEED_ERROR_NEG is filtered through the window function.
Min:
Max:
Integer scaling:
see Par. 50.01
TORQUE INTEG REF
Description:
06
Index
see Par. 50.01
TORQUE PROP REF
Description:
05
Index
Speed reference after the speed ramp.
Min: -18000 rpm Max: 18000rpm Integer scaling:
SPEED ERROR NEG
04
Index
see Par. 50.01
SPEED REF3
03
Index
Limited speed reference.
Min: -18000 rpm Max: 18000rpm Integer scaling:
Sum of TORQUE REF 3 and LOAD COMPENSATION.
Min:
Max:
Integer scaling:
100 == 1%
TORQUE REF 5
Description:
type: R
Sum of TORQUE REF 4 and TORQUE STEP.
Min:
Max:
Integer scaling:
100 == 1%
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 4 – Signals
Group name:
2
13
TORQ USED REF
Index
Description:
unit: %
type: R
14
Description:
unit: %
type: R
15
Index
Flux reference used.
Min:
Max:
Integer scaling:
10 == 1%
Integer scaling:
10 == 1%
FLUX ACT
Description:
type: R
16
Flux actual value.
Min:
Max:
dV/dt
Index Description:
unit: rpm/s type: R
18
Speed reference change in rpm/s at the output of the speed ramp generator.
Min:
Max:
Integer scaling:
See Parameter 50.01
SPEED REF4
Index
Description:
unit: rpm
type: R
19
Index
Limited torque reference. This is the final torque input for the internal torque controller.
Min:
Max:
Integer scaling:
100 == 1%
FLUX USED REF
Index
unit: %
ACTUAL SIGNALS
Speed reference before speed error calculation.
Min: -18000 rpm Max: 18000rpm Integer scaling:
See Parameter 50.01
DS SPEED REF
Description:
type: R
Speed reference from the Master Follower link to be monitored in the Follower drive.
Min: -18000 rpm Max: 18000rpm Integer scaling:
See Parameter 50.01
Description:
unit: rpm
type: R
Torque reference from the Master Follower link be monitored in the Follower drive.
Min: -18000 rpm Max: 18000rpm Integer scaling:
See Parameter 50.01
unit: rpm
20
DS TORQ REF A
Index
21
FIELDWK POINT ACT
Index
Actual field weaking point.
Min:
Max:
Description:
unit: Hz
type: R
22
Description:
unit: %
type: R
23
Index
Index
Torque reference after frequency limiter block.
Min:
Max:
Integer scaling:
100 == 1%
TORQ DC LIM REF
Description:
type: R
24
unit: %
100 == 1%
TORQ FREQ LIM REF
Index
unit: %
Integer scaling:
Torque reference after DC-voltage limiter block.
Min:
Max:
Integer scaling:
100 == 1%
TORQ POW LIM REF
Description:
type: R
Torque reference after power limiter block
Min: -600.00
Max: 600.00
Integer scaling:
10 == 1%
Group 3 Actual Signals
3
Group name:
ACTUAL SIGNALS
Description:
Data values
Description:
Microprocessor load measurement. Value 100% indicates microprocessor overload, which
results in delays in task executions.
Min:
Max:
Integer scaling: 1 == 1%
01
Index
unit: %
APPL DUTY
type: R
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
4-5
Chapter 4 – Signals
3
Group name:
ACTUAL SIGNALS
Description:
Possible overload of each application task can be detected by means of this signal in the
Packed Boolean format.
Bit
0
Application Task 1 overload
1
Application Task 2 overload
2
Application Task 3 overload
3
Application Task 4 overload
4
Application Task 5 overload
5
Application Task 6 overload
Min: 0
Max:
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
02
Index
APPLICATION OVERL
unit:
type: PB
03
RS
Index
Description:
unit: Ω
type: R
04
Index
unit: mH
Description:
type: R
05
06
Index
unit: ms
Index
unit:
08
Index
unit:
Description:
type: R
Integer scaling:
100 == 1 mH
unit: deg
Estimated value of σLS
Min: 0
Max:
Integer scaling:
100 == 1 Ω
Estimated time constant of the rotor.
Min: 0
Max:
Integer scaling:
1 == 1 ms
POS COUNT LOW
Description:
type: I
Position counter value in pulses (low word).
Min: 0
Max: 65536
Integer scaling:
(160.11)
POS COUNT HIGH
Description:
type: I
Position counter value in pulses (high word).
Min: 0
Max: 65536
Integer scaling:
Description:
Position counter value in degrees, when parameter 50.07 POS COUNT MODE has selection
ROUND&DEG. This signal is used together with signal 3.10 POS COUNT ROUNDS.
Min: -360 deg
Max: 360 deg Integer scaling: 1 == 1 deg
09
Index
Estimated stator inductance LS
Min: 0
Max:
TR
07
1 == 1
1 == 1
POS COUNT DEGREES
type: R
10
4-6
100 == 1 Ω
SIGMALS
Description:
unit: Ω
type: R
unit:
Integer scaling:
LS
Index
Index
Estimated stator resistance RS
Min: 0
Max:
POS COUNT ROUNDS
Description:
type: R
Position counter value in total shaft revolutions, when Parameter 50.07 POS COUNT MODE
is set to ROUND&DEG.
Min: -8388608 Max: 8388608 Integer scaling: 1 == 1
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 4 – Signals
3
Group name:
11
Index
unit:
DATALOG1 STATUS
Descriptio Data logger 1 STATUS WORD
n:
B0 = triggering conditions: fault
B1 = triggering conditions: level
B2 = triggering conditions: alarm
B3 = triggering conditions: limit
B4 = triggered by user
B5 = triggered from level
B6 = trend triggered from difference
B7 = initialising
B8 = over_write (readpointer has reached write pointer)
B9 = filled
B10 = running
B11 = initialised
B12 = not initialised
B13 =
B14 =
B15 =
type: I
Min: -32768
Max: 32767
Integer scaling:
12
Index
unit: °C
PP 0 TEMP
Description:
type: R
13
Index
unit: °C
unit: °C
type: R
unit: °C
The highest power plate temperature in degrees celsius from the module 1 in the parallel
connected inverter. The IGBT module with the highest temperature is indicated by the LEDs
in the NINT board. This measurement is active only with parallel connected inverters.
Min:
Max:
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
PP 2 TEMP
Description:
type: R
15
Index
The highest power plate temperature in degrees celsius from the module 0 in the parallel
connected inverter. The IGBT module with the highest temperature is indicated by the LEDs
in the NINT board. This measurement is active only with parallel connected inverters.
Min:
Max:
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
PP 1 TEMP
Description:
14
Index
ACTUAL SIGNALS
The highest power plate temperature in degrees celsius from the module 2 in the parallel
connected inverter. The IGBT module with the highest temperature is indicated by the LEDs
in the NINT board. This measurement is active only with parallel connected inverters.
Min:
Max:
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
PP 3 TEMP
Description:
type: R
The highest power plate temperature in degrees celsius from the module 3 in the parallel
connected inverter. The IGBT module with the highest temperature is indicated by the LEDs
in the NINT board. This measurement is active only with parallel connected inverters.
Min:
Max:
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
4-7
Chapter 4 – Signals
Group 4 Information
4
Group name:
INFORMATION
Description:
This signal group consists of information about the downloaded software on the NAMC
board.
01
Index
SOFTWARE VERSION
Description:
This signal gives information on the downloaded loading package information.
Product
A = Inverter software based on ACS 600 platform
D = DC drives software based on ACS 600 platform
I = Input bridge software based on ACS 600 platform
L = Large Drives software based on ACS 600 platform
M = ACS1000 software
AM4G6000
Software Product
C = ACC 600 Crane appl.
F = ACF 600
H = ACS 600 PFC Macro
M = ACS 600 System Application
N = ACS 600 PMSM System Application
O = ACS 600 OEM device
P = ACP 600 Motion Control Application
S = ACS 600 Standard Application
T = ACS 600 FCB Application Template
U = ACS 600 Water Cooling Unit Application
Inverter Hardware type
0 = Single Drive HW (old HW) *
1 = Single Drive XT-HW
2 = reserved
3 = reserved
4 = MultiDrive non-parallel connected HW
5 = MultiDrive parallel connected HW
6 = Single Drive HW (1998 HW)**
A = Custom Application Software
X = Multiple
NAMC-board type
A = software for NAMC-03 or NAMC-04 Control Board
M = software for NAMC-03 or NAMC-04 Control Board
B = software for NAMC-2x Control Board
C = software for AMC 3 Control Board
D = reserved for N2AC AMC Board
E = software for NAMC-11 Control Board
G = software for NAMC-51 Control Board
Software Version Number
Examples:
AM4Mxxxx
AM5Mxxxx
AM6Mxxxx
AM1Mxxxx
AS4Axxxx
AS5Axxxx
= System Application SW for non-parallel connected MultiDrive HW
= System Application SW for parallel connected MultiDrive HW
= System Application SW for Standard HW
= System Application SW for Standard XT HW
= Standard Application SW for non-parallel connected MultiDrive HW
= Standard Application SW for parallel connected MultiDrive HW
*) Seriel number <1984100000 and 22. character in the type code is 0 or C.
**) Seriel number >1984100000 and 22. character in the type code is 1 or D.
swtypede_60.dsf
unit:
type: C
02
Index
unit:
unit:
4-8
Max:
DTC SW VERSION
Description:
type: C
03
Index
Min:
Flux software version. This fixed part of the application program consists of motor control,
operational system, communication control of the DDCS channels, and Modbus software for
the control panel.
Min:
Max:
APPLIC SW VERSION
Description:
type: C
Application software name. This part of the application program has been written using PC
element programming.
Min:
Max:
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 4 – Signals
Group 7 Control Words
7
01
Index
unit:
Group name:
CONTROL WORDS
Description:
ABB Drive Profile Control Word.
Interval: 10
ms
MAIN CTRL WORD (MCW)
Bit
Name
ON
Value Meaning
1
Command to “RDYRUN”-state
B0
0
Command to “OFF”-state
OFF 2
1
No OFF2 (Emergency OFF or Coast Stop)
B1
0
Command to “ON INHIBIT” state
OFF 3
1
No OFF 3 (Emergency STOP)
B2
0
Command to “ON INHIBIT” state
RUN
1
Command to “RDYREF”- states
B3
0
Stop by coasting
RAMP_OUT_ZERO
1
No other activities
B4
0
Speed ramp output is forced to zero
RAMP_HOLD
1
No other activities
B5
0
Speed ramping stopped
RAMP_IN_ZERO
1
No other activities
B6
0
Speed ramp input is forced to zero
RESET
1
Fault resetting with a positive edge
B7
0
INCHING1
1
Constant speed 1 defined by a parameter
B8
0
INCHING2
1
Constant speed 2 defined by a parameter
B9
0
1
Overriding computer is req. to control the drive
B10 REMOTE_CMD
0
Only OFF commands are valid
reserved
1
(reserved)
B11
0
1
(reserved)
B12 reserved
0
1
(reserved)
B13 reserved
0
1
(reserved)
B14 reserved
0
1
(reserved)
B15 reserved
0
type: I
Min: -32768
Max: 32767
Integer scaling:
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
4-9
Chapter 4 – Signals
7
Group name:
CONTROL WORDS
02
Interval: 10 ms
AUX CONTROL WORD 1 (ACW_1)
Index:
Description:
not available
not available
Bit
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
Min:
unit:
type: I
RESTART_DLOG
TRIGG_LOGGER
RAMP_BYPASS
BAL_RAMP_OUT
FLUX ON DC
FLUX ON
HOLD_NCONT
WINDOW_CTRL
BAL_NCONT
SYNC_COMMAND
SYNC_DISABLE
RESET_SYNC_RDY
(reserved)
DO1 CONTROL
DO2 CONTROL
DO3 CONTROL
-32768
Max: 32767
Drive-specific auxiliary control word
Restart data logger (rising edge).
Data logger triggering (rising edge)
Bypass Speed ramp.
Force ramp output.
Flux on DC. (Flux off: set this bit and MCW bit 3 to 0).
Flux on (zero torque).
Hold the integral part in the speed controller.
FALSE = ADD CONTROL, TRUE = Window Control.
Force speed controller output.
Position counting: synchronise command.
Position counting: disable synchronise command.
Position counting: reset synchronous ready command.
SW DO1 control (see also Par. 14.01, 14.02 and 98.03).
SW DO2 control (see also Par. 14.04 and 98.03).
SW DO3 control (see also Par. 14.06 and 98.04).
Integer scaling:
03
Interval: 10 ms
AUX CONTROL WORD 2 (ACW_2)
Index:
Description:
Bit
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
Min:
unit:
4 - 10
type: I
EXT1_DO1 CONTROL
EXT1_DO2 CONTROL
EXT2_DO1 CONTROL
EXT2_DO2 CONTROL
EXT3_DO1 CONTROL
EXT3_DO2 CONTROL
Drive-specific auxiliary control word
NDIO extension module 1 DO1 control.
NDIO extension module 1 DO2 control.
NDIO extension module 2 DO1 control.
NDIO extension module 2 DO2 control.
NDIO extension module 3 DO1 control.
NDIO extension module 3 DO2 control.
USER MACRO CTRL
Macro change request. TRUE= macro 2, FALSE= macro 1
-32768
Max: 32767
Integer scaling:
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 4 – Signals
Group 8 Status Words
8
01
Group name:
STATUS WORDS
Description:
Status signals of the drive according to the ABB Drive Profile.
Interval: 10 ms
MAIN STATUS WORD (MSW)
Index
Bit
B0
Name
RDYON
B1
RDYRUN
B2
RDYREF
B3
TRIPPED
B4
OFF_2_STA
B5
OFF_3_STA
B6
SWC ON INHIB
B7
ALARM
B8
AT_SETPOINT
B9
REMOTE
B10
ABOVE_LIMIT
B11
B12
...
Value Meaning
1
Ready to switch on
0
Not ready to switch on
1
Ready
0
Not ready
1
Operation enabled (RUNNING)
0
Operation inhibited
1
Fault
0
1
No OFF 2
0
OFF 2
1
No OFF 3
0
OFF3
1
Switch on inhibit
0
1
Alarm
0
1
Setpoint/act. value monitoring in the tolerance
0
1
Remote control
0
Local control
1
frequency or speed > par. 50.10 Speed Above Limit
0
(reserved)
INTERNAL_INTERLOCK 1
0
type: I
Min:
Motor par. typed and no prev. of unexpected start-up
(reserved)
B13
B14
B15
unit:
INPUT
(reserved)
(reserved)
-32768
Max: 32767
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Integer scaling:
4 - 11
Chapter 4 – Signals
8
Group name:
02
Interval: 10 ms
AUX STATUS WORD (ASW)
Index
Description:
Bit
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
Min:
unit:
STATUS WORDS
type: I
Drive specific auxiliary status word
LOGG_DATA_READY
Content of data logger is readable.
OUT_OF_WINDOW
Actual speed is outside of the defined window.
EMERG_STOP_COAST
Emergency stop function has failed.
MAGNETIZED
A flux has been formed in the motor.
RUN_DISABLED
External interlocking (DI2) prevents the run.
SYNC_RDY
Position counter synchronous ready status.
1_START_NOT_DONE
Not started after the setting of Group 99.
IDENTIF_RUN_DONE
Motor Identification run has been completed.
START_INHIBITION
Prevention of unexpected start-up is active.
LIMITING
Control at a limit. (See signals 8.03-8.04).
TORQ_CONTROL
Drive is torque controlled.
ZERO_SPEED
Motor actual speed is below the zero speed lim.
INTERNAL_SPEED_FB
Internal speed feedback selected.
M_F_COMM_ERR_ASW CH2 Master/Follower link break.
USER MACRO 1
User macro 1 activated.
USER MACRO 2
User macro 2 activated.
-32768
Max: 32767
Integer scaling:
03
Interval: 2 ms
LIMIT WORD 1
Index
Description:
B0
TORQ_MOTOR_LIM
B1
SPC_TORQ_MIN_LIM
B2
SPC_TORQ_MAX_LIM
B3
TORQ_USER_CUR_LIM
B4
TORQ_INV_CUR_LIM
B5
TORQ_MIN_LIM
B6
TORQ_MAX_LIM
B7
TREF_TORQ_MIN_LIM
B8
TREF_TORQ_MAX_LIM
B9
FLUX_MIN_LIMIT
B10
FREQ_MIN_LIMIT
B11
FREQ_MAX_LIMIT
B12
DC_UNDERVOLT_LIM
B13
DC_OVERVOLT_LIM
B14
TORQUE_LIMIT
B15
FREQ_LIMIT
Min: -32768
Max: 32767
Integer scaling:
unit:
04
Index
unit:
4 - 12
type: I
Interval: 10 ms
Description:
type: I
LIMIT WORD 2
B0
P MOT LIM
B1
P GEN LIM
B2…15
Min: -32768
Max: 32767
POWER MOTORING LIMIT is active.
POWER GENERATING LIMIT is active.
(reserved)
Integer scaling:
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 4 – Signals
8
Group name:
05
Interval: 10 ms
DI STATUS WORD
Index
Description:
BIT
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
unit:
type: I
STATUS WORDS
Min:
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
EXT1_DI1
EXT1_DI2
EXT2_DI1
EXT2_DI2
EXT3_DI1
EXT3_DI2
DI1 NBIO-21/ NIOB
DI2 NBIO-21/ NIOB
DI3 NBIO-21/ NIOB
-32768
If NDIO I/O Extension Modules are installed, see also
Parameters 98.03...98.05 and Chapter 4 - I/O
Configuration, Digital Inputs.
Max: 32767
Integer scaling:
06
Interval: 10 ms
AUX STATUS WORD 2
Index
Description:
BIT
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
Min:
unit:
type: I
FAN ON CMD
-32768
Drive specific auxiliary status word
Digital input 1 status on the NIOC-01 board.
Digital input 2 status on the NIOC-01 board.
Digital input 3 status on the NIOC-01 board.
Digital input 4 status on the NIOC-01 board.
Digital input 5 status on the NIOC-01 board.
Digital input 6 status on the NIOC-01 board.
Digital input 1 status on NDIO Ext. Module 1.
Digital input 2 status on NDIO Ext. Module 1.
Digital input 1 status on NDIO Ext. Module 2.
Digital input 2 status on NDIO Ext. Module 2.
Digital input 1 status on NDIO Ext. Module 3.
Digital input 2 status on NDIO Ext. Module 3.
Digital input 1 status on NBIO-21/ NIOB-01 I/O Unit.
Digital input 2 status on NBIO-21/ NIOB-01 I/O Unit.
Digital input 3 status on NBIO-21/ NIOB-01 I/O Unit.
Drive specific auxiliary status word 2
Motor Fan control signal for digital output control.
Max: 32767
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Integer scaling:
4 - 13
Chapter 4 – Signals
Group 9 Fault Words
9
01
Index
unit:
02
Index
unit:
4 - 14
Group name:
FAULT WORDS
Description:
Fault signals of the drive.
Interval: 500 ms
FAULT WORD 1
Description:
B0
SHORT CIRC
B1
OVERCURRENT
B2
DC OVERVOLT
B3
ACS 600 TEMP
B4
EARTH FAULT
B5
MOTOR TEMP M
B6
MOTOR TEMP
B7
SYSTEM_FAULT
B8
UNDERLOAD
B9
OVERFREQ
B10
B11
CH2 COM LOS
B12
SC (INU1)
B13
SC (INU2)
B14
SC (INU3)
B15
SC (INU4)
Min: -32768
Max: 32767
type: I
Interval: 500 ms
FAULT WORD 2
Description:
B0
SUPPLY PHASE
B1
NO MOTOR DATA
B2
DC UNDERVOLT
B3
CABLE TEMP
B4
RUN DISABLD
B5
ENCODER FLT
B6
IO FAULT
B7
CABIN TEMP F
B8
B9
OVER SWFREQ
B10
AI<MIN FUNC
B11
PPCC LINK
B12
CH0 COM LOS
B13
PANEL LOST
B14
MOTOR STALL
B15
MOTOR PHASE
Min: -32768
Max: 32767
type: I
Short circuit in the main circuit.
Overcurrent.
Intermediate circuit DC overvoltage.
Power plate overtemperature.
Earth fault.
Motor overtemperature (measured).
Motor overtemperature (calculated).
A fault is indicated by the System Fault Word 9.03.
Underload fault. See parameter 30.16.
Overspeed fault.
(reserved)
CH2 Master/Follower communication fault.
short circuit in parallel connected INU 1.
short circuit in parallel connected INU 2.
short circuit in parallel connected INU 3.
short circuit in parallel connected INU 4.
Integer scaling:
High supply section ripple voltage.
No motor data entered in Group 99.
Intermediate circuit DC undervoltage.
Motor cable overtemperature.
External interlocking on DI2 active.
Speed measurement fault.
I/O device fault on CH1.
Drive cabinet overtemperature (meas. by NIOC-01)
(reserved)
Over switching frequency fault.
Current-type input below 4 mA on AI2 or AI3.
NINT board current measurement or comm. fault.
Communication break on CH0.
Local control lost.
Motor stalled.
Motor circuit fault.
Integer scaling:
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 4 – Signals
9
Group name:
03
Index
unit:
04
Index
unit:
FAULT WORDS
SYSTEM FAULT WORD
Description:
type: I
Bit
B0
FLT (F1_7)
B1
USER MACRO
B2
FLT (F1_4)
B3
FLT (F1_5)
B4
FLT (F2_12)
B5
FLT (F2_13)
B6
FLT (F2_14)
B7
FLT (F2_15)
B8
FLT (F2_16)
B9
FLT (F2_17)
B10
FLT (F2_18)
B11
FLT (F2_19)
B12
FLT (F2_3)
B13
FLT (F2_1)
B14
FLT (F2_0)
B15
Min: -32768
Max: 32767
Interval: 500 ms
ALARM WORD 1
Description:
Bit
B0
START INHIBI
B1
EM STOP
B2
MOTOR TEMP M
B3
MOTOR TEMP
B4
ACS 600 TEMP
B5
ENCODER ERR
B6
T MEAS ALM
B7
DIO ALARM
B8
AIO ALARM
B9
EXT DIO ALM
B10
EXT AIO ALM
B11
CH2 COM LOS
B12
B13
B14
EARTH FAULT
B15
SAFETY SWITC
Min: -32768
Max: 32767
type: I
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Factory default parameter file error.
User macro file error.
FPROM operating error.
FPROM data error.
Internal time level T2 overflow (100µs).
Internal time level T3 overflow (1ms).
Internal time level T4 overflow (50ms).
Internal time level T5 overflow (1s).
State machine overflow.
Application program execution error.
Application program execution error.
Illegal instruction.
Register stack overflow.
System stack overflow.
System stack underflow.
Integer scaling:
Preventation of unexpected start-up active.
Emergency stop function has been activated DI1=0.
Motor overtemperature (measured).
Overtemperature alarm of the thermal model.
Power plate overtemperature.
Pulse encoder error. See Param. 50.05.
Temperature measurement failure.
Basic digital I/O alarm (NIOC-01).
Basic analogue I/O alarm (NIOC-01).
External digital I/O alarm (NDIO).
External analogue I/O alarm (NAIO).
CH2 Master/Follower communication error.
Earth fault.
Safety Switch alarm.
Integer scaling:
4 - 15
Chapter 4 – Signals
9
Group name:
FAULT WORDS
05
Interval: 500 ms
ALARM WORD 2
Description:
Bit
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
Index
unit:
06
Index
unit:
4 - 16
type: I
MOTOR FAN
UNDERLOAD
INV OVERLOAD
CABLE TEMP
POWFAIL FILE
POWDOWN FILE
MOTOR STALL
AI<MIN FUNC
CH0 TIMEOUT
PANEL LOST
DC UNDERVOLT
RESTARTED
Min: -32768
Max: 32767
Interval: 500 ms
FAULT WORD 3
Description:
Bit
B0
MOTOR FAN
B1
START INHIBIT HW
B2
SAFETY SWITC
B3
LINE CONV ERR
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
Min: -32768
Max: 32767
type: I
Acknowledge not received from ext. motor fan circ.
Underload.
Inverter overloading cycle Iac 10/60 s time elapsed.
Motor cable overtemperature.
(not in use)
(not in use)
(not in use)
Error in restoring 'powerfail.ddf’.
Error in restoring 'powerdown.ddf’.
Motor stalling.
Current-type input below 4 mA on AI2 or AI3.
DDCS communication time-out on CH0.
(not in use)
Local control lost.
DC undervoltage indication during the Auto Restart.
Motor has been restarted after the net break, if Auto
Restart function enabled (see par. 21.09).
Integer scaling:
Acknowledge not received from ext. motor fan circ.
Failure in Prevention of unexpected start-up circuit.
Safety Switch fault.
Lineconverter fault. Used in ACS611 or ACS617.
Integer scaling:
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 4 – Signals
9
Group name:
FAULT WORDS
07
Interval: 2 ms
INT FAULT INFO
Index
Description:
This Word includes collected information on the
location of faults PPCC LINK, OVERCURRENT,
EARTH FAULT and SHORT CIRCUIT.
The bits 0…4 indicate the source of the active fault
and bits b6…b11 give detailed information on a short
circuit.
Bit
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
unit:
type: I
NINT 1 FAULT
NINT 2 FAULT
NINT 3 FAULT
NINT 4 FAULT
NPBU FAULT
NINT 1 board fault *
NINT 2 board fault *
NINT 3 board fault *
NINT 4 board fault *
NPBU board fault * (Branching Unit board)
U-PH SC U
U-PH SC L
V-PH SC U
V-PH SC L
W-PH SC U
W-PH SC L
Phase U upper-leg IGBT(s) short circuit
Phase U lower-leg IGBT(s) short circuit
Phase V upper-leg IGBT(s) short circuit
Phase V lower-leg IGBT(s) short circuit
Phase W upper-leg IGBT(s) short circuit
Phase W lower-leg IGBT(s) short circuit
Min: -32768
Max: 32767
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
* In use only with parallel inverters. NINT 0 is
connected to NPBU CH1, NINT 1 to CH2 etc.
Integer scaling:
4 - 17
Chapter 4 – Signals
4 - 18
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 5 – Parameters
Overview
This chapter explains the function of, and valid selections for, each
parameter.
Parameter Groups
The parameters are arranged into groups by their function. The figure
below illustrates the organisation of the parameter groups.
ACS 600 Parameters
Group + Index
10.01...10.08
11.01
13.01...13.14
14.01...14.12
15.01...15.22
16.01...16.06
17.01...17.03
18.01...18.02
19.01...19.08
20.01...20.18
21.01...21.11
22.01...22.08
23.01...23.11
24.01...24.20
25.01...25.07
26.01...26.07
27.01...27.08
28.01...28.10
29.01...29.04
30.01...30.32
31.01...31.02
35.01...35.04
36.01...36.02
50.01...50.14
51.01...51.15
70.01...70.20
71.01…71.05
90.01...90.18
91.01...91.06
92.01...92.18
93.01...93.06
97.01
98.01...98.07
99.01...99.13
Description
Start/Stop/Dir
I/O Reference select
Analogue Inputs
Digital Outputs
Analogue Outputs
System Control Inputs
DC Hold
LED Panel Control
Data Storage
Limits
Start/Stop Functions
Accel/Decel
Speed Reference
Speed Control
Torque Reference
Torque Reference Handling
Flux Control
Motor Model
Scalar Control
Fault Functions
Fault Functions
Motor Fan Control
Motor Cable
Speed Measurement
Master Adapter
DDCS Control
DriveBus Communication
Data Set Receive Addresses
Data Set Receive Addresses
Data Set Transmit Addresses
Data Set Transmit Addresses
Drive
Option Modules
Start-Up Data
Total
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Quantity
8
1
14
12
22
6
3
2
8
18
11
8
11
20
7
7
8
11
4
32
2
4
2
14
15
20
1
18
6
18
6
1
7
13
340
5-1
Chapter 5 – Parameters
How to Read the
Parameter Table
Before you start to read the parameter table, we first recommend you
read this description.
• Parameter change by DriveWindow or the CDP 312 is stored to
FPROM memory; changes made by the overriding system are
only stored to RAM.
•
If the overriding control system reads or writes individual bits of a
word with an Advant CONV_IB element, (for example AUX
CONTROL WORD 7.02) the bit B15 corresponds to the SIGN
outputs of the element.
•
From DriveWindow and the control panel, parameter values are
set in decimal.
•
Unit of the parameter value can be seen on the lower left-hand
corner of the parameter description.
•
Minimum, maximum and default values are shown in decimal
format.
•
Data type is given with a short code:
I = 16-bit signed integer value
B = Boolean value
PB = Packed Boolean value
R = Real value
•
Communication between the overriding system and the drive
uses 16 bit integer values (-32768...32767). To change a
parameter value from the overriding system, an integer value for
the parameter must be calculated using the information given in
the Integer scaling column.
Example 1: If TREF TORQMAX (real) is set from the overriding
system, an integer value of 100 corresponds to 1 % (see below).
09
Index
unit: %
TREF TORQMAX
Description:
type: R
Maximum torque reference as a percentage of the motor nominal torque.
Min: 0 %
Max: 300 %
Def: 300 %
Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
Figure 5 - 1 Sample of the Parameter Table
Example 2: Speed reference from the overriding system.
• Speed reference input is given by Parameter 23.01 SPEED REF.
The Integer scaling box reads “see Par. 50.01”. Parameter 50.01
defines the motor speed (in rpm) at maximum reference (20000
for the overriding system). Thus, sending a value of 20000 from
the overriding system into Parameter 23.01 sets the speed
reference to the rpm value given with Parameter 50.01.
5-2
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 5 – Parameters
Group 10 Start/Stop/Dir
10
Group name:
DIGITAL INPUTS
Description:
This parameter group defines the functions for digital inputs.
Description:
Digital input for Start/Stop command, when I/O control has been activated either by changing
Parameter 98.02 COMM MODULE to NO or HAND is selected using the options at
Parameter 10.07 HAND/AUTO.
1 = NO
2 = DI3
Start by rising edge (0->1), 0 = stop
3 = DI4
Start by rising edge (0->1), 0 = stop
4 = DI5
Start by rising edge (0->1), 0 = stop
5 = DI6
Start by rising edge (0->1), 0 = stop
6 = EXT2 DI1 Start by rising edge (0->1), 0 = stop, NDIO I/O extension module 2.
Parameter 98.04 DI/O EXT MODULE 2 must be set to value EXTEND.
7 = EXT2 DI2 Start by rising edge (0->1), 0 = stop, NDIO I/O extension module 2.
Parameter 98.04 DI/O EXT MODULE 2 must be set to value EXTEND.
Min: 1
Max: 7
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
01
Index:
unit:
START/STOP
type: I
02
Index:
unit:
DIRECTION
Description:
type: I
03
Index:
unit:
This parameter allows fixing the direction of rotation of motor to FORWARD or REVERSE, if
unipolar speed reference has been selected in I/O control by Parameter 13.12 MINIMUM
AI1.
Note: I/O control is activated either by setting Parameter 98.02 COMM MODULE to value
NO or HAND is selected using the options at Parameter 10.07 HAND/AUTO.
1 = FORWARD
2 = DI3
1 = reverse, 0 = forward
3 = DI4
1 = reverse, 0 = forward
4 = DI5
1 = reverse, 0 = forward
5 = DI6
1 = reverse, 0 = forward
6 = EXT2 DI1 1 = reverse, 0 = forward, NDIO I/O extension module 2. Parameter
98.04 DI/O EXT MODULE 2 must be set to EXTEND.
7 = EXT2 DI2 1 = reverse, 0 = forward, NDIO I/O extension module 2. Parameter
98.04 DI/O EXT MODULE 2 must be set to EXTEND.
Min: 1
Max: 7
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
RESET
Description:
type: I
Digital input for Reset function, when I/O control has been activated either by changing
Parameter 98.02 COMM MODULE to value NO or HAND is selected using the options at
Parameter 10.07 HAND/AUTO.
1 = NO
2 = DI3
Reset by rising edge (0->1).
3 = DI4
Reset by rising edge (0->1).
4 = DI5
Reset by rising edge (0->1).
5 = DI6
Reset by rising edge (0->1).
6 = EXT2 DI1 Reset by rising edge, NDIO I/O extension module 2.
Parameter 98.04 DI/O EXT MODULE 2 must be set to value EXTEND.
7 = EXT2 DI2 Reset by rising edge, NDIO I/O extension module 2.
Parameter 98.04 DI/O EXT MODULE 2 must be set to value EXTEND.
Min: 1
Max: 7
Def: 4
Integer scaling:
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
5-3
Chapter 5 – Parameters
10
Group name:
DIGITAL INPUTS
Description:
Digital input for SYNC COMMAND for the positioning count. This is a faster alternative for
synchronising by (7.02) ACW bit 9. Active in all control modes.
1 = NO
(default)
2 = DI3
High = SYNC COMMAND
3 = DI4
High = SYNC COMMAND
4 = DI5
High = SYNC COMMAND
5 = DI6
High = SYNC COMMAND
6 = EXT2 DI1 High = SYNC COMMAND, NDIO I/O extension module 2. Parameter
(98.04) DI/O EXT MODULE 2 must be set to value EXTEND.
7 = EXT2 DI2 High = SYNC COMMAND, NDIO I/O extension module 2. Parameter
(98.04) DI/O EXT MODULE 2 must be set to value EXTEND.
Min: 1
Max: 7
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
04
Index:
unit:
SYNC CMD
type: I
05
Index:
unit:
KLIXON
Description:
type: I
06
Index:
unit:
5-4
Digital input for motor overtemperature protection. Input for thermal switch (KLIXON) or
thermistor relay can be selected freely, but the PTC-sensor is connected only to D16 of the
I/O board NIOC-01. See Chapter 2 “Motor protections”.
1 = NO
(default)
2 = DI3
High = OK, low = trip
3 = DI4
High = OK, low = trip
4 = DI5
High = OK, low = trip
5 = DI6
High = OK, low = trip
6 = EXT2 DI1 High = OK, low = trip, NDIO I/O extension module 2. Parameter
98.04 DI/O EXT MODULE 2 must be set to value EXTEND.
7 = EXT2 DI2 High = OK, low = trip, NDIO I/O extension module 2. Parameter
98.04 DI/O EXT MODULE 2 must be set to value EXTEND.
Min: 1
Max: 7
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
MOTOR FAN ACK
Description:
type: I
Selection of the acknowledge source for motor fan diagnostics. An acknowledge signal
indicates, that the contactor of the fan motor is closed. See Parameter Group 35.
1 = NO
No acknowledge required. No alarm or fault. (default)
2 = DI3
Acknowledge ok = high
3 = DI4
Acknowledge ok = high
4 = DI5
Acknowledge ok = high
5 = DI6
Acknowledge ok = high
6 = EXT2 DI1 Acknowledge ok = high, NDIO I/O extension module 2.
Parameter 98.04 DI/O EXT MODULE 2 must be set to value EXTEND.
7 = EXT2 DI2 Acknowledge ok = high, NDIO I/O extension module 2.
Parameter 98.04 DI/O EXT MODULE 2 must be set to value EXTEND.
Min: 1
Max: 7
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 5 – Parameters
10
Group name:
DIGITAL INPUTS
Description:
Digital input for switching between HAND control (I/O) and AUTO (through overriding
system) control. This selection has a higher priority than Parameter 98.02 COMM MODULE.
07
Index:
HAND/AUTO
1 = NO
2 = DI3
3 = DI4
4 = DI5
5 = DI6
6 = EXT2 DI1
unit:
type: I
08
Index:
(default)
High = HAND, low = AUTO
High = HAND, low = AUTO
High = HAND, low = AUTO
High = HAND, low = AUTO
High = HAND, low = AUTO, NDIO I/O extension module 2. Parameter
98.04 DI/O EXT MODULE 2 must be set to value EXTEND.
7 = EXT2 DI2 High = HAND, low = AUTO, NDIO I/O extension module 2. Parameter
98.04 DI/O EXT MODULE 2 must be set to value EXTEND.
Min: 1
Max: 7
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
START INHIB DI
Description:
Digital input for the Prevention of Unexpected Start-Up function. Selected digital input acts
as an AND type interlocking with bit 3 (RUN) of Main Control Word. See Chapter 7.
See the START INH HW fault diagnostics.
1 = NO
2 = DI3
3 = DI4
4 = DI5
5 = DI6
6 = EXT2 DI1
unit:
type: I
08
Index:
No Prevention of Unexpected Start-Up circuit in use
High = Prevention of Unexpected Start-Up circuit is OFF, low = ON
High = Prevention of Unexpected Start-Up circuit is OFF, low = ON
High = Prevention of Unexpected Start-Up circuit is OFF, low = ON
High = Prevention of Unexpected Start-Up circuit is OFF, low = ON
High = Prevention of Unexpected Start-Up circuit is OFF, low = ON, NDIO
I/O extension module 2. Parameter 98.04 DI/O EXT MODULE 2 must be
set to value EXTEND.
7 = EXT2 DI2 High = Prevention of Unexpected Start-Up circuit is OFF, low = ON, NDIO
I/O extension module 2. Parameter 98.04 DI/O EXT MODULE 2 must be
set to value EXTEND.
Min: 1
Max: 7
Def: 2
Integer scaling:
SAFETY SWITCH
Description:
Digital input for motor safety switch. The status of the safety switch is indicated in drive
diagnostics either faulting, if the switch was opened during run or by alarming, if the drive
was already stopped..
1 = NO
2 = DI3
3 = DI4
4 = DI5
5 = DI6
6 = EXT2 DI1
(default)
High = OK, low = TRIP
High = OK, low = TRIP
High = OK, low = TRIP
High = OK, low = TRIP
High = OK, low = TRIP, NDIO I/O extension module 2. Parameter
98.04 DI/O EXT MODULE 2 must be set to value EXTEND.
7 = EXT2 DI2 High = OK, low = TRIP, NDIO I/O extension module 2. Parameter
98.04 DI/O EXT MODULE 2 must be set to value EXTEND.
unit:
type: I
Min: 1
Max: 7
Def:
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
1
Integer scaling:
5-5
Chapter 5 – Parameters
Group 11 Reference Select
11
Group name:
REFERENCE SELECT
Description:
This parameter group is visible only when 98.02 COMM MODULE is set to NO or HAND
mode is selected by parameter 10.07 HAND/AUTO, i.e. the drive is controlled through its I/O
connections. When the drive is controlled by the overriding system, Group 11 parameters are
ineffective. See also configuration figure of Parameter 98.06.
Description:
EXT REF1 is a speed reference given via analogue input. There are two alternatives
available for the NIOC-01 board.
1 = STD AI1
0…10 V speed reference input
2 = STD AI2
0(4)…20 mA speed reference input
Min: 1
Max: 2
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
01
Index:
unit:
EXT REF1 SELECT
type: I
Group 13 Analogue Inputs
13
Group name:
ANALOGUE INPUTS
Description:
01
Index:
unit:
AI1 HIGH VALUE
Description:
type: I
02
Index:
unit:
AI1 LOW VALUE
Description:
type: I
03
Description:
unit: ms
type: I
04
unit:
unit:
type: I
unit:
type: I
type: I
Description:
unit: ms
type: I
5-6
This value corresponds to the minimum input in milliamperes (0 or 4 mA). This parameter is
not active when used for motor 2 temperature measurement. See parameter 30.06 MOT2
TEMP AI2 SEL.
Min: -32768
Max: 32767
Def: 0
Integer scaling:
MINIMUM AI2
Description:
07
Index:
This value corresponds to the maximum input in milliamperes (20 mA). This parameter is not
active when used for motor 2 temperature measurement. See parameter 30.06 MOT2 TEMP
AI2 SEL.
Min: -32768
Max: 32767
Def: 0
Integer scaling:
AI2 LOW VALUE
Description:
06
Index:
Filter time constant for analogue input AI1. The hardware filter time constant is 20 ms.
Min: 0 ms
Max: 30000 ms Def: 1000 ms
Integer scaling:
AI2 HIGH VALUE
Description:
05
Index:
This value corresponds to the minimum input voltage on AI1. With I/O control, it defines the
minimum speed. If bipolar I/O reference is used, value -20000 corresponds the maximum
negative speed based on Parameter 50.01 SPEED SCALING. This parameter is not active
when AI1 is used for motor 1 temperature measurement. See Parameter 30.03 MOT1 TEMP
AI1 SEL.
Min: -32768
Max: 32767
Def: 0
Integer scaling:
FILTER AI1
Index:
Index:
This value corresponds to the maximum input voltage on AI1 produced by the device used.
With I/O control, value 20000 corresponds to the speed defined by Parameter 50.01 SPEED
SCALING. This parameter is not active when AI1 is used for motor 1 temperature
measurement. See Parameter 30.03 MOT1 TEMP AI1 SEL.
Min: -32768
Max: 32767
Def: 20000
Integer scaling:
Minimum value of AI2. This value corresponds to the minimum reference.
1 = 0 mA
(0...20 mA)
2 = 4 mA
(4...20 mA)
3 = -20 mA (Used with bipolar type of analogue input)
Min: 1
Max: 2
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
FILTER AI2
Filter time constant for analogue input AI2. The hardware filter time constant is 20 ms.
Min: 0 ms
Max: 30000 ms Def: 1000 ms
Integer scaling:
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 5 – Parameters
13
Group name:
ANALOGUE INPUTS
Description:
type: I
This value corresponds to the maximum input in milliamperes (20 mA).
Min: -32768
Max: 32767
Def: 10000
Integer scaling:
Description:
type: I
This value corresponds to the minimum input in milliamperes (0 or 4 mA).
Min: -32768
Max: 32767
Def: 0
Integer scaling:
Description:
Minimum value of AI3. This value corresponds to the minimum reference.
1 = 0 mA
2 = 4 mA
Min: 1
Max: 2
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
08
Index:
unit:
AI3 HIGH VALUE
09
Index:
unit:
AI3 LOW VALUE
10
Index:
unit:
MINIMUM AI3
type: I
11
FILTER AI3
Index:
Description:
unit: ms
type: R
12
Index:
unit:
MINIMUM AI1
Description:
type: I
13
Index:
unit:
unit:
Minimum value of AI1. This value corresponds to the minimum reference.
1=0
2 = 2 V (Used also in range 4...20 mA in the NAIO extension module)
3 = -10 V (Used with bipolar type of analogue input)
Min: 1
Max: 3
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
NBIO/NIOB AI1 GAIN
Description:
type: B
14
Index:
Filter time constant for analogue input AI3. The hardware filter time constant is 20 ms.
Min: 0 ms
Max: 30000 ms Def: 1000 ms
Integer scaling:
Analogue input AI1 hardware gain selection for NBIO-21 or NIOB-01 board.
0 = 0…+-10V
1 = 0+-2V/+-20mA
Min: 0
Max: 1
Def: 0
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
NBIO/NIOB AI2 GAIN
Description:
type: B
Analogue input AI2 hardware gain selection for NBIO-21 or NIOB-01 board.
0 = 0…+-10V
1 = 0+-2V/+-20mA
Min: 0
Max: 1
Def: 0
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
Group 14 Digital Outputs
14
Group name:
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
Description:
Control of the digital outputs.
Description:
An emergency stop command energises DO1 until MAIN CONTROL WORD bit 0 is set to a 0
state and zero speed has been detected. If the emergency stop function is not activated (by
Parameter 21.04), the output can be controlled from the overriding system.
0 = OFF An emergency stop command controls the DO1.
1 = ON DO1 signal is selected by Parameter 14.02 and 14.03.
Min:
Max:
Def: OFF
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
01
Index
unit:
DO1 CONTROL
type: B
02
Index
unit:
DO1 GROUP+INDEX
Description:
type: I
Digital output 1 is controlled by a selectable (see Par. 14.03) bit of the signal selected with
this parameter. The format is (-)xyy, where (-) = inversion, x = Group, yy = Index.
Examples: If Parameters 14.02 and 14.03 are set to 801 and 1 respectively (default), digital
output DO1 is active when 8.01 MAIN STATUS WORD bit 1 (READY) 14.02 and 14.03 are
set to –801 and 3 respectively, digital output DO1 is active when 8.01 MAIN STATUS WORD
bit 3 (TRIPPED) is 0. If this parameter is set to 0, digital output DO1 is controlled by the
overriding system (7.02 AUX CTRL WORD bit 13).
Min: -30000
Max: 30000
Def: 801
Integer scaling:
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
5-7
Chapter 5 – Parameters
14
Group name:
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
Description:
type: I
This parameter specifies the bit number for the signal selected at Parameter 14.02.
Min: 0
Max: 23
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
Description:
Digital output 2 control. See parameter 14.02. If this parameter is set to 0, digital output DO2
is controlled by the overriding system (7.02 AUX CTRL WORD bit 14). See also Par. 14.12
DO2 GRP+INDEX MOD.
Min: -30000
Max: 30000
Def: 801
Integer scaling:
03
Index
unit:
DO1 BIT NUMBER
04
Index
Unit:
DO2 GROUP+INDEX
type: I
05
Index
unit:
DO2 BIT NUMBER
Description:
type: I
This parameter specifies the bit number for the signal selected at Parameter 14.04
Min: 0
Max: 23
Def: 2
Integer scaling:
Description:
Digital output 3 control. See parameter 14.02. If this parameter is set to 0, digital output DO3
is controlled by the overriding system (7.02 AUX CTRL WORD bit 15).
Min: -30000
Max: 30000
Def: 801
Integer scaling:
06
Index
unit:
DO3 GROUP+INDEX
type: I
07
Index
unit:
DO3 BIT NUMBER
Description:
type: I
This parameter specifies the bit number for the signal selected at Parameter 14.06
Min: 0
Max: 23
Def: 3
Integer scaling:
Description:
Extension module 2 digital output DO1 control. See parameter 14.02. If this parameter is set
to 0, digital output DI1 can be controlled by the overriding system (7.03 AUX CTRL WORD 2
bit 2). To activate this extension module see Parameter 98.04.
Min: -30000
Max: 30000
Def: 801
Integer scaling:
08
Index
unit:
EXT2 DO1 GR+INDEX
type: I
09
Index
unit:
EXT2 DO1 BIT NR
unit:
This parameter specifies the bit number for the signal selected at Parameter 14.08.
Min: 0
Max: 23
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
Description:
Extension module 2 digital output DO2 control. See parameter 14.02. If this parameter is set
to 0, digital output can be controlled by the overriding system (7.03 AUX CTRL WORD bit 3).
To activate this extension module see Parameter 98.04.
Min: -30000
Max: 30000
Def: 806
Integer scaling:
EXT2 DO2 GR+INDEX
type: I
11
Index
unit:
(not available with NAMC-03/04)
EXT2 DO2 BIT NR
(not available with NAMC-03/04)
Description:
type: I
This parameter specifies the bit number for the signal selected at Parameter 14.10.
Min: 0
Max: 23
Def: 0
Integer scaling:
Description:
This parameter defines the DO2 control in LOCAL and REMOTE modes.
12
Index
(not available with NAMC-03/04)
Description:
type: I
10
Index
(not available with NAMC-03/04)
DO2 GRP+INDEX MOD
(not available with NAMC-03/04)
0 = REM/LOCAL = DO2 Group + Index parametrisation with Par. 14.04 and 14.05 affects
in REMOTE and LOCAL mode.
1 = LOCAL
= DO2 Group + Index parametrisation is effective only in LOCAL
mode. In the REMOTE mode, signal 7.02 ACW bit 14 controls
DO2.
unit:
5-8
type: B
Min: 0
Max: 1
Def: 0
Integer scaling:
1 == 1
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 5 – Parameters
Group 15 Analogue Outputs
15
Group name:
ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
Description:
It is possible to select a signal or parameter to control the analogue outputs. The outputs can
also be controlled from the overriding system.
The outputs are updated every 10 milliseconds.
Description:
To direct a measured signal to analogue output AO1, set this parameter according to the
format (x)xyy. Where (x) is the group and yy the index of the desired signal; eg. 2301
denotes Par. 23.01.
01
Index
ANALOGUE OUTPUT 1
A signal from the overriding system can also control the analogue output. The data set in
which the signal is transmitted to the drive is directed into one of the DATA parameters
(19.01...19.08) using Parameters 90.01...91.18. The DATA parameter is then coupled to the
analogue output with this parameter.
unit:
type: I
02
Index
unit:
INVERT AO1
Description:
type: B
03
Index
unit:
unit: s
type: I
unit:
FILTER AO1
Filter time constant for analogue output AO1.
Min: 0 s
Max: 10 s
Def: 0.1 s
Description:
Nominal value of the analogue output AO1 signal which is selected in Parameter 15.01. This
value corresponds to 20 mA at the output.
Min: 0
Max: 65536
Def: 100
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
Integer scaling:
100 == 1s
SCALE AO1
type: R
06
Index
Analogue output 1 signal offset in milliamperes. This parameter is not effective if motor 1
temperature measurement is activated by Parameter 30.03. Otherwise, the following settings
are available.
1 = 0 mA
2 = 4 mA
3 = 10 mA 50% offset in the range 0...20 mA for testing or indication of direction (torque,
speed etc.)
Min: 1
Max: 3
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
Description:
type: R
05
Index
Analogue output AO1 signal inversion.
0 = NO minimum signal value corresponds to the minimum output value.
1 = YES maximum signal value corresponds to the minimum output value.
Min:
Max:
Def: NO
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
MINIMUM AO1
Description:
04
Index
If temperature measurement (Parameter 30.03) is selected, analogue output AO1 is used for
supplying a constant current for the sensor.
Min: 0
Max: 30000
Def: 106 (Mot curr) Integer scaling:
ANALOGUE OUTPUT 2
Description:
To direct a measured signal to analogue output AO1, set this parameter according to the
format (x)xyy. Where (x) is the group and yy the index of the desired signal; eg. 1506
denotes Par. 15.06.
A signal from the overriding system can also control the analogue output. the data set in
which the signal is transmitted to the drive is directed into one of the DATA parameters
(19.01...19.08) using Parameters 90.01...91.18. The DATA parameter is then coupled to the
analogue output with this parameter.
unit:
type: I
If temperature measurement (Parameter 30.06) is selected, analogue output AO2 is used for
supplying a constant current for the sensor.
Min: 0
Max: 30000
Def: 101 (Mot spd) Integer scaling:
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
5-9
Chapter 5 – Parameters
15
Group name:
ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
Description:
Analogue output AO2 signal inversion.
0 = NO minimum signal value corresponds to the minimum output value.
1 = YES maximum signal value corresponds to the minimum output value.
Min:
Max:
Def: NO
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
07
Index
unit:
INVERT AO2
type: B
08
Index
unit:
MINIMUM AO2
Description:
type: I
09
Index
unit: s
FILTER AO2
Description:
type: R
10
Index
unit:
Filter time constant for analogue output AO2.
Min: 0 s
Max: 10 s
Def: 0.1 s
Integer scaling:
100 == 1s
SCALE AO2
Description:
type: R
11
Index
Analogue output AO2 signal offset in milliamperes.
1 = 0 mA
2 = 4 mA
3 = 10 mA 50% offset in the range of 0...20 mA for testing or indication of direction (torque,
speed etc.)
Min: 1
Max: 3
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
Nominal value of analogue output AO2 signal which is selected in Parameter 15.06.
This value corresponds to 20 mA at the output.
Min: 0
Max: 65536
Def: 3000
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
ANALOGUE OUTPUT 3
Description:
Analogue Outputs AO3 and AO4 are available when a NAIO I/O extension is used and
Parameter 98.06 is set to UNIPOLAR AI or BIPOLAR AI. See also the hardware
connections at Parameter 98.06.
Group 15
Signals
AO3
for
AO-outputs AO4
unit:
type: I
12
Index
unit:
unit:
type: B
unit: s
type: I
unit:
5 - 10
This parameter selects the signal to be connected to analogue output AO3.
See Parameter 15.01 ANALOGUE OUTPUT 1.
Min: 0
Max: 30000
Def: 101 (speed) Integer scaling:
Analogue output AO3 signal inversion.
0 = NO Minimum signal value corresponds to the minimum output value.
1 = YES Maximum signal value corresponds to the minimum output value.
Min:
Max:
Def: NO
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
Analogue output AO3 signal offset in milliamperes.
1 = 0 mA
2 = 4 mA
3 = 10 mA 50% offset in the range of 0...20 mA for testing or indication of direction (torque,
speed etc.)
4 = 12 mA Used for 4…20 mA signal for meters which have zero point in the middle of the
range (e.g. -1000…0…1000 rpm)
Min: 1
Max: 4
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
FILTER AO3
Description:
type: R
15
Index
mA
MINIMUM AO3
Description:
14
Index
NAIO-01
NAIO-02
mA
INVERT AO3
Description:
13
Index
Extension AO1
I/O module
AO2
Filter time constant for analogue output AO3.
Min: 0 s
Max: 10 s
Def: 0.1 s
Integer scaling:
100 == 1s
SCALE AO3
Description:
type: R
Nominal value of analogue output AO3 signal which is selected in Parameter 15.11. This
value corresponds to 20 mA at the output.
Min: 0
Max: 65536
Def: 3000
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 5 – Parameters
15
Group name:
ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
Description:
Analogue Outputs AO3 and AO4 are available when a NAIO I/O extension is used and
Parameter 98.06 is set to UNIPOLAR AI or BIPOLAR AI. See also the hardware
connections at parameter 98.06.
16
Index
ANALOGUE OUTPUT 4
Group 15
Signals
AO3
for
AO-outputs AO4
unit:
type: I
17
Index
unit:
unit:
type: B
unit: s
type: I
unit:
unit:
unit:
Analogue output AO4 signal offset in milliamperes.
1 = 0 mA
2 = 4 mA
3 = 10 mA 50% offset in the range of 0...20 mA for testing or indication of direction (torque,
speed etc.)
4 = 12 mA Used for 4…20 mA signal for meters which have zero point in the middle of the
range (e.g. –1000…0…1000 rpm)
Min: 1
Max: 4
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
FILTER AO4
Description:
Nominal value of analogue output AO4 signal which is selected in Parameter 15.16. This
value corresponds to 20 mA at the output.
Min: 0
Max: 65536
Def: 3000
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
Integer scaling:
100 == 1s
SCALE AO4
type: R
NBIO/NIOB AO1 MODE
Description:
type: B
22
Index
Analogue output AO4 signal inversion.
0 = NO minimum signal value corresponds to the minimum output value.
1 = YES maximum signal value corresponds to the minimum output value.
Min:
Max:
Def: NO
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
Filter time constant for analogue output AO4.
Min: 0 s
Max: 10 s
Def: 0.1 s
21
Index
This parameter selects the signal to be connected to analogue output AO4. See parameter
15.01 ANALOGUE OUTPUT 1.
Min: 0
Max: 30000
Def: 101 (speed) Integer scaling:
Description:
type: R
20
Index
mA
MINIMUM AO4
Description:
19
Index
NAIO-01
NAIO-02
mA
INVERT AO4
Description:
18
Index
Extension AO1
I/O module
AO2
If NBIO-21 or NIOB-01 I/O board is selected as the Basic I/O board by Par. 98.07, it replaces
NIOC-01 analogue outputs 1 and 2. NBIO-21 and NIOB-01 I/O boards have separate current
and voltage output terminals. Note: MINIMUM AO1 has no function when –10V…0…+10V is
selected.
Selection of the analogue output type is either current 0…20 mA or voltage –10V…0…+10V.
0 = 0…20mA
1 = -10V 0 +10V
Min: 0
Max: 1
Def: 0
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
NBIO/NIOB AO2 MODE
Description:
type: B
If NBIO-21 or NIOB-01 I/O board is selected as the Basic I/O board by Par. 98.07, it replaces
NIOC-01 analogue outputs 1 and 2. NBIO-21 and NIOB-01 I/O boards have separate current
and voltage output terminals. Note: MINIMUM AO2 has no function when –10V…0…+10V is
selected.
Selection of the analogue output type either current 0…20 mA or voltage –10V…0…+10V.
0 = 0…20mA
1 = -10V 0 +10V
Min: 0
Max: 1
Def: 0
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
5 - 11
Chapter 5 – Parameters
Group 16 System Control Inputs
16
Group name:
SYSTEM CTR INPUTS
Description:
01
Index
unit:
RUN ENABLE
Description:
type: I
02
Index
unit:
unit:
type: B
unit:
type: I
unit:
type: B
unit:
5 - 12
Control place change of the drive from remote to local can be disabled by setting this
parameter to TRUE. If LOCAL LOCK is activated during local control, it takes effect only after
the control place is changed back to remote.
0 = FALSE
No locking for control place change.
1 = TRUE
Local control is disabled.
Min:
Max:
Def: FALSE
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
USER MACRO CHG
Description:
type: I
06
Index
This parameter enters the pass code for the Parameter Lock. The default value of this
parameter is 0. In order to open the Parameter Lock, change the value to 358. After the
Parameter Lock is opened, the value is automatically changed back to 0.
Min: 0
Max: 30000
Def: 0
Integer scaling:
LOCAL LOCK
Description:
05
Index
This parameter selects the state of the parameter lock. With the parameter lock you can
prevent unauthorised changes by CDP 312 or the DriveWindow Tool for Parameter Groups 0
... 99.
1 = LOCKED
Parameter changes are disabled.
0 = OPEN
Parameter changes are enabled.
Min:
Max:
Def: OPEN
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
PASS CODE
Description:
04
Index
To activate the RUN ENABLE signal, voltage must be connected to digital input DI2. If the
voltage drops to 0V, the drive coasts to stop and a run enable fault is generated.
Min: 2
Max: 2
Def: 2
Integer scaling:
PARAMETER LOCK
Description:
03
Index
This parameter activates the RUN ENABLE input. Digital Input DI2 is dedicated for this input
permanently.
2 = DI2
User macro change by 7.03 AUX CONTROL WORD 2 bit 12 is enabled by means of this
parameter. See also Parameter 99.11.
1 = NOT SEL
Not selected.
2 = ACW2 BIT 12
Selection by ACW2 (7.03) bit 12 enabled.
Min: 1
Max: 2
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
PARAMETER BACKUP
Description:
type: B
Parameter save from the RAM memory to FPROM. This is needed only when parameter
changes by overriding system have to be stored to FPROM memory instead of RAM.
Note: Do not use the Parameter Backup function unnecessarily.
Note: Parameter changes by CDP 312 Control Panel or DriveWindow are immediately
saved to FPROM.
0 = DONE Parameter value after the saving has been completed.
1 = SAVE Parameter save to FPROM.
Min:
Max:
Def: DONE
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 5 – Parameters
Group 17 DC Hold
17
Group name:
DC HOLD
Description:
01
Index
unit:
DC HOLD
Description:
type: B
02
Index
DC Hold is activated when both the speed reference and the actual speed drop below the
defined DC HOLD SPEED. The drive will then stop generating sinusoidal current and inject
DC current into the motor. The DC current value is set by the DC HOLD CURR parameter.
When the speed reference rises above the DC HOLD SPEED, the DC current will be
removed and normal operation resumed. This function is only possible in DTC control mode.
1 = YES DC HOLD is enabled
0 = NO DC HOLD is disabled
Min:
Max:
Def: NO
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
DC HOLD SPEED
Description:
Sets the speed limit for the DC Hold function.
DC Hold
SPEED
t
Ref.
17.02
DC HOLD
SPEED
unit: rpm
type: R
03
Index
unit: %
Min: 0 rpm
t
Max: 3600 rpm Def: 5 rpm
Integer scaling:
1 == 1
DC-HOLD CURRENT
Description:
type: R
Sets the DC current to be applied to the motor when the DC Hold function is activated.
Min: 0 %
Max: 100 %
Def: 30 %
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
5 - 13
Chapter 5 – Parameters
Group 18 LED Panel Control
18
Group name:
LED PANEL CTRL
Description:
The NLMD-01 Monitoring Display has a 0...150% LED bar to show an absolute real type
value. The source and the scale of this display signal is defined by this parameter group.
Note: If NLMD -01 and CDP 312 control panel are used together, the first signal selected in
the Actual Signal Display Mode of CDP 312 must be the default value 1.26 LED PANEL
OUTP. Otherwise the NLMD-01 LED bar display will not show the correct value.
1 L "
0.0 rpm
LED
PANEL
OUTP
MOTOR SPEED FILT
MOTOR TORQUE FILT
01
Index
unit:
Interval 100 ms
LED PANEL OUTPUT
Description:
Signal group and index for the LED monitor display. The default value for this signal is 1.07
MOTOR TORQUE FILT.
Min: 0
Max: 30000
Def: 107
Integer scaling:
type: I
02
Index
unit:
5 - 14
0
SCALE PANEL
Description:
type: R
The signal value (defined in Parameter 18.01) which corresponds to 100% on the LED bar
display.
Min: 0
Max: 65536
Def: 100
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 5 – Parameters
Group 19 Data Storage
19
Group name:
DATA STORAGE
This parameter group consists of unconnected parameters for linking, testing and commissioning purposes.
APC2, AC80
Application
Controller
software
ACSRX
A*
DS14
1
Index: 2
Index: 3
Index:
*
A : Value assigned
for drive control ie,
tension control output
NAMC-xx
Dataset Table
Address
Assignment
of Dataset
GRP Index
DS VAL
.
.
.
.
1
14
90
2
.08
For
Drives Window
Tool
19.01
3
.
.
.
.
.
.
Address of the Dataset 14 index 2 is 90.08. By setting parameter 90.08 to
value 1901, the value A* can be trended with the DriveWindow monitor tool.
APC2, AC80
B : Value assigned
for application of
overriding system,
for example tension
regulator gain.
B*
*
Application
Controller
software
ACSRX
DS15
Index: 1
Index: 2
Index: 3
NAMC-xx
Dataset Table
DS VAL
.
.
.
.
1
15
2
Address
Assignment
of Dataset
GRP Index
92
.08
From
Drives Window
Tool
19.02
3
.
.
.
.
.
.
Setting 92.08 to the value 1902 by a CDP 312 Control Panel or DriveWindow,
it allows value being sent, for example gain value for tension regulator.
01
Index
unit:
DATA 1
Description:
type: R
02
Index
unit:
DATA 2
Description:
type: R
03
Index
unit:
unit:
Description:
type: R
See 19.01 DATA 1
Min: -32768
Max: 32767
Description:
type: R
See 19.01 DATA 1
Min: -32768
Max: 32767
unit:
Description:
type: R
See 19.01 DATA 1
Min: -32768
Max: 32767
Index
1 == 1
Integer scaling:
1 == 1
Integer scaling:
1 == 1
Integer scaling:
1 == 1
Integer scaling:
1 == 1
DATA 5
06
unit:
Integer scaling:
DATA 4
05
Index
See 19.01 DATA 1
Min: -32768
Max: 32767
DATA 3
04
Index
A storage parameter for receiving from or sending to the overriding system. For example, if
the signal from data set 18 word 3 (DW 18.3) is required for monitoring by DriveWindow, first
set Parameter 90.15 DATA SET 18 VAL 3 to 1901 (denoting Par. 19.01), then select
Parameter 19.01 DATA1 for the desired DriveWIndow monitoring channel.
Min: -32768
Max: 32767
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
DATA 6
Description:
type: R
See 19.01 DATA 1
Min: -32768
Max: 32767
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
5 - 15
Chapter 5 – Parameters
19
Group name:
DATA STORAGE
Description:
type: R
See 19.01 DATA 1
Min: -32768
Max: 32767
07
Index
unit:
DATA 7
08
Index
unit:
Integer scaling:
1 == 1
Integer scaling:
1 == 1
DATA 8
Description:
type: R
See 19.01 DATA 1
Min: -32768
Max: 32767
Group 20 Limits
20
Group name:
LIMITS
Description:
This parameter group defines the maximum and minimum limits for the speed, frequency,
current and torque algorithms.
Note: The absolute nominal torque is calculated in the application program from the motor
parameters (see Parameter Group 99).
01
MINIMUM SPEED
Index
Description:
unit: rpm
type: R
02
Index
unit: rpm
Index
Description:
type: R
Integer scaling:
See 50.01
The absolute speed value at which the drive coasts after a stop command.
Min: 0 rpm
Max: 15000rpm Def: 60 rpm
Integer scaling: See 50.01
Description:
Maximum output current I2max as a percentage of the drive. The maximum values are limited
according to the duty cycle tables. There are two loading cycles defined: 10 s / 60 s and 1
min / 4 min. See the ACS 600 MultiDrive catalogue.
Min: 0 %
Max: 200 %
Def: 170 %
Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
MAXIMUM CURRENT
05
Index
Description:
unit: %
type: R
06
Index
Description:
unit: %
type: R
07
Index
Description:
unit: %
type: R
08
Index
Description:
unit: %
type: R
09
Index
Description:
unit: %
type: R
10
Description:
unit: %
type: R
5 - 16
Positive speed reference limit in rpm.
Min: -18000 rpm Max: 18000rpm Def: See 99.05
Description:
type: R
unit: %I2ma type: R
Index
See 50.01
ZERO SPEED LIMIT
04
Index
Integer scaling:
MAXIMUM SPEED
03
unit: rpm
Negative speed reference limit in rpm.
Min: -18000 rpm Max: 18000rpm Def: See 99.05
MAXIMUM TORQUE
Maximum positive output torque as a percentage of the motor nominal torque.
Min: 0 %
Max: 300 %
Def: 300 %
Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
MINIMUM TORQUE
Minimum negative output torque as a percentage of the motor nominal torque.
Min: -300 %
Max: 0 %
Def: -300 %
Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
SPC TORQMAX
Maximum speed controller output limit as a percentage of the motor nominal torque.
Min: 0 %
Max: 600 %
Def: 300 %
Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
SPC TORQMIN
Minimum speed controller output limit as a percentage of the motor nominal torque.
Min: -600 %
Max: 0 %
Def: -300 %
Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
TREF TORQMAX
Maximum torque reference as a percentage of the motor nominal torque.
Min: 0 %
Max: 300 %
Def: 300 %
Integer scaling:
100 == 1%
TREF TORQMIN
Minimum torque reference as a percentage of the motor nominal torque.
Min: -300 %
Max: 0 %
Def: -300 %
Integer scaling:
100 == 1%
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 5 – Parameters
20
Group name:
LIMITS
Description:
The purpose of this parameter is to protect the process against an overspeed condition.
This parameter defines, together with parameters SPEEDMAX and SPEEDMIN (FREQ MAX
and FREQ MIN in scalar control mode) the maximum allowed frequency of the drive. If this
frequency is reached, an OVER SPEED FAULT is activated.
Example: If the maximum process speed is 1420 rpm (Parameter 20.01 SPEED MAX = 1420
rpm == 50 Hz) and this parameter (20.11) is 10 Hz, the drive trips at 60 Hz.
Min: 0 Hz
Max: 500 Hz
Def: 50 Hz
Integer scaling: 100 == 1 Hz
11
Index
unit: Hz
FREQ TRIP MARGIN
type: R
12
Index
unit: %
PULLOUT TCOEF MAX
Description:
type: R
13
Index
Maximum torque limit from the calculated pull out torque. ACS 600 calculates the pull out
torque value and limits the maximum motoring torque to prevent the pull out.
Min: 40 %
Max: 100%
Def: 70 %
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
PULLOUT TCOEF MIN
Description:
Minimum torque limit from the pull out torque without pulse encoder feedback mode. ACS
600 calculates pull out torque value and limits the maximum motor torque to prevent pull out
effect.
T
PULL OUT TCOEF MAX
PULL OUT TCOEF MIN
f / Hz
20 Hz
unit: %
type: R
14
Index
unit:
Min: 0 %
Max: 100%
Def: 50 %
Integer scaling:
1 == 1
ADAPTIVE UDC MEAS
Description:
type: B
The adaptive DC voltage measurement function can be disabled by this parameter. This
parameter is typically used in position OFF with undervoltage controller function to define
similar operating point with undervoltage controllers between the drives connected to the
same DC bus. 100% == 1.35 * U1max .
When this parameter is ON, a DC voltage reference is floating according to network
condition.
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Min: 0
Max: 1
Def: 1
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
5 - 17
Chapter 5 – Parameters
20
Group name:
LIMITS
Description:
The undervoltage controller limiting value of maximum motor torque (%), when at nominal
DC bus voltage.
T
15
Index
UNDERVOLT TORQ UP
UNDERVOLT TORQ UP
UDC / V
UDC nominal
DC UNDERVOLT LIM
UNDERVOLT TORQ DN
UDC undervoltage trip limit
unit: %
type: R
16
Index
unit: %
type: R
Index
Description:
unit: %
type: R
18
Description:
unit: %
type: R
5 - 18
-T
Max: 600 %
Def: 500%
Integer scaling:
10 ==1 %
UNDERVOLT TORQ DN
Description:
17
Index
Min: 0 %
The undervoltage controller limiting value of the minimum torque (%) at undervoltage trip
(60%) point. This parameter is used together with the undervoltage controller function to tune
the generating torque level of the drive during the supply power failure. See figure at Par.
20.15.
Min: -500 %
Max: 0 %
Def: -125 %
Integer scaling: -10 == -1 %
P MOTORING LIM
Maximum motoring power. 100% == motor nominal power.
Min: 0 %
Max: 600 %
Def: 300 %
Integer scaling:
100 == 1 %
P GENERATING LIM
Maximum generating power. 100% == motor nominal power.
Min: -600 %
Max: 0 %
Def: -300 %
Integer scaling:
100 == 1 %
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 5 – Parameters
Group 21 Start/Stop Functions
21
Group name:
START/STOP FUNC
Description:
Start and stop functions. Note: Coast stop is always the stop mode in a fault situation.
Description:
1 = AUTO
01
Index
START FUNCTION
This setting is selected when starting to a rotating machine (Flying
Start).
If this setting is selected, a higher starting torque can be achieved.
The optimal magnetising current is calculated on the basis of the
motor parameters. The pre-magnetising time is calculated using
the motor information.
2 = DC MAGN
3 = CNST DCMAGN
unit:
type: I
02
Description:
unit: ms
type: R
03
Description:
type: I
04
1 == 1 ms
Conditions during motor deceleration in the LOCAL and I/O control modes.
1 = STOP RAMPING
Stop by the deceleration ramp DECEL TIME (22.02)
2 = STOP TORQ
Stop by the torque limit.
3 = COAST STOP
Torque is zero.
Min: 1
Max: 3
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
EME STOP MODE
Description:
unit:
type: I
05
Index
Defines the magnetising time for the constant magnetising mode.
Min: 30 ms
Max: 10000 ms Def: 300 ms
Integer scaling:
STOP FUNCTION
unit:
Index
Warning! The starting to a rotating machine is not possible when
DC magnetising is selected. DC magnetising cannot be selected in
the scalar mode.
Max: 3
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
CONST MAGN TIME
Index
Index
Min: 1
Selects the constant magnetising mode. This is the fastest starting
method if the motor is at a standstill. The optimal magnetising
current is calculated on the basis of the motor parameters. The premagnetising time is defined by parameter 21.02 (CONST MAGN
TIME ). To ensure full magnetising, set the value the same as or
higher than the rotor time constant. If not known, use the rule-ofthumb value given below.
This mode remembers last position of the motor shaft until next
auxiliary voltage break of the NAMC board. This minimises possible
shaft movement during the next start. See also Parameter 21.11
START JERK COMP.
MOTOR RATED POWER
Constant Magnetising Time
<10 kW
> 100 to 200 ms
10 to 200 kW
>200 to 1000 ms
200 to 1000 kW
> 1000 to 2000 ms
1 = STOP RAMPNG
2 = STOP TORQ
3 = COAST STOP
4 = FOLLOW STOP
Min: 1
Stop by the emergency stop ramp. See Parameter 22.04
Stop by the torque limit.
Torque is zero.
Emergency stop has no function to the torque selector. Thus it is
possible to stop the follower drive by torque reference of the master
drive.
Max: 4
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
EMSTOP DER MAX L
Description:
unit: rpm/s
type: R
This parameter defines the maximum deceleration rate for emergency stop monitoring. See
also Parameter 21.05 above. Using the default value disables the monitoring of minimum
deceleration.
Min: 0 rpm/s Max: 18000 rpm/s Def: 1800 rpm/s Integer scaling: 1 == 1
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
5 - 19
Chapter 5 – Parameters
21
Group name:
START/STOP FUNC
Description:
This parameter defines the minimum deceleration rate for emergency stop monitoring. The
deceleration speed of the drive is supervised during an emergency stop condition. This
supervision starts 5 seconds after the drive has received an emergency stop signal. If the
drive is not able to decelerate within the window, whose minimum limit is defined by this
parameter and maximum limit by parameter 21.06 EMSTOP DER MAX L, it is stopped by
issuing a coast stop and setting 8.02 AUX CONTROL WORD bit 2 (EMERG_STOP_COAST)
to 1. Using the default value disables the monitoring of maximum deceleration. Selected
deceleration actual value can be monitored from the signal (2.12) dV/dt.
06
Index
EMSTOP DER MIN L
Speed
Deceleration
EMSTOP DER MAX L
Absolute
value of
Derivative
EMSTOP DER MIN L
0
unit: rpm/s
type: R
07
Index
unit: s
Max:
18000 rpm/s Def: 0 rpm/s
Integer scaling:
1 == 1
EMSTOP DEC MON DEL
Description:
type: R
08
Index
Min: 0 rpm/s
This parameter defines the delay before the starting of deceleration monitoring in the
emergency stop. See also Parameter 21.05 and 21.06 above.
Min: 0 s
Max: 100 s
Def: 20 s
Integer scaling: 10 == 1s
EM STOP TORQ RAMP
Description:
This parameter activates the torque limit ramping function at the beginning of an emergency
stop. The purpose is to change direction of power smoothly and prevent a possible current
peak in the incoming supply unit. This function is recommended for use with regenerative
thyristor supply.
300% / 100 ms
T
MAXIMUM TORQUE
5%
-5 %
150 ms
f / Hz
MINIMUM TORQUE
300% / 100 ms
TRUE
FALSE
EMERGENCY STOP
unit:
5 - 20
type:
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Min: 0
Max:
1
Def: 0
Integer scaling:
1 == 1
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 5 – Parameters
21
Group name:
START/STOP FUNC
Description:
An automatic restart using flying start after a short supply power failure (0…5 s) can be
activated by this parameter. The MAIN STATUS WORD (MSW) is frozen if the DC voltage
dips below 75 % and released again after restart. FAULT WORD 2 (FW2) bit 2 is masked if
the drive detects an undervoltage fault, and alarm “DC UNDERVOLT” is generated.
Note the HW requirements!
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Min: 0
Max: 1
Def: OFF
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
09
Index
unit:
AUTO RESTART
type: B
10
Index
unit: S
AUTO RESTART TIME
Description:
type: R
11
Index
unit: %
The maximum power failure duration for the auto restart function. This time also includes the
charging delay of the inverters.
Min: 0 s
Max: 5 s
Def: 5 s
Integer scaling: 10 == 1s
START JERK COMP
Description:
type: R
If the start mode is CONST DCMAGN, it is possible to use internal positioning control during
the magnetising of the motor to minimise shaft movement. Find the setting that gives the
smallest shaft movement. Setting this parameter to 0 disables the function.
Min: 0 %
Max: 100 %
Def: 0 %
Integer scaling: 1 == 1%
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
5 - 21
Chapter 5 – Parameters
Group 22 Ramp Functions
22
Group name:
RAMP FUNCTIONS
Description:
Speed reference ramp functions.
RAMP
MCW Bit 4
SPEED_REF
S-SHAPE
MCW Bit 6
23.01
MCW Bit 5
ACCE LER TIME
22.01
2.02
0
HOLD
0
ACW Bit 2
RAMP_BYPASS
ACW Bit 3
BAL_RAMP_OUT
22.08
SP EED RE F3
RAMP SHAPE TIME
BAL_RAMP_REF
ACCELERATION
DECELERATION
ACC/DEC TIME SCLE
22.03
DECELER TIME
22.02
VAR. SLOPE FUNC
RAMP SHAPE TIME
22.05
0
VAR SLOPE RATE
22.07
VAR. SLOP E
22.06
EME STOP RAMP
22.04
EME STOP ON
01
Index
unit: s
ACCELER TIME
Description:
type: R
02
Index
unit: s
unit:
type: R
unit: s
5 - 22
The time within the drive decelerates from the speed defined by parameter 50.01 SPEED
SCALING to zero speed.
The maximum deceleration time is 1800 s defined together with parameter 22.03.
Note: The ramp time function until 5.1 software versions is defined from maximum speed to
the zero speed. See Parameter 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED.
Min: 0 s
Max: 1000 s
Def: 20 s
Integer scaling:
100 == 1s
ACC/DEC TIME SCLE
Description:
type: R
Multiplier for ACCELER TIME and DECELER TIME parameters to expand the time.
Min: 0.1
Max: 100
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
100 == 1
Description:
If an emergency stop is activated and Parameter EME STOP MODE 21.04 = 1 (STOP BY
RAMP), the drive will decelerate according to this parameter to zero speed.
Min: 0 s
Max: 3000 s
Def: 20 s
Integer scaling:
10 == 1s
04
Index
Note: The ramp time function with previous software versions is defined from the zero speed
to maximum speed. See Parameter 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED.
Min: 0 s
Max: 1000 s
Def: 20 s
Integer scaling:
100 == 1s
DECELER TIME
Description:
03
Index
The time within the drive accelerates from zero speed to the speed defined by parameter
50.01 SPEED SCALING. The maximum acceleration time is 1800 s defined together with
parameter 22.03.
EME STOP RAMP
type: R
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 5 – Parameters
22
Group name:
RAMP FUNCTIONS
Description:
Speed reference softening time. This function is deactivated during an emergency stop
condition.
05
Index
SHAPE TIME
MAX
SPEED REFERENCE
SPEED REFERENCE
CHANGE LIMITED BY THE
RAMP FUNCTION
0
FILTERED SPEED
REFERENCE CHANGE
RAMP SHAPE TIME
ACCELER TIME
unit: s
type: R
06
Index
Min: 0 s
Max: 1000 s
Def:
0s
Integer scaling:
100 == 1s
VARIABLE SLOPE
Description:
This function is used to control the slope of the speed ramp during a speed reference
change. The time t for step A is defined by Parameter 22.07 VAR SLOPE RATE, where
t = updating interval time of the overriding system.
A = speed reference change during the time t.
1 = ON Variable slope is enabled; the slope rate is defined by Parameter 22.07 VARIABLE
SLOPE RATE.
0 = OFF Function is disabled.
Example: The overriding system transmit interval time for the speed reference and the VAR
SLOPE RATE value are equal. As a result, the shape of SPEED REF 3 is a straight line.
This function is active only in REMOTE mode.
Speed Ref
SPEED REF
t
A
SPEED REF 3
time
unit:
type: B
07
Index
Description:
unit: ms
type: R
08
Index
Min:
Max:
Def: OFF
Integer scaling:
1 == 1
VAR SLOPE RATE
This parameter defines speed ramp time t for the speed reference change A, when
Parameter 22.06 VARIABLE SLOPE is ON. Set this parameter to the same value as the
updating interval time of the overriding system.
Min: 4.05 ms
Max: 30 000 ms Def: 4.05 ms
Integer scaling:
1 == 1 ms
BAL RAMP REF
Description:
unit: rpm
type: R
The output of the speed ramp can be forced to the value defined by this parameter. The
function is activated by setting 7.02 AUX CONTROL WORD bit 3 to 1.
Min: See 20.01 Max: See 20.02 Def: 0 rpm
Integer scaling:
See Par 50.01
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
5 - 23
Chapter 5 – Parameters
Group 23 Speed Reference
Group name:
23
Description:
SPEED REF
Speed reference functions.
SPEED REFERENCE CHAIN
ACCELERATION
COMPENSATION
TORQACCCOMP REF
LOCAL
2.07
LOCAL REF
REMOTE REF
LIMITER
20 .01
MI NIMUM S PEED
20 .02
M AXIM UM SP EE D
CONST SPEED 2
(INCHING 2)
23.03
CONST SPEED 1
(INCHING 1)
23.02
2.02
SPEED REF3
+
23.05
SPEED
REF 2
23.10
LIMITER
HOLD
ACCELER TIME
2 2.0 2
DECELER TIME
ACC/DEC TIME SCALE
RAMP SHPE TIME
2 2.0 6
VARIABLE SLOPE
2 2.0 7
20.0 1
2.03
M INI M UM
SPEED
20.0 2
(-1)
M AXI MUM
SPEED
VARIABLE SLOPE
RATE
BAL RAMP OUT
23.06
SPEED ERROR FILT
23.07
WINDOW INTG ON
23.08
WINDOW WIDTH POS
WINDOW WIDTH NEG
SYMMETRIC WINDOW
2 2.0 8
BAL RAMP REF
23.09
ACW B2
RAMP BYPASS
23.11
dV/dt
SPEED ERROR
NEG
2.16
SPEED
ACTUAL
01
+
+
2.18
SPEED
REF4
EME STOP RAMP
2 2.0 5
24.02
FILTER
0
2 2.0 1
DROOPRATE
WINDOW
0
MCW B5
ACW B3
SPREF_GR2.DSF
SPEED REF
Index
Description:
unit: rpm
type: R
02
INPUT
Main speed reference input for the speed control of the drive.
Min: See 20.01 Max: See 20.02 Def: 0 rpm
Integer scaling:
See Par. 50.01
CONST SPEED 1
Description:
type: I
03
5 - 24
SET_POINT_WEIGHT
SPEED STEP
RAM P
2 2.0 4
unit:
SET_P_WEIGHTING
24.08
ACC/DEC/SHAPE
2 2.0 3
Index:
24.07
2.01
SPEED REF
unit:
ACC COMPFILT TIME
MCW B4
MCW B6
Index:
24.15
MCW B8, B9
23.01
SPEED SHARE
ACC COMP DER TIME
+
23.04
SPEED CORRECTION
24.14
Constant speed reference is activated from 7.01 MAIN CTRL WORD bit 8. See also MCW
bits 4...6.
Min: -18000 rpm Max: 18000 rpm Def: 0
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
CONST SPEED 2
Description:
type: I
Constant speed reference is activated from 7.01 MAIN CTRL WORD bit 9. See also MCW
bits 4...6.
Min: -18000 rpm Max: 18000 rpm Def: 0
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 5 – Parameters
23
Group name:
SPEED REF
Description:
This parameter value can be added to the filtered reference value.
Note: If the overriding system or NAMC application itself sends a reference value into this
parameter, it must be set to zero before a stop command of the drive.
Min: See 99.05 Max: See 99.05 Def: 0 rpm
Integer scaling: See Par. 50.01
04
Index
SPEED CORRECTION
unit: rpm
type: R
05
SPEED SHARE
Index
Description:
unit: %
type: R
06
Speed reference share coefficient.
Min: 0 %
Max: 400 %
Def:
100 %
Integer scaling:
10 == 1%
Integer scaling:
1 == 1 ms
SPEED ERROR FILT
Index
Description:
unit: ms
type: R
07
Index
INPUT
Speed reference and actual error filter time.
Min: 0 ms
Max: 999999 ms Def: 0 ms
WINDOW INTG ON
Description:
1 = ON Integrator of the speed controller is released when window control is on.
0 = OFF Integrator of the speed controller is blocked when window control is on.
The Idea of Window Control
The idea of Window Control is to deactivate speed control as long as the speed deviation
remains within the window set by Parameters 23.08 WINDOW WIDTH POS and 23.09
WINDOW WIDTH NEG. This allows the external torque reference to affect the process
directly.
For example, in Master/Follower drives, where the follower is torque controlled, window
control is used to keep the speed deviation of the follower under control. The speed error
output to the speed controller is zero, when speed error is within the window. If the load of
the follower disappears due to a disturbance in the process, the speed error will be outside
the window.
The speed controller reacts and its output is added to the torque reference. Speed control
(only with P-control) brings the speed to the value SPEED REF4 + WINDOW WIDTH, if not
integrator used. Note the permanent error of the P-control.
unit:
type:
B
08
Index
WINDOW WIDTH POS
Description:
unit: rpm
type: R
09
Index
Positive speed limit for the window control, when the calculated speed error is positive.
Speed error = speed reference – speed actual. See also Par. 23.11.
Note: Window width positive and negative is forced to zero, if SPEED REF4 + WINDOW
WIDTH POS is > MAXIMUM SPEED or < MINIMUM SPEED.
Min: 0 rpm
Max: See 99.05 Def: 0 rpm
Integer scaling: See Par 50.01
WINDOW WIDTH NEG
Description:
unit: rpm
type: R
10
Index
This function could be called overspeed or underspeed protection in the torque control mode.
To activate the window control it must be set 26.01 TORQUE SELECTOR to value ADD and
set ACW1 (7.02) bit 7 WINDOW CTRL to 1.
Min: 0
Max: 1
Def: OFF
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
Negative speed limit for the window control, when the calculated speed error is negative. The
maximum limit is the absolute value of Parameter 23.08 WINDOW WIDTH POS.
Note: Window width positive and negative is forced to zero, if SPEED REF4 + WINDOW
WIDTH NEG is > MAXIMUM SPEED or < MINIMUM SPEED.
Min: 0
Max: See 99.05 Def: 0 rpm
Integer scaling: See Par 50.01
SPEED STEP
Description:
unit: rpm
type: R
INPUT
An additional speed step can be given to the speed controller directly as an additive error
input.
Note: If the overriding system or NAMC application itself sends a reference value into this
parameter, it must be set to zero before a stop command of the drive.
Min: See 20.01 Max: See 20.02 Def: 0 rpm
Integer scaling: See Par 50.01
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
5 - 25
Chapter 5 – Parameters
23
Group name:
SPEED REF
Description:
If this parameter is activated, the values of WINDOW WIDTH POS and WINDOW WIDTH
NEG are calculated from the absolute value of the speed, not from the signed speed. Thus
window width functions are symmetric for both directions of rotation. Parameter 23.09
WINDOW WIDTH NEG functions as WINDOW WIDTH OVERSPEED and 23.08 WINDOW
WIDTH POS as WINDOW WIDTH UNDERSPEED.
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Min: 0
Max: 1
Def: 0
Integer scaling:
1 == 1
11
Index
unit:
SYMMETRIC WINDOW
type: B
Group 24 Speed Control
24
Group name:
SPEED CONTROL
Description:
The speed controller is based on the PID algorithm, which continuous time is presented as
follows:
u( s ) KPS (bYr ( s ) Y ( s )) (
T s
1
d )e( s)
sTIS T f s 1
Variable u is the output of the controller, e is the speed error (difference between the actual
and reference values).
1
Tis
yr
Tds
τ s+1
f
+
-
+
+
+
Kp
u
+
b
-
y
The PID controller also has set point weighting. y is the output; yr is the set point; u is the
controller’s output.
01
Index
unit:
5 - 26
PI TUNE
Description:
type: B
This parameter activates automatic tuning for the speed controller which is based on the
estimation of the mechanical time constant. Parameters 24.03 KPS, 24.09 TIS and 24.15
ACC COMP DER TIME are updated after the PI TUNE test.
0 = OFF
1 = ON PI TUNE is activated.
Min:
Max:
Def: OFF
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 5 – Parameters
24
Group name:
SPEED CONTROL
Description:
The amount of speed decrease caused by the load is determined by means of this
parameter. Asetting of 1% causes (with nominal torque reference) a 1% decrease in speed
from the rated speed.
Min: 0 %
Max: 100 %
Def: 0 %
Integer scaling:
10 == 1%
02
DROOP RATE
Index
unit: %
type: R
Proportional Gain Parameter of the Speed Controller
03
KPS
Index
Description:
unit:
type: R
Group name:
24
Relative gain for the speed controller. If you select a value of 1, a 10% change in the error
value (e.g. reference - actual value) causes also the speed controller output to change by
10%.
Min: 0
Max: 250
Def: 10
Integer scaling:
100 == 1
SPEED CONTROL
The Adaptive Speed Control as a Function of the Torque Reference
The adaptive gain of the speed controller is used to smooth out
disturbances which are caused by low load and backlash. Moderate
filtering of the speed error (Parameter 23.04) is typically not enough
to tune the drive.
KPS
KPS
KPS MIN
Torque ref
KPS WEAKPOINT
04
Index
unit:
KPS MIN
Description:
type: R
05
KPS WEAKPOINT
Index
Description:
unit: %
type: R
06
Index
unit: ms
KPS MIN determines the proportional gain when the speed controller output is zero.
Min: 0
Max: 150
Def: 10
Integer scaling:
100 == 1
The value of the speed controller output where the gain is KPS
Min: 0 %
Max: see 20.05 Def: 0 %
Integer scaling:
100 == 1%
KPS WP FILT TIME
Description:
type: R
The rate of change for the proportional gain can be softened by this parameter.
Min: 0 ms
Max: 999999 ms Def: 100 ms
Integer scaling:
1 == 1 ms
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
5 - 27
Chapter 5 – Parameters
24
Group name:
SPEED CONTROL
Set Point Weighting
Set point weighting is a well known method in control engineering. In this method, the set point is
weighted by a factor b<1. This weighting is applied only to the P term. Integral and derivative terms
have a normally weighted (b=1) setpoint and speed error.
This kind of manipulation leads to a situation where, in a steady state, the P term is not zero. The
controller output is still ‘right’ because the integral part compensates the P term error. Thus, in a
steady state, the controller works normally; the integral term “sees” error caused by load and noise.
In set point changes, however, the controller’s overshoot can be reduced by weighting factor b.
Thus, good load rejection is not anymore related to huge overshoot. In applications where ramp
following without time lag is necessary, acceleration compensation is the right tool.
1
Tis
Tds
τ s+1
f
+
yr
-
+
+
+
Kp
u
+
b
-
y
There is no overshoot in a set point change when factor b is set correctly (b<1). This results in the
integral term’s energy compensating the error caused by the P term. For example, if yr=1 and b=0.9,
the P term set point is actually 0.9 which naturally causes a 10% error for the integral termhandle.
24
Group name:
07
Index
unit:
Description:
type: B
08
Index
Description:
unit: %
type: R
5 - 28
SPEED CONTROL
SET P WEIGHTING
Set Point Weighting is enabled by this parameter. The change over is smooth which enables
the on-line changing of weighting.
0 = OFF
1 = ON
SET POINT WEIGHTING is activated.
Min:
Max:
Def: OFF
Integer scaling: No
SET POINT WEIGHT
The value of the speed controller output, where the gain is KPS.
Min: 30 %
Max: 100 %
Def: 100 %
Integer scaling:
1 == 1%
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 5 – Parameters
Group name:
24
SPEED CONTROL
Integration Time Parameters of the Speed Controller
09
TIS
Index
Description:
unit: s
type: R
10
Integration time for the speed controller. This defines the time within which the maximum
output is achieved if a constant error value exists and the relative gain of the speed controller
is 1.
Min: 0.01 s
Max: 1000 s
Def: 2.5 s
Integer scaling:
1000 == 1s
TIS INIT VALUE
Index
Description:
unit: %
type: R
11
Initial value of the integrator.
Min: see 20.06 Max: see 20.05 Def:
0%
Integer scaling:
100 == 1%
BAL REF
Index
Description:
unit: %
type: R
External value to be forced to the output of the speed controller when 7.02 AUX CONTROL
WORD bit 8 BAL_NCONT is 1.
Min: see 20.06 Max: see 20.05 Def: 0 %
Integer scaling:
100 == 1%
Derivation Parameters of the Speed Controller
12
DERIVATION TIME
Index
Description:
unit: ms
type: R
13
Derivation time for speed controller. Defines the time within which he speed controller derives
the error value before the output of the speed controller is changed. If this is set to zero, the
controller works as a PI controller, otherwise as a PID controller.
Min: 0 ms
Max: 10000 ms Def: 0 ms
Integer scaling:
1 == 1 ms
DERIV FILT TIME
Index
Description:
unit: ms
type: R
The derivation filter time constant.
Min: 0 ms
Max: 100000 ms Def:
8 ms
Integer scaling:
1 == 1 ms
Acceleration Compensation Parameters
14
Index
unit: s
ACC COMP DER TIME
Description:
type: R
15
ACC COMPFILT TIME
Index
Description:
unit: ms
type: R
16
Index
unit: %
Derivation time used during compensation of acceleration. In order to compensate inertia
during acceleration, the derivative of the reference is added to the output of the speed
controller. The function is deactivated by setting the parameter to 0.
Min: 0 s
Max: 1000 s
Def: 0 s
Integer scaling:
10 == 1s
Acceleration compensation term filter coefficient.
Min: 0 ms
Max: 999999 ms Def: 8 ms
Integer scaling:
1 == 1 ms
SLIP GAIN
Description:
type: R
This parameter Is effective only when the calculated internal speed is used as actual speed
feedback. 100% means full slip compensation. 0% corresponds no slip compensation (the
calculated speed equals to motor frequency).
Min: 0 %
Max: 400 %
Def: 100 %
Integer scaling:
1 == 1%
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
5 - 29
Chapter 5 – Parameters
24
Group name:
SPEED CONTROL
Adaptive Speed Control as Function of the Speed
KPS
TIS
The adaptive speed control as a function of speed
KPS VAL MIN FREQ
In certain applications it is useful to increase the relative gain and
decrease the integration time at low speeds, which improves the
performance of the speed control at low speeds. The linear increase and
decrease of these parameters is started at the speed of KPS TIS MIN
FREQ and ended at KPS TIS MAX FREQ. Changing the rate of relative
gain and integration time is done by parameters KPS VAL MIN FREQ
and TIS VAL MIN FREQ.
KPS
TIS
TIS VAL MIN FREQ
motor frequency
KPS TIS MAX FREQ
KPS TIS MIN FREQ
17
Index
unit: Hz
KPS TIS MIN FREQ
Description:
type: R
18
Index
Description:
unit: Hz
type: R
19
Index
Description:
unit: %
type: R
20
Index
Description:
unit: %
type: R
5 - 30
The minimum motor frequency limit above which the relative gain and integral time is defined
by parameters KPS VAL MIN FREQ and TIS VAL MIN FREQ.
Min: 0 Hz
Max: 200 Hz
Def: 5 Hz
Integer scaling:
100 == 1 Hz
KPS TIS MAX FREQ
The frequency point at which KPS and TIS become constant.
Min: 0 Hz
Max: 200 Hz
Def: 11.7 Hz
Integer scaling:
100 == 1 Hz
KPS VAL MIN FREQ
Relative gain percentage of KPS at the speed defined by KPS TIS MIN FREQ.
Min: 100 %
Max: 500 %
Def: 100 %
Integer scaling:
1 == 1%
TIS VAL MIN FREQ
Relative integral time percentage of TIS at the speed defined by KPS TIS MIN FREQ.
Min: 100 %
Max: 500 %
Def: 100 %
Integer scaling:
1 == 1%
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 5 – Parameters
Group 25 Torque Reference
25
Group name:
TORQUE REF
Description:
Torque reference chain.
FILTER
TORQ REF A
25.01
25.02
TORQ_REF_A_FTC
x
+
LIMITER
25.03
TORQ_REF1
02.08
LOAD SHARE
20.09
TREF TORQMAX
20.10
TREF TORQMIN
RAMPING
TORQ REF B
+
25.04
01
Index
unit: %
type: R
Description:
unit: ms
type: R
03
unit: %
Torque reference. Torque reference B is ramped by the parameters TORQ RAMP UP TIME
and TORQ RAMP DN TIME.
Note: This signal is reset (one shot) upon switching to overriding system control (par. 98.02 =
FBA DS1 or FBA DS10). See the AUTO/HAND function.
Min: see 20.06 Max: see 20.05 Def: 0 %
Integer scaling:
100 == 1%
TORQUE REF B
type: R
INPUT
TORQ RAMP UP
06
Torque reference B ramp time from 0 % to 100 %.
Min: 0 s
Max: 120 s
Def: 0 s
Integer scaling:
100 == 1s
Integer scaling:
100 == 1s
TORQ RAMP DOWN
Description:
type: R
07
unit: ms
1 == 1 ms
Description:
Description:
unit: s
type: R
Index
Integer scaling:
TORQ REF A scaling factor which scales the external torque reference to a required level.
Min: -400 %
Max: 400 %
Def: 100 %
Integer scaling:
10 == 1%
Index
Index
TORQUE REF A low pass filter time constant.
Min: 0 ms
Max: 60000 ms Def: 0 ms
Description:
type: R
05
unit: s
INPUT
Torque reference. TORQUE REF A can be scaled by the parameter LOAD SHARE.
Note: This signal is reset (one shot) upon switching to I/O control. See the AUTO/HAND
function.
Min: see 20.06 Max: see 20.05 Def: 0 %
Integer scaling:
100 == 1%
LOAD SHARE
04
Index
TORQ RAMP DN T IME
TORQ REF A FTC
Index
Index
T OR Q RAMP UP TIME
25.06
TORQUE REF A
Description:
02
unit: %
25.05
Torque reference B ramp time from 100 % to 0 %.
Min: 0 s
Max: 120 s
Def: 0 s
TORQ ACT FILT TIME
Description:
type: R
Filter time constant for signal 1.07 MOTOR TORQFILT2 used for torque actual monitoring
purposes.
Min: 2 ms
Max: 20000 ms Def: 100 ms
Integer scaling:
1 == 1 ms
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
5 - 31
Chapter 5 – Parameters
Group 26 Torque Reference Handling
26
Group name:
TORQ REF HANDLING
Description:
The torque reference can be given from the speed reference chain (TORQ REF2) or from the
torque reference chain (TORQ REF1) depending on the control mode. This group defines
how to handle the reference after the torque selector block.
OPTIONAL FUNCTION
OSCILLATION
DAMPING
2.02
SPEED REF3
26.04
OSC COMPANSATION
SPEED ACTUAL
26.05
OSCILLATION FREQ
1.02
26.06
OSCILLATION PHASE
26.07
OSCILLATION GAIN
26.03
TORQUE STEP
LOAD COMPENSATION
TORQ_REF5
26.02
2.12
TORQ_REF4
2.11
TORQUE REFERENCE
SELECTOR
TORQ_REF3
2.10
TORQ REF SEL
26.01
0
2 1
EXTERNAL TORQUE REFERENCE
TORQ REF1
MIN
3
4
TORQUE
REFERENCE
LIMITING
5 6
2.08
MAX
SPEED CONTROLLER OUTPUT
TORQ REF2
01
Index
4 = MINIMUM
5 = MAXIMUM
6 = ADD
type: I
02
Index
unit: %
5 - 32
2.13
LIMITATIONS
+
2.09
TORQUE SELECTOR
Description:
1 = ZERO
2 = SPEED
3 = TORQUE
unit:
+
TORQ USED REF
Min: 1
The torque reference selector includes.
Zero control
Speed control
Torque control
Note: To prevent the torque limitation in generating mode, keep the
minimum torque limits < 0 (zero) e.g. during fast deceleration in the
positive speed direction.
Minimum control. The drive follows smaller value of the TORQ REF1 and
TORQ REF2. However, if the speed error becomes negative the drive
follows TORQ REF2 until the speed error becomes positive again (latch
function). Thus the drive never accelerates uncontrolled if the load is lost
in the torque control.
Maximum control. The drive follows bigger value of the TORQ REF1 and
TORQ REF2. However if the speed error becomes positive the drive
follows TORQ REF2 until the speed error becomes negative again (latch
function). Thus the drive never accelerates uncontrolled if the load is lost
in the torque control.
Add control. The output of the torque selector is a sum of the TORQ
REF1 and TORQ REF2. When the Window Control is required, a bit 7
WINDOW_CTRL must be activated in the ACW2 (7.02).
Max: 6
Def: 2 SPEED Integer scaling:
LOAD COMPENSATION
Description:
type: R
INPUT
Load compensation added to TORQ REF3.
Note: If the overriding system or the NAMC application itself sends a reference value into
this parameter, it must be set to zero before the stop command of the drive.
Min: See 20.06 Max: See 20.05 Def: 0 %
Integer scaling:
100 == 1%
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 5 – Parameters
26
Group name:
TORQ REF HANDLING
Description:
Additional torque step added to TORQ REF4.
Note: If the overriding system or the NAMC application itself sends a reference value into
this parameter, it must be set to zero before the stop command of the drive.
Min: See 20.06 Max: See 20.05 Def: 0 %
Integer scaling:
100 == 1%
03
Index
TORQUE STEP
unit: %
type: R
04
Index
OSC COMPENSATION
Description:
unit:
type: B
05
Index
INPUT
TORSIONAL VIBRATION DAMPING
The filter uses the speed error as an input. The bandpass filter searches for certain
frequencies and calculates a sine wave which is summed to the torque reference after the
phase shift. The phase shift can be set to phase angles between 0-360 degrees.
Typically this function is needed to dampen the mechanical oscillations. The following three
parameters also belong to this function.
0 = ON function is enabled
1 = OFF function is disabled
Min:
Max:
Def: OFF
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
OSCILLATION FREQ
Description:
OSCILLATION FREQ is the oscillation frequency (Hz). Oscillation frequency is determined
by viewing the speed difference signal and the following equation:
f =
N peaks
T
,
where
N peaks is the number of peaks in the time window T (seconds). For example, if we see 11
peaks in 1.5 seconds the frequency is f =11/1.5=7.3 Hz.
unit: Hz
type: R
06
Index
Description:
unit: ° deg
type: R
07
Index
unit: %
Min: 0 Hz
Max: 60 Hz
Def: 31 Hz
Integer scaling:
100 == 1 Hz
OSCILLATION PHASE
Oscillation phase is the phase angle of the sine wave. The control algorithm produces a sine
wave whose phase can be shifted by this parameter.
0°
90° 180°
Min: 0 °
Max: 360 °
Def: 0 °
Integer scaling:
1 == 1.41°
OSCILLATION GAIN
Description:
type: R
Oscillation gain determines how much the sine wave is amplified before it is summed to the
speed error signal. Oscillation gain is scaled according to the speed controller gain so that
changing the speed controller gain will not disturb the oscillation damping.
Min: 0 %
Max: 100 %
Def: 0 %
Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
Group 27 Flux Control
27
Group name:
FLUX CONTROL
Description:
01
Index
unit:
FLUX OPTIMIZATION
Description:
type: B
The motor flux can be optimised in order to minimise the motor losses and reduce motor
noise. Flux optimisation is used in drives that usually operate below nominal load.
1 = YES flux optimisation enabled.
0 = NO flux optimisation disabled.
Min:
Max:
Def: NO
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
5 - 33
Chapter 5 – Parameters
27
Group name:
FLUX CONTROL
Description:
The braking ability of the drive can be highly improved by utilising flux braking. During
braking, the mechanical energy of the driven equipment has to be dissipated in the motor
and inverter. By modifying the magnetising level of the motor, thermal losses can be
increased and the motor can be stopped more effectively. This function can be used with the
non-regenerative incoming sections.
02
Index
FLUX BRAKING
SPEED
No flux braking
Flux braking
Desired deceleration
t
unit:
type: B
03
Index
unit: %
Description:
type: R
Description:
unit: %
type: R
05
Flux reference value in percentage. This value is stored to FPROM memory when set by
CDP 312 or DriveWindow.
Min: see 27.05 Max: see 27.04 Def: 100 %
Integer scaling:
10 == 1%
Maximum limit of the flux percentage.
Min: 100 %
Max: 140 %
Def:
140 %
Integer scaling:
10 == 1%
25 %
Integer scaling:
10 == 1%
FLUX MIN
Description:
type: R
08
Index:
1 == 1
FLUX MAX
Index
Index
Integer scaling:
FLUX REF
04
unit: %
Selection of the flux braking function.
1 = YES Flux braking enabled.
0 = NO
Flux braking disabled.
Min:
Max:
Def: OFF
Minimum limit of the flux percentage.
Min: 0 %
Max: 100 %
Def:
HEX FIELD WEAKEN
Description:
This parameter selects whether motor flux is controlled along a circular or a hexagonal
pattern in the field weaking area of the frequency range.
1 = ON Enabled
Motor flux is controlled along a circular pattern below the field weaking point (FWP, typically
50 or 60 Hz), and along a hexagonal pattern in the field weaking range. The applied pattern
is changed gradually as the frequency increases from 100% to 120% of the FWP. Using the
hexagonal flux pattern, maximum output voltage can be reached; the peak load capacity is
higher than with the circular flux pattern but the continuous load capacity is lower in the
frequency range of FWP to 1.6 x FWP, due to increased losses.
0 = OFF Disabled
ACS600 controls the motor flux insuch a way that the rotating flux vector follows a circular
pattern. This is the default value and ideal for most applications. However, when operated in
the field weaking range, it is not possible to reach 100% output voltage. The peak load
capacity of the drive is lower than with the full voltage.
unit:
5 - 34
type: B
Min: 0
Max: 1
Def:
OFF
Integer scaling:
1 == 1
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 5 – Parameters
Group 28 Motor Model
28
Group name:
MOTOR MODEL
Description:
The parameters 28.01...28.05 are ineffective, if a pulse encoder is used. These parameters
only affect the motor model fine tuning and are required adjustment only in special cases.
Description:
This coefficient affects to the sensitivity of the pull-out prevention within the generator
quadrant, with the speed below 20% of nominal speed and the torque above 30%.
This parameter is automatically set according to an estimation during the Motor ID run or first
start-up and normally requires no alteration.
If the motor is prone to pull out at low speeds within the generator quadrant, decrease the
coefficient.
If motor is unstable at zero speed, increase the coefficient.
Min: 0 %
Max: 100 %
Def: 6 %
Integer scaling: 1 == 1 %
01
Index
unit: %
ZER COEF1
type: R
02
Index
unit: %
ZER GAIN
Description:
type: R
03
Index
unit: %
MOT COEF
Description:
type: R
04
Index
unit: %
unit: %
type: R
unit: m
type: R
unit:
This parameter affects to the accuracy and linearity of the torque control at low frequencies
and torque within all quadrants. This parameter has no effect when frequency is >30% or
torque is >80%.
Min: 0 %
Max: 100 %
Def: 0 %
Integer scaling: 1 == 1 %
CABLE LENGTH
Description:
type: R
07
Index
This parameter affects the stability of torque at low frequencies (<30%) within the generator
quadrant. A greater value results in a more stable torque, however increasing the
susceptibility to pulling out at a particular operation point if torque is above 40%.
Increasing this value is useful in straightening out vibration problems.
Min: 0 %
Max: 100 %
Def: 0 %
Integer scaling: 1 == 1 %
MG COEF
Description:
06
Index
This parameter affects the accuracy and linearity of the torque control at low frequencies
(<10%) within the motor quadrant, when the torque is >30%. This parameter is essential in
maximising breakaway torque, as well as the stability of torque above 100%
Decreasing the value improves the ability to reach the maximum allowed torque.
Too low a value makes the motor prone to pull out at low frequencies within the motor
quadrant.
Min: 0 %
Max: 100 %
Def: 40 %
Integer scaling: 1 == 1 %
GEN COEF
Description:
05
Index
This coefficient also affects the sensitivity of the pull-out prevention within the generator
quadrant, but inversely to Parameter 28.01.
Min: 0 %
Max: 4 %
Def: 7 %
Integer scaling: 1 == 1 %
This is used only, if the motor power is below 10 kW and the cable is longer than 80 metres.
Otherwise it is not advisable to change this parameter value. This parameter affects to the
switching frequency at low frequency reference (<20% of motor nominal).
Min: 0 m
Max: 1000 m
Def: 10 m
Integer scaling: 1 == 1 m
LONG DISTANCE MOD
Description:
type: B
Long Distance Mode. This function is used to limit maximum voltage peaks in the motor
circuit and to reduce the switching frequency of the inverter. This parameter is used as
standard on 690 V inverter units; it can also be used when the motor cables are long.
1 = ON Long distance mode enabled.
0 = OFF Long distance mode disabled.
Min:
Max:
Def: ON
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
5 - 35
Chapter 5 – Parameters
28
Group name:
MOTOR MODEL
Description:
This coefficient affects the calculated rotor time constant according to the motor rating plate
values. It is used if the nominal speed value of the motor rating plate does not correspond to
the real speed. For example, if the real slip speed is 10% higher than the calculated slip
speed stated on the motor rating plate, a coefficient value of 10% is set into this parameter.
See also signal 3.06 TR.
Note: This parameter is effective only if a pulse encoder is used.
Min: -60 %
Max: 200 %
Def: 0 %
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
08
Index
unit: %
TR TUNE
type: R
09
Index
RS INC1
Description:
RS INC1 and RS INC2 coefficient parameters together define a function, which affects the
measured stator resistance value. By increasing the stator resistance value at low
frequencies, it increases the pull-out limit.
RS INC1
RS INC2
RS INC1
RS INC2
0
unit: %
type: R
10
Index
unit: %
Max: 100 %
Def: 25 %
Hz
.
Integer scaling:
10 == 1 %
RS INC2
Description:
type: R
11
Index
Min: -60 %
1.25 * f n
This coefficient defines the coefficient value of the stator resistance at 1.25 * motor nominal
frequency. See parameter RS INC1.
Min: -60 %
Max: 100 %
Def: 0 %
Integer scaling: 10 == 1 %
CALC CURRENT CORR
Description:
Determines the proportional gain that is used to correct the calculated current (lcalc) based
on the measured current (lmeas):
Lcalc = lcals(-1) + (calc_current_corr/100)*(lmeas – lcalc(-1)).
The default value (= 100%) forces the calculated current to follow the measured current and
there is no reason to reduce this parameter from 100%, if there is no interferences in current
measurements. However, if instantaneous current readings are corrupted by current
oscillations caused by long motor cables (or LC-filter), then the noise immunity can be greatly
improved by decreasing this parameter. Normally 10% is a suitable value to make DTC work
with long cables (without LONG DISTANCE MODE).
unit: %
5 - 36
type: R
This parameter has no effect when using scalar control.
Min: 5 %
Max: 100 %
Def: 100 %
Integer scaling:
10 == 1 %
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 5 – Parameters
Group 29 Scalar Control
29
Group name:
SCALAR CONTROL
Description:
Scalar control is activated by selecting SCALAR at Parameter 99.08 CONTROL MODE. This
parameter group is invisible when DTC control mode is selected.
Note: The following Start-Up parameters have no effect in scalar control:
99.03 MOTOR NOM CURRENT
99.05 MOTOR NOM SPEED
99.06 MOTOR NOM POWER
Note: Parameter 50.01 SPEED SCALING has only affect for scaling of the actual speed in
the Scalar motor control mode.
Scalar control parameters can be seen in the Control Diagram.
The scalar control mode is recommended for multimotor drives when the number of motors
connected to the ACS 600 is variable. Scalar control is also recommended when the nominal
current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the nominal current of the inverter, or the inverter is
used for test purposes with no motor connected.
The motor identification Run, flying start, torque control, DC HOLD, motor phase loss check,
and stall functions are disabled in the scalar control mode.
01
FREQUENCY REF
Index
Description:
unit: Hz
type: R
02
Index
unit: Hz
unit: Hz
Description:
type: R
100 == 1 Hz
Operating range maximum frequency. This parameter has an internal link to the parameter
SPEED MAX; if SPEED MAX is changed, this parameter is changed accordingly by the
application program.
Min: See 29.03 Max: 300 Hz
Def: See 20.01 Integer scaling: 100 == 1 Hz
FREQUENCY MIN
Description:
type: R
04
Index
Integer scaling:
FREQUENCY MAX
03
Index
INPUT
This is an input for the frequency reference.
Min: See 29.03 Max: See 29.02 Def: 0
Operating range maximum frequency. This parameter has an internal link to the parameter
SPEED MIN; if SPEED MIN is changed, this parameter is changed accordingly by the
application program.
Min: -300 Hz
Max: See 29.02 Def: See 20.02 Integer scaling: 100 == 1 Hz
IR COMPENSATION
Description:
This parameter sets the extra relative voltage that is fed to the motor at zero frequency. The
range is 0...30% of motor nominal voltage.
U(%)
Umax
a
f(Hz)
Field weakening pointUmax
unit: %
type: R
Min: 0 %
Max: 30 %
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Def: 0
Integer scaling:
100 == 1
5 - 37
5 - 38
mrl
MOTOR NOM VOLT
MOTOR NOM FREQ
99.04
IR COMP CALC
CONTROL
FLUX REF
99.02
IR_COMP_WEAK
29.04
IR COMPENSATION
2.14
FLUX USED REF
1.08
MOTOR TORQUE
FREQUENCY MIN
29.03
LOCAL
1.05.
FREQUENCY
FLUX_Y_ACT
FLUX_X_ACT
ir_k_coef
_
f
ir_corr_coef
SW_FREQ_REF
FLUX USED REF
ramp_sc_i
FREQ REF
29.01
LOCAL FREQ REF
(LOCAL REF 3)
STABILIZER
FREQUENCY MAX
29.02
FREQ REF
LIMITER
Scalar Control
fly_ref
flx_ref
COMPENSATION
2.15
FLUX_ACT
hysteresis
FLUX_Y_ACT
FLUX_X_ACT
FREQ CONTROL
SWITCHING
sine ROM table
MAKE FLUX
REFERENCE
SPEED SHARE
23.03
x
EME STOP RAMP
RAMP SHPE TIME
22.04
22.05
uses torque modulator
HYSTERESIS
CONTROL
DECELER TIME
ACC/DEC TIME SCALE
22.03
ACCELER TIME
22.02
22.01
ACC/DEC/SHAPE
rrampn_shp
1.10
DC VOLTAGE
DC OVERVOLTAGE
DC UNDERVOLTAGE
DC-VOLTAGE
LIMITER
1.06
20.04
MOTOR CURRENT
mruc
MAXIMUM CURRENT
INV MAX CURRENT
CURRENT
LIMITATION
mrl
Chapter 5 – Parameters
Figure 5 - 2 Scalar Control diagram
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 5 – Parameters
Group 30 Fault Functions
30
Group name:
FAULT FUNCTIONS
Description:
01
Index
MOT THERM P MODE
Description:
Motor thermal protection mode selection. The selections are based on the thermal model
defined by the drive (DTC) or the user (USER MODE). Motor heat-up is calculated assuming
a load curve.
Note: Motor thermal model can only be used when one motor is connected to the output of
the inverter.
1 = DTC
The drive defines the thermal model values during the Motor
Identification Run. (See Parameter 99.06.)
Note: This mode can be used for ABB motors up to 800 A of IN.
Above that, USER MODE is the only valid selection.
2 = USER MODE
unit:
type: I
02
Index
unit:
MOTOR THERM PROT
Description:
type: I
03
Index:
Min: 1
Operation in case of an overload based on the motor thermal model protection (par. 30.01).
1 = FAULT
2 = WARNING
3 = NO No thermal model protection and feedback to the motor model.
Note: PT100 or PTC measurement and monitoring is activated by Parameter 30.03 MOT1
TEMP AI1 SEL and 30.06 MOT2 TEMP AI2 SEL.
Min: 1
Max: 3
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
MOT1 TEMP AI1 SEL
Description:
This parameter is used to activate an external motor temperature
measurement circuit connected to analogue input AI1 with NIOC-01
and NBIO-21 I/O-boards. See par. 98.07 BASIC I/O BOARD.
Analogue output AO1 supplies a constant current according to the
selections shown below. The measurement circuit employs 1 to 3
PT100 sensors or PTC thermistors. See the circuit diagrams at
Parameter 98.06.
1 = NOT IN USE
2 = 1xPT100
3 = 2xPT100
4 = 3xPT100
5 = 1...3 PTC
unit:
type: I
04
Index
The user can define the thermal model values using Parameters
30.09...30.12 and 30.28…30.31.
Max: 2
Def: 1
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
Min: 1
Analogue input AI1 is not in use for motor temperature
measurement.
One PT100 sensor; 9.1 mA current generator, (0...10V or 0...2V with
NAIO-01, NAIO-02, NAIO-03 or NBIO-21 extension module.
Two PT100 sensors; 9.1 mA current generator, 0...10V.
Three PT100 sensors; 9.1 mA current generator, 0...10V.
1 to 3 PTC thermistors or KTY84-xx silicon temperature sensor;
01.6 mA current generator, 0...10V.
Max: 5
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
MOT 1 TEMP ALM L
Description:
Motor 1 temperature alarm is activated when the measured temperature rises above this
limit. PT100 [°C], PTC (Ω).
unit: °C or Ω type: R Min: -10 °C or 0Ω Max: 180 °C or 5000Ω Def: 110 °C or 0Ω Integer scal: 1 = 1°C or 1Ω
05
Index
MOT 1 TEMP FLT L
Description:
Motor 1 temperature trip is activated when the measured temperature rises above this limit.
PT100 [°C], PTC (Ω).
unit: °C or Ω type: R Min: -10 °C or 0Ω Max: 180 °C or 5000Ω Def: 130 °C or 0Ω Integer scal: 1 = 1°C or 1Ω
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
5 - 39
Chapter 5 – Parameters
Group name:
30
06
FAULT FUNCTIONS
MOT2 TEMP AI2 SEL
Index:
Description:
This parameter is used to activate a second external motor
temperature measurement circuit connected to NAIO I/O extension
module or NBIO-21 I/O module, analogue input AI2. Analogue output
AO2 supplies a constant current. The measurement circuit employs 1
to 3 PT100 sensors or PTC thermistors. See the circuit diagrams at
Parameter 98.06.
Note: Both measurement circuits (motor 1 and motor 2) have to be
connected to the NAIO I/O extension module, if NIOC-01 exists.
1 = NOT IN USE
2 = 1xPT100
unit:
type: I
07
3 = 2xPT100
4 = 3xPT100
5 = 1...3 PTC
Min: 1
Not in use for motor temperature measurement (0...10V range).
One PT100 temperature sensor (9.1 mA current gen., select 0...2V
range by DIP switches in the NAIO extension module.)
Two PT100 temperature sensors (9.1 mA current gen., 0...10V)
Three PT100 temperature sensors (9.1 mA current gen., 0...10V)
1...3 PTC thermistor or KTY84-xxsilicon temperature sensor;
(1.6 mA current generator, 0...10V range).
Max: 5
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
MOT 2 TEMP ALM L
Index
Description:
Motor 2 temperature alarm is activated when the measured temperature rises above this
limit. PT100 [°C], PTC (Ω)[°C].
unit: °C or Ω type: R Min: -10 °C or 0Ω Max: 180 °C or 5000Ω Def: 110 °C or 0Ω Int. scal: 1 = 1°C or 1Ω
08
MOT 2 TEMP FLT L
Index
Description:
Motor 2 temperature trip is activated when the measured temperature rises above this limit.
PT100 [°C], PTC (Ω)[°C].
unit: °C or Ω type: R Min: -10 °C or 0Ω Max: 180 °C or 5000Ω Def: 130 °C or 0Ω Int. scal: 1 = 1°C or 1Ω
Motor Thermal Model User Mode
09
Index
MOTOR THERM TIME
Description:
Time for 63% temperature rise. Used with the motor thermal model when parameter 30.01
MOT THERM P MODE is set to USER MODE. For monitoring of the calculated temperature,
see signal 1.18 MOTOR TEMP EST. The USER MODE is only used when motor nominal
current is >800 A.
Motor
Load
Temp
rise
t
100%
63%
Motor Thermal Time
unit: s
5 - 40
type: R
t
If thermal protection according to UL requirements for NEMA class motors is desired, the
thermal time for a Class 10 trip curve is 350 s, for Class 20 trip curve 700 s and for a Class
30 trip curve 1050 s.
Min: 256 s
Max: 9999 s
Def:
s
Integer scaling: 1 == 1s
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 5 – Parameters
Table 5 - 1 Motor Thermal Times for ABB HXR and AMA Motors.
HXR motor type
400S
400L
450L
500L
560L
AMA motor type
all types
30
1500 s
Group name:
FAULT FUNCTIONS
Description:
The motor load curve sets the maximum allowable operating load of the motor. It is active
when USER MODE is selected in Parameter 30.01 MOT THERM P MODE. When set to
100%, the maximum allowable load is equal to the value of Start-up Data Parameter 99.03
MOTOR NOM CURRENT. The load curve level should be adjusted if the ambient
temperature differs from the nominal value.
10
Index
Temp. rise time
2700 s
3600 s
4200 s
4800 s
6000 s
MOTOR LOAD CURVE
99.02 MOTOR NOM CURRENT
I(%)
150
100
30.10 MOTOR LOAD CURVE
50
30.11 ZERO SPEED LOAD
Speed
30.12 BREAK POINT
unit: %
type: R
11
Index
unit: %
unit: Hz
Max: 150 %
Def:
100 %
Integer scaling:
1 == 1%
ZERO SPEED LOAD
Description:
type: R
12
Index
Min: 50 %
The maximum motor load at zero speed for the load curve. A higher value can be used if the
motor has an external fan motor to boost the cooling when running the drive at a low
frequency. See the motor manufacturer’s recommendations. This parameter is used when
USER MODE is selected in parameter 30.01 MOT THERM P MODE.
Min: 25 %
Max: 150 %
Def: 74 %
Integer scaling: 1 == 1%
BREAK POINT
Description:
type: R
The break point frequency for the load curve. This parameter defines the point at which the
motor load curve begins to decrease from the maximum value set by Parameter 30.10
MOTOR LOAD CURVE to the value of Parameter 30.11 ZERO SPEED LOAD. Used when
the USER MODE is selected in Parameter 30.01 MOT THERM P MODE.
Min: 1 Hz
Max: 300 Hz
Def: 45 Hz
Integer scaling: 100 == 1 Hz
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
5 - 41
Chapter 5 – Parameters
Stall Protection
30
Group name:
FAULT FUNCTIONS
Description:
This parameter defines the operation of the stall protection. The protection is activated if the
following conditions are valid for a time longer than the period set by Parameter 30.15 STALL
TIME LIM.
1. The motor torque is close to the internal momentary changing limit of the motor control
program that prevents the motor and the inverter from overheating or the motor from
pulling out.
2. the output frequency is below the level set by Parameter 30.14. STALL FREQ HI.
3. SPC TORQ MAX limit value must be higher than MAXIMUM TORQUE limit and SPC
TORQ MIN must be lower than MINIMUM TORQUE.
13
Index
unit:
STALL FUNCTION
type: I
14
Index
Operation in case of a motor stall condition.
1 = NO no action
2 = WARNING A warning Is produced.
3 = FAULT
A fault is produced.
Min: 1
Max: 3
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
STALL FREQ HI
Description:
Frequency limit for the stall protection logic.
T
SPC TORQMAX
Stall region
MAXIMUM
TORQUE
f
STALL FREQ HI
30.11
unit: Hz
type: R
15
Index
unit: s
5 - 42
Min: 0.5 Hz
Max: 50 Hz
Def: 20 Hz
Integer scaling:
100 == 1 Hz
Integer scaling:
1 == 1 s
STALL TIME
Description:
type: R
Time value for the stall protection logic.
Min: 10 s
Max: 400 s
Def:
20 s
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 5 – Parameters
Underload Protection
30
Group name:
16
Index
FAULT FUNCTIONS
UNDERLOAD FUNC
Description:
The absence of motor load may indicate a process
malfunction. The protection is activated if :
1. The motor torque drops below the load curve
selected by Parameter 30.18 UNDERLOAD
CURVE.
2. The condition has lasted longer than the time
set by Parameter 30.17 UNDERLOAD TIME.
3. Output frequency is higher than 10% of the
nominal frequency of the motor.
The protection function assumes that the drive is
equipped with a motor of the rated power.
TM
Underload curve
Underload region
Operation in case of the underload fault.
1 = NO no action
2 = WARNING A warning is produced.
3 = FAULT
A fault is produced.
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
f
0.1*fn
unit:
type: I
17
Max: 3
UNDERLOAD TIME
Index
Description:
unit: s
type: R
18
Index
Min: 1
Time limit for underload logic.
Min: 0 s
Max: 600 s
Def: 600 s
Integer scaling:
1 == 1
UNDERLOAD CURVE
Description:
One of the 5 fixed underload curves can be selected for the underload protection
TM
(% )
100
3
80
70 %
2
60
50 %
1
40
5
20
30 %
4
0
2.4 * ƒ N
ƒN
unit:
type: I
19
Index
unit:
Min: 1
Max: 5
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
MOTOR PHASE LOSS
Description:
type: B
Operation in case a motor phase is lost.
1 = FAULT Enabled.
0 = NO Disabled.
Min:
Max:
Def: NO
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Integer scaling:
1 == 1
5 - 43
Chapter 5 – Parameters
30
Group name:
FAULT FUNCTIONS
Description:
Operation in case of an earth fault condition.
1 = FAULT
A fault is produced.
0 = WARNING
A warning is produced.
Min: 0
Max: 1
Def: FAULT
20
Index
unit:
EARTH FAULT
type: B
21
Index
unit:
Description:
type: B
22
Index
unit:
unit:
Description:
type: B
unit:
type: B
unit:
type: B
unit:
5 - 44
This parameter activates the undervoltage controller. If the DC voltage level starts to
decrease, the torque reference is reduced and the motor acts as a generator.
1 = ON
Enabled.
0 = OFF
Disabled.
Min: 0
Max: 1
Def: OFF
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
This parameter activates the overvoltage controller. The overvoltage controller increases the
torque if the DC-bus voltage exceeds the limit - typically when the motor is running as a
generator and there is no regenerative incoming supply or braking chopper with resistors.
1 = ON
Enabled.
0 = OFF
Disabled. (This is the normal mode with regenerative supply sections.)
Min: 0
Max: 1
Def: ON
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
Unwanted NINT board current measurement or communication faults can be masked in
situations where the DC intermediate circuit voltage has been disconnected but the NAMC
board has an external power supply and fault indication is not needed. A fault is produced
only when the motor is started. See also Parameter 31.02 START INHIBIT ALM.
0 = NO Fault mask disabled.
1 = YES Fault mask enabled.
Min: 0
Max: 1
Def: NO
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
EARTH FAULT LEVEL
Description:
type: R
26
Index
1 == 1
PPCC FAULT MASK
Description:
25
Index
Operation in case local control (control panel or DriveWindow) is lost.
1 = FAULT
A fault is produced.
0 = LAST SPEED
A warning is produced.
Min: 0
Max: 1
Def: FAULT
Integer scaling:
OVERVOLTAGE CTL
Description:
24
Index
1 == 1
UNDERVOLTAGE CTL
23
Index
Integer scaling:
PANEL LOSS
The earth fault trip level is set through the PPCC link by means of this parameter (non
parallel connected inverters R10i, R11i and R12i only). For the parallel connected inverters
this function is the current unbalance protection of the inverter output (e.g. short circuit).
0 = Disabled.
1 = 1% unbalance in the sum current.
2 = 3% unbalance in the sum current.
3 = 8% unbalance in the sum current.
4 = 13% unbalance in the sum current.
5 = 18% unbalance in the sum current.
6 = 28% unbalance in the sum current.
7 = 39% unbalance in the sum current.
8 = 62% unbalance in the sum current.
Min: 0
Max: 8
Def: 5
Integer scaling:
1 == 1
COMM LOSS RO
Description:
type: B
Digital output control upon a communication fault on CH0, if controlled via ACW. Note that
this parameter does not affect digital output DO1).
0 = ZERO Digital outputs are de-energised.
1 = LAST VALUE The states of the digital outputs before the communication fault are
retained.
Min:
Max:
Def: ZERO
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 5 – Parameters
30
Group name:
FAULT FUNCTIONS
Description:
This parameter selects the action if the current signal on analogue inputs AI2 or AI3 (or NAIO
input AI2) falls below 4 mA. This monitoring is valid if 4 mA is selected in Parameter 13.06
MINIMUM AI2 or 13.10 MINIMUM AI3..
1 = FAULT
A fault is generated.
2 = NO
(No action)
3 = LAST SPEED A warning is generated. The drive continues running at the last speed
before the warning.
Min: 1
Max: 3
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
27
AI<MIN FUNC
Index
unit:
type: I
Motor Thermal Model User Mode Alarm and Fault Limits
28
THERM MOD ALM LIM
Index
unit: °C
Description:
type: I
29
An alarm temperature limit for the thermal model protection of the motor. The thermal model
of the motor is activated by Parameter 30.01 MOTOR THERM PMODE and calculated
temperature is shown by the signal 1.18 MOTOR TEMP EST.
Min: 0 °C
Max: 300°C
Def: 90 °C
Integer scaling:
THERM MOD FLT LIM
Index
Description:
unit: °C
type: I
30
A trip temperature limit for the thermal model protection of the motor.
Min: 0 °C
Max: 300 °C
Def: 110 °C
Integer scaling:
MOT NOM TEMP RISE
Index
Description:
Motor nominal temperature rise when loading with motor nominal current.
Temperature
MOTOR
NOMINAL
TEMPERATURE
RISE
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
Time
unit: °C
type: R
31
Note: If ABB motor rating plate includes the coefficient MNTRC, multiply its value by 80 °C
and set this parameter to the result. With non-ABB motors, contact motor manufacturer for
data of motor nominal temperature rise.
Min: 0 °C
Max: 300 °C
Def: 80 °C
Integer scaling: 1 == 1 °C
AMBIENT TEMP
Index
Description:
unit: °C
type: R
Typical motor ambient temperature. Used only with motor thermal protection model.
Min: -40 °C
Max: 100 °C
Def: 30 °C
Integer scaling: 1 == 1 °C
Motor Temperature Feedback to the Motor Model
32
Index
unit: %
RS TEMP SCALE
Description:
type: R
Tuning coefficient for temperature dependence of stator resistance Rs based on the
measured temperature with PT100 sensors or internal motor thermal protection model. The
measured total resistance includes motor cable and stator resistance.
With pulse encoder feedback, 100% compensation can often be used. Undercompensation
decreases the starting torque at high motor temperatures.
Min: 0 %
Max: 200%
Def: 40 %
Integer scaling: 1 == 1 %
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
5 - 45
Chapter 5 – Parameters
Group 31 Fault Functions
31
Group name:
FAULT FUNCTIONS
Description:
Action when the contact of digital input KLIXON opens. See Parameter 10.05 KLIXON.
0 = FAULT
1 = ALARM
Min: 0
Max: 1
Def: 0
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
01
Index
unit:
KLIXON MOT OVER T
type: B
02
Index
unit:
START INHIBIT ALM
Description:
type: B
Logging of the Prevention of Unexpected Start-up alarm “START INHIBI” (9.04 AW_1 bit 0)
to the fault/alarm logger can be prevented using this parameter. This function has no effect
on status or alarm words.
0 = OFF
1 = ON Logging disabled
Min: 0
Max: 1
Def: 0
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
Group 35 Motor Fan Control
35
Group name:
MOTOR FAN CONTROL
Description:
Certain motors are equipped by an external fan. The ACS 600 System Application Program
provides the control logic and diagnostics for this. The fan starter is controlled by digital
output by parameter group 14. FAN ON CMD must be used as a control signal to digital
output. An acknowledge signal is selectable by Parameter 10.06 MOTOR FAN ACK.
8.02 bit3
35.04
35.03
01
Index
unit:
unit: s
type: I
unit: min
unit: s
5 - 46
FAN ON CMD
8.06 bit0
FAN ON DELAY
FAN OFF DELAY
This parameter activates the motor fan diagnostics and the timer functions to signal ASW2
(8.06) bit 0.
1 = OFF
Motor fan control and diagnostics disabled.
2 = ALARM
Motor fan control and diagnostics enabled. If the acknowledge signal is
lost, only an alarm ”MOTOR FAN” is generated.
3 = ALARM/FAULT Motor fan control and diagnostics enabled. If the acknowledge signal is
lost, an alarm ”MOTOR FAN” is generated. If the acknowledge signal is
still lost after 35.04 FAN ACK DELAY, a fault is indicated and drive is
tripped.
Min: 1
Max: 3
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
FAN ACK DELAY
An acknowledge signal delay. Delay time count starts on the activation of FAN ON CMD.
Min: 2 s
Max: 300 s
Def: 5 s
Integer scaling: 1 == 1s
Description:
A delay off function for the motor fan starter control. FAN ON CMD is controlled to state false
when the time defined by this parameter has elapsed.
Min: 0 min
Max: 100 min
Def: 20 min
Integer scaling: 1 == 1 min
FAN OFF DELAY
type: R
04
Index
TOF
Description:
type: R
03
Index
TON
MOTOR FAN CTRL
Description:
02
Index
MAGNETISED
FAN ON DELAY
Description:
type: R
A delay on function for the motor fan starter control, since the motor has been magnetised
and FAN ON CMD is controlled to state true.
Min: 0 s
Max: 100 s
Def: 0 s
Integer scaling: 1 == 1 s
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 5 – Parameters
Group 36 Motor Cable Protection
36
Group name:
MOTOR CABLE PROTECTION
The motor cable can be protected in the ACS 600 application program against overload
(using a thermal model). The default values never cause a trip. To activate this function,
define the cable parameters.
The thermal model of the motor cable is based on the current measurement and known
loading data of the cable. A relative actual value of the thermal model output is shown by
signal 1.27 CABLE TEMPERATURE. The value of 100% corresponds to the trip limit.
01
Index
unit: A
CABLE NOM CURRENT
Description:
type: RI
02
Index
unit: s
The permitted continuous current for the motor cable, including possible limitation factors due
to the environment conditions (ambient temperature, distances to other cables, etc.). See the
cable manufacturer’s data book.
The new values become valid only on the next NAMC board power-on.
Min: 0 A
Max: 10000 A
Def: 9999.9 A Integer scaling: 1 == 1
CABLE TEMP CONST
Description:
type: R
Permitted loading time for the motor cable in seconds by load √2 * CABLE NOM CURRENT.
See the cable manufacturer’s data book.
The new values become valid only on the next NAMC board power-on.
Min: 0.1 s
Max: 1000 s
Def: 8 s
Integer scaling: 10 == 1s
Group 50 Speed Measurement
50
Group name:
SPEED MEASUREMENT
Description:
SPEED ESTIMATED
MOTOR MODEL
SPEED FEEDBACK
SELECTION
1. 02
FILTER
MOTOR SPEED
SPEED_MEASURED
1.04
1.03
50.06
50.01
SPEED SCALING
50.02
SPEED MEAS MODE
50.03
50.04
SPEED FB SEL
ENCODER PULSE NR
50.05
ENCODER ALM/FLT
98.01
01
Index
unit: rpm
unit:
FILTER
MOTOR SPEED FILT
1.01
50.12
MOTOR SP FILT TIM
SPEED SCALING
Description:
type: R
02
Index
ENCODER MODULE
SP ACT FILT TIME
This parameter defines the speed reference (in rpm) that corresponds to the value of 20000
from the overriding system or I/O. This parameter has only scaling effect to speed actual
signals in the scalar control mode.
Min: 0 rpm
Max: 100000 rpm Def: 1500 rpm Integer scaling: 15000 = 1500 rpm
SPEED MEAS MODE
Description:
type: I
Selects the measurement type for the pulse encoder mode.
0 = A_-B DIR
Positive edges for speed; channel B: direction
1 = A_-_
Positive and negative edges for speed; channel B: not used
2 = A_-_B DIR Positive and negative edges for speed; channel B: direction
3 = A_-_B_-_
Channels A & B: positive and negative edges for speed and direction
Min: 0
Max: 3
Def: 3
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
5 - 47
Chapter 5 – Parameters
50
Group name:
SPEED MEASUREMENT
Description:
Source of the speed feedback to the speed controller.
1 = INTERNAL
Internal actual speed.
2 = ENCODER
Pulse encoder module (see also Parameter 98.01 ENCODER MODULE).
Min: 0
Max: 2
Def: 1
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
03
Index
unit:
SPEED FB SEL
type: I
04
Index
unit:
ENCODER PULSE NR
Description:
type: R
Number of pulse encoder pulses per revolution.
Min: 1
Max: 30000
Def: 2048
Description:
Determines a if speed measurement error causes a warning or a fault.
1 = FAULT A drive is tripped
0 = ALARM A warning is generated and the drive continues running at the internal actual
speed.
Min:
Max:
Def: ALARM
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
05
Index
unit:
type: B
SP ACT FILT TIME
Index
Description:
unit: ms
type: R
07
unit:
unit:
Description:
type: I
unit:
unit: rpm
unit: ms
Description:
type: PB
Position counter initial high word value when the mode is PULSE EDGES.
Min: 0
Max: 65536
Def: 0
Integer scaling:
1 == 1
Description:
When the actual speed has reached the value of this parameter, 8.01 MAIN STATUS WORD
bit 10 is set to 1.
Min: See 20.01 Max: See 20.02
Def: 0
Integer scaling: See 50.01
ABOVE SPEED LIMIT
type: R
ENCODER DELAY (available in sw ver 5.1x)
Description:
type: R
Description:
unit: ms
type: R
5 - 48
1 == 1
POS COUNT INIT HI
12
Index
The position counter is based on the pulse count from the pulse encoder. It has two different
measurement modes:
0 = PULSE EDGES Both edges of the pulses are counted. Actual values can be read from
signals 3.07 POS COUNT LOW and 3.08 POS COUNT HIGH.
1 = ROUND&DEG The application software counts the number of the motor shaft rounds
and the shaft angle in degrees. Actual values can be read from signals
3.09 POS COUNT DEGREES and 3.10 POS COUNT ROUNDS.
The position counter is controlled by means of 7.02 AUX CONTROL WORD bits 9...11.
The status can be seen from 8.02 AUX STATUS WORD bit 5 (SYNC_RDY).
By means of the application program in the overriding system, it is possible to create the
positioning control function.
Min: 0
Max: 1
Def: ROUND Integer scaling:
1 == 1
POS COUNT INIT LO
11
Index
1 == 1 ms
Position counter initial low word value when the mode is PULSE EDGES.
Min: 0
Max: 65536
Def: 0
Integer scaling:
10
Index
Integer scaling:
Description:
type: PB
09
Index
The time constant of the first order actual speed filter.
Min: 0 ms
Max: 999999 ms Def: 4 ms
POS COUNT MODE
08
Index
1 == 1
ENCODER ALM/FLT
06
Index
Integer scaling:
Time of no encoder pulses received, and the drive being at the torque or current limit
simultaneously, before an alarm or a fault is produced. Setting this parameter to 0 disables
the function at the torque or current limit.
Min: 0
Max: 50000
Def: 1000
Integer scaling: 1 == 1 ms
MOTOR SP FILT TIME
(available in sw ver 5.2x)
Filter time constant for monitoring signal 1.01 MOTOR SPEED FILT.
Min: 2 ms
Max: 20000 ms
Def: 500 ms Integer scaling:
1 == 1 ms
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 5 – Parameters
50
Group name:
SPEED MEASUREMENT
Description:
This parameter can be adjusted for the best possible performance at the low speeds when a
pulse encoder is used and pulses are not received during the 1 ms measurement cycle.
13
Index:
ZERO DETECT DELAY
The definition of “low speeds” depends on the type of the encoder used. For example if
encoder pulse number is 2048 and both edges of A and B channels are calculated, there are
8192 pulses per revolution. Then at least one pulse per millisecond is received at 7.3 rpm (1
pulse / ms Þ 1000 pulses/s Þ 1000/8192 rev/s ≈ 7.3 rpm). Thus 4 ms between pulses
corresponds to 1.8 rpm and 80 ms to 0.09 rpm.
See the following example with parameter settings:
50.13 = 250 ms, 50.14 = 4 ms, constant speed reference.
After receiving a pulse, measured speed is calculated and speed control P-part is set to a
value related to speed error. When no new pulses are received within 1 ms, the measured
speed and P-part (due the constant speed reference) are held. After the SPEED HOLD TIME
P-part is forced to zero so that speed control will not be based on an absolete speed
measurement value. After ZERO DETECT DELAY, it is assumed that speed is zero, causing
clearing of measured speed and allowing use of P-part.
After the next pulse, some measured speed is calculated again and P-part accordingly. Ppart is cleared again after SPEED HOLD TIME. The measured speed is not set to zero
anymore, because a new pulse comes before ZERO DETECT DELAY.
The time between pulses 3 and 4 is still longer than SPEED HOLD TIME and P-part is forced
to zero.
The time between pulses 4 and 5 is already so short that neither P-part nor the measured
speed is forced to zero.
1
3
2
4
5
tacho pulse edges
t1
t1
measured speed
t2
t2
t2
t2
speed control P-part
Figure 1: ZERO DETECT DELAY = 250ms (t1) and SPEED HOLD TIME = 4ms (t2).
unit:
ms
type: I
With the configuration of figure 1 there is a long ZERO DETECT DELAY that gives accurate
speed measurement. The short SPEED HOLD TIME keeps the speed control stable in many
cases, because speed control output is not influenced by “old” speed measurement. On the
other hand, if P-part is very large, forcing it to zero causes undesirable torque steps.
The tuning values depends on the clearances of mechanics. Therefore after increasing these
parameter values, check that the torque actual value is still smooth.
Min: 1 ms
Max: 2000 ms Def: 4 ms
Integer scaling:
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
5 - 49
Chapter 5 – Parameters
50
Group name:
SPEED MEASUREMENT
Description:
The time after the P-part of speed control is forced to zero, if the time has been elapsed and
no new pulses have been received after the last sample. By increasing the value, it amplifies
the effect of P-part at the low speeds due to the longer effect time of P-part. Oscillation can
occur, if the time is too long.
See description of Par. 50.13 ZERO DETECT DELAY above.
Note: The value of SPEED HOLD TIME <= ZERO DETECT DELAY.
Min: See 50.13 Max: 2000 ms Def: 4 ms
Integer scaling:
14
Index:
SPEED HOLD TIME
Unit: ms
type: I
Group 51 Master Adapter (Field Bus Adapter)
51
Group name:
MASTER ADAPTER
Description:
This group defines the communication parameters for a fieldbus adapter module. The
parameter names are copied from the module when its connection to the drive is activated
using Parameter 98.02 COMM MODULE. See the module manual.
Note: Any changes in these parameters take effect only upon the next power-up of the
adapter module.
01
Index
unit:
FIELDBUS PAR1 (Module type and software version)
Description:
type: R
02...15
Index
unit:
5 - 50
Min:
Max:
Def:
Integer scaling:
FIELDBUS PAR2...15 (According to module type)
Description:
type: R
Min:
Max:
Def:
Integer scaling:
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 5 – Parameters
Group 70 DDCS Control
70
Group name:
DDCS CONTROL
Description:
Parameter settings of the DDCS communication channels.
Description:
Node address for channel CH0. In an AC 80 DriveBus connection, the drives are addressed
1 to 12. The drive address is related to the value of the DRNR terminal of the ACSRX PC
element. When using the APC2 system, the address must be 1.
01
Index
CH0 NODE ADDR
unit:
type: R
02
Index
CH0 LINK CONTROL
Description:
unit:
type: R
03
Index
type: I
04
unit: ms
Channel CH0 communication speed. This must be set to 4 Mbits/s, when FCI or FBA
communication modules are used. Otherwise, the overriding system automatically sets the
communication speed.
0 = 8 Mbit/s
1 = 4 Mbit/s
2 = 2 Mbit/s
3 = 1 Mbit/s
Min: 1 Mbit/s
Max: 8 Mbit/s
Def: 4 Mbit/s
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
CH0 TIMEOUT
Description:
type: R
05
Index
DDCS channel 0 intensity control for transmission LEDs. This parameter can be used in
special cases to optimise the communication performance of the link.
Min: 1
Max: 15
Def: 10
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
CH0 BAUD RATEDescription:
unit: Mbit/s
Index
In an Optical ModuleBus connection, the CH0 NODE ADDR value is calculated from the
value of the POSITION terminal in the DRIENG database element as follows:
1. Multiply the hundreds of the value of position by 16.
2. Add the tens and ones of the value of POSITION to the result.
For example, if the POSITION terminal of the DRIENG database element has the value of
101, Parameter 70.01 must be set 16 x 1 + 1 = 17.
Min: 0
Max: 125
Def: 1
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
The delay time before a communication break fault is declared. The time count starts when
the link fails update the message. Setting this parameter to 0 disables the function.
Min: 0 ms
Max: 60000 ms Def: 100 ms
Integer scaling: 1 == 1 ms
CH0 COM LOSS CTRL
This parameter defines the action after a communication fault on
channel CH0. See also Parameter 30.26 COM LOSS RO.
Description:
2 = STOP TORQ
The drive is stopped by ramping. The deceleration time is defined
by Parameter 22.02 DECELER TIME.
The drive is stopped by torque limit.
3 = COAST STOP
The drive is stopped by coasting.
1 = STOP RAMPNG
4 = LAST SPEED
unit:
type: I
06
Index
unit:
The drive continues running on the last reference, the warning CH0
TIME OUT is activated, and 9.04 ALARM WORD 2 bit 11 is set to 1.
The drive continues running at the speed reference defined by
5 = CNST SPEED1
Parameters 23.02 CONST SPEED 1, the warning CH0 TIME OUT is
activated and 9.05 ALARM WORD 2 bit 11 is set to 1.
Min: 1
Max: 5
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
CH1 LINK CONTROL
Description:
type: R
DDCS channel CH1 intensity control for transmission LEDs. This value is adjusted through
the link including each device on the link. This parameter can be used in special cases to
optimise the communication performance of the link.
Min: 1
Max: 15
Def: 10
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
5 - 51
Chapter 5 – Parameters
70
Group name:
DDCS CONTROL
Description:
Node address for channel CH2. This is used only in applications, with one or several point to
point communications connections between the NAMC boards.
Min: 1
Max: 125
Def: 1
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
07
Index
unit:
CH2 NODE ADDR
type: R
08
Index
CH2 M/F MODE
Description:
Channel CH2 can be used to send the torque reference from the
Master Drive to one or several Followers. Master/Follower is an
application in which the machinery is run by several ACS 600
MultiDrives and the motor shafts are coupled to each other by
gearing, a chain, a belt etc.
1 = NOT IN USE
Channel CH2 not used for M/F communication.
2 = MASTER
The drive is the master on the M/F link and broadcasts via CH2 the
contents of data set 41 (defined by Parameters 70.09…70.11).
3 = FOLLOWER
unit:
type: I
09
Index
unit:
MASTER SIGNAL 1
Description:
type: R
10
Index
unit:
unit:
type: R
unit:
type: R
unit: ms
5 - 52
Group + Index of the signal to be sent as a broadcast message to data set 41 index 3 in the
follower drives (torque reference). Example: 2.10 TORQ REF3 is typically used to send as
torque reference to the 25.01 TORQUE REF A in the follower drives. Parameter 70.11 value
is then 210.
Note: This parameter is not used, if the 70.08 CH2 M/F MODE has a value FOLLOWER.
Min: 0
Max: 20000
Def: 0
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
CH2 LINK CONTROL
Description:
type: R
13
Index
Group + Index of the signal to be sent as a broadcast message to data set 41 index 2 in the
follower drives (speed reference). Example: the setting 2301 broadcasts 23.01 SPEED REF.
Note: This parameter is not used, if the 70.08 CH2 M/F MODE has a value FOLLOWER.
Min: 0
Max: 20000
Def: 0
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
MASTER SIGNAL 3
Description:
12
Index
Not in use. Group + Index of the signal to be sent as a broadcast message to data set 41
index 1 in the follower drives. Example: the setting 701 broadcasts 7.01 MAIN CTRL WORD.
Min: 0
Max: 20000
Def: 0
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
MASTER SIGNAL 2
Description:
11
Index
Min: 1
The drive is a follower on the M/F link. Torque reference is read
from data set 41 index 3 into TORQ REF A and from index 2 to
SPEED REF. For more information, see the section
“Master/Follower Link”.
Max: 3
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
DDCS channel CH2 intensity control for transmission LEDs. This parameter can be used in
special cases to optimise the communication performance of the link.
Min: 1
Max: 15
Def: 10
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
CH2 TIMEOUT
Description:
type: R
The delay time before a communication break fault is declared. The time count starts when
the link fails update the message. During the time elapsing, the warning CH2 TIME OUT is
activated and 9.04 ALARM WORD 1 bit 6 is set to 1.
Min: 0 ms
Max: 60000 ms Def: 100 ms
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 5 – Parameters
70
Group name:
14
Index
DDCS CONTROL
CH2 COM LOSS CTRL
Description:
This parameter defines the action upon a communication fault on
CH2 of the NAMC board.
Drive is tripped, fault M/F LINK FAULT activated and 9.01 FAULT
WORD 1 bit 11 is set to 1.
1 = FAULT
2 = ALARM
unit:
type: I
15
Index
unit:
CH3 NODE ADDR
Description:
type: R
16
Index
unit:
unit:
type: R
unit:
type: B
unit:
type: B
unit:
This parameter defines the source for the torque reference in the Master / Follower mode.
0 = FOLLOWER
Torque reference is read either datasets 1, 10...24 or I/O.
1 = MASTER
Torque reference is read from data set 41 to the follower.
Min:
Max:
Def: MASTER
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
CH0 HW CONNECTION
Description:
type: B
20
Index:
This parameter defines the source for the speed reference in the Master/Follower mode.
0 = FOLLOWER
Speed reference is read either datasets 1, 10...24 or I/O.
1 = MASTER
Speed reference is read from data set 41 to the follower.
Min:
Max:
Def: FOLLOWER Integer scaling: 1 == 1
FOLL TORQ REF
Description:
19
Index:
DDCS channel CH3 intensity control for transmission LEDs. This value is adjusted through
the link including each device on the link. This parameter can be used in special cases to
optimise the communication performance of the link.
Min: 1
Max: 15
Def:
15
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
FOLL SPEED REF
Description:
18
Index
Node address for channel CH3. This channel is normally used with the start-up and
maintenance tools. If the CH3 channels of several drives have been connected in a ring or
star (using a branching unit), each one must be given unique node address. The new node
address becomes valid only on the next NAMC board power-on. The address range is
1…75 and 125…254. Addresses 75…124 are reserved for branching units.
Min: 1
Max: 254
Def: 1
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
CH3 LINK CONTROL
Description:
17
Index
Min: 1
The warning M/F LINK ALARM is generated and 9.04 ALARM
WORD 1 bit 11 is set to 1.
Max: 2
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
This parameter is used to enable or disable the regeneration of CH0 optotransmitter in DDCS
mode (Par. 71.01 DRIVEBUS MODE = OFF). Regeneration means that the drive echoes all
messages back. DDCS mode is typically used with APC2, AC70 and AC450 controllers.
0 = RING
Regeneration is enabled. Used with ring-type bus topology.
1 = STAR
Regeneration disabled. Used with star-type bus topology. Typically with
configurations: AC450 – CI810 – NDBU-95 branching unit(s) – ACS 600.
Note: This parameter has no effect in DriveBus mode.
Select RING, if the CH0 channels on the NAMC boards have been connected to ring.
Min: 0
Max: 1
Def: 1 = STAR
Integer scaling:
1 == 1
CH3 HW CONNECTION
Description:
type: B
This parameter is used to enable or disable the regeneration of CH3 optotransmitter.
Regeneration means that the drive echoes all messages back.
0 = RING
Regeneration is enabled. Used with ring-type bus topology.
1 = STAR
Regeneration disabled. Used with star-type bus topology. Typically with
configurations: DriveWindow (PC) – NDBU-95 branching unit(s) – ACS 600.
Select RING, if the CH3 channels on the NAMC boards have been connected to ring.
Min: 0
Max: 1
Def: 1 = STAR
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
5 - 53
Chapter 5 – Parameters
Group 71 DriveBus Communication
71
Group name:
DRIVEBUS COMM
Description:
Parameter settings of DriveBus communication on channel CH0. Available with sw ver. 5.2.
Not available with NAMC-03/04 boards.
Description:
Communication mode selection for channel CH0. The Drivebus mode is used with the AC 80
controller. The new mode becomes valid only on the next NAMC board power-on.
0 = NO
DDCS mode
1 = YES
DriveBus mode
Min: 0
Max: 1
Def: 1 YES
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
01
Index
unit:
CH0 DRIVEBUS MODE
type: B
Group 90 Data Set Receive Addresses
90
Group name:
D SET REC ADDR
Description:
Addresses for Received Data from the Overriding System.
The format is (x)xyy, where (x)x = Group, yy = Index.
Overriding
System
NAMC-xx
Dataset Table
10
12
14
DDCS link
Address
Assignment
of Dataset
Group
AMC
Table
90.01...90.18
91.01...91.09
Ch0
32
01
Index
Unit:
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
5 - 54
D SET 10 VAL 1
Description:
type: I
Data set 10 value 1 receive address (Interval: NAMC-03/-11:10 ms, NAMC-2x: 2 ms).
Min: 0
Max: 9999
Def: 701
Integer scaling:
D SET 10 VAL 2
D SET 10 VAL 3
D SET 12 VAL 1
D SET 12 VAL 2
D SET 12 VAL 3
D SET 14 VAL 1
D SET 14 VAL 2
D SET 14 VAL 3
D SET 16 VAL 1
D SET 16 VAL 2
D SET 16 VAL 3
D SET 18 VAL 1
D SET 18 VAL 2
D SET 18 VAL 3
D SET 20 VAL 1
D SET 20 VAL 2
D SET 20 VAL 3
See 90.01
See 90.01
See 90.01
See 90.01
See 90.01
See 90.01
See 90.01
See 90.01
See 90.01
See 90.01
See 90.01
See 90.01
See 90.01
See 90.01
See 90.01
See 90.01
See 90.01
Interval: NAMC-03:10 ms, NAMC-2x: 2 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:10 ms, NAMC-2x: 2 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:10 ms, NAMC-2x: 4 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:10 ms, NAMC-2x: 4 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:10 ms, NAMC-2x: 4 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:100 ms, NAMC-2x: 10 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:100 ms, NAMC-2x: 10 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:100 ms, NAMC-2x: 10 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:100 ms, NAMC-2x: 10 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:100 ms, NAMC-2x: 10 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:100 ms, NAMC-2x: 10 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:100 ms, NAMC-2x: 100 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:100 ms, NAMC-2x: 100 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:100 ms, NAMC-2x: 100 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:500 ms, NAMC-2x: 100 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:500 ms, NAMC-2x: 100 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:500 ms, NAMC-2x: 100 ms
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 5 – Parameters
Group 91 Data Set Receive Addresses
91
Group name:
D SET REC ADDR
Description:
Addresses for Received Data from the Overriding System.
The format is (x)xyy, where (x)x = Group, yy = Index.
01
02
03
04
05
06
D SET 22 VAL 1
D SET 22 VAL 2
D SET 22 VAL 3
D SET 24 VAL 1
D SET 24 VAL 2
D SET 24 VAL 3
See 90.01
See 90.01
See 90.01
See 90.01
See 90.01
See 90.01
Interval: NAMC-03:500 ms, NAMC-2x: 100 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:500 ms, NAMC-2x: 100 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:500 ms, NAMC-2x: 100 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:500 ms, NAMC-2x: 100 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:500 ms, NAMC-2x: 100 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:500 ms, NAMC-2x: 100 ms
Group 92 Data Set Transmit Addresses
92
Group name:
D SET TR ADDR
Description:
Signal addresses for the transmitted data to the overriding system.
The format is (x)xyy, where (x)x = Group, yy = Index.
Overriding
System
NAMC-xx
Dataset Table
DDCS link
11
13
15
Address
Assignment
of Dataset
Group
AMC
Table
92.01...92.18
93.01...93.09
Ch0
33
01
Index
unit:
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
D SET 11 VAL 1
Description:
type: I
Data set 11 value 1 transmit address (Interval: NAMC-03:10 ms, NAMC-2x: 2 ms).
Min: 0
Max: 9999
Def: 801
Integer scaling:
D SET 11 VAL 2
D SET 11 VAL 3
D SET 13 VAL 1
D SET 13 VAL 2
D SET 13 VAL 3
D SET 15 VAL 1
D SET 15 VAL 2
D SET 15 VAL 3
D SET 17 VAL 1
D SET 17 VAL 2
D SET 17 VAL 3
D SET 19 VAL 1
D SET 19 VAL 2
D SET 19 VAL 3
D SET 21 VAL 1
D SET 21 VAL 2
D SET 21 VAL 3
See 92.01
See 92.01
See 92.01
See 92.01
See 92.01
See 92.01
See 92.01
See 92.01
See 92.01
See 92.01
See 92.01
See 92.01
See 92.01
See 92.01
See 92.01
See 92.01
See 92.01
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Interval: NAMC-03:10 ms, NAMC-2x: 2 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:10 ms, NAMC-2x: 2 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:100 ms, NAMC-2x: 4 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:100 ms, NAMC-2x: 4 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:100 ms, NAMC-2x: 4 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:100 ms, NAMC-2x: 10 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:100 ms, NAMC-2x: 10 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:100 ms, NAMC-2x: 10 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:100 ms, NAMC-2x: 10 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:100 ms, NAMC-2x: 10 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:100 ms, NAMC-2x: 10 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:500 ms, NAMC-2x: 100 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:500 ms, NAMC-2x: 100 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:500 ms, NAMC-2x: 100 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:500 ms, NAMC-2x: 100 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:500 ms, NAMC-2x: 100 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:500 ms, NAMC-2x: 100 ms
5 - 55
Chapter 5 – Parameters
Group 93 Data Set Transmit Addresses
93
Group name:
D SET TR ADDR
Description:
Signal addresses for the transmitted data to the overriding system.
The format is (x)xyy, where (x)x = Group, yy = Index.
01
02
03
04
05
06
D SET 23 VAL 1
D SET 23 VAL 2
D SET 23 VAL 3
D SET 25 VAL 1
D SET 25 VAL 2
D SET 25 VAL 3
See 92.01
See 92.01
See 92.01
See 92.01
See 92.01
See 92.01
Interval: NAMC-03:500 ms, NAMC-2x: 100 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:500 ms, NAMC-2x: 100 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:500 ms, NAMC-2x: 100 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:500 ms, NAMC-2x: 100 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:500 ms, NAMC-2x: 100 ms
Interval: NAMC-03:500 ms, NAMC-2x: 100 ms
Group 97 Drive
97
Group name:
DRIVE
Description:
01
Index
unit:
DEVICE NAME
Description:
The name of the drive section can be typed here by the DriveWindow PC tool. This name is
shown in the System Configuration display of DriveWindow. The maximum number of
characters is 32.
type: String Min: 0 char
Max: 32 char
Def: 0
Integer scaling: no
Group 98 Option Modules
98
Group name:
OPTION MODULES
Description:
The optional NTAC, NAIO and NDIO modules are connected in a ring (together with the
NIOC board) on NAMC channel CH1. Each of these modules is given an address using the
DIP switches on them. (The NIOC always has the address 1.)
Fieldbus adapter modules are connected to channel CH0.
Description:
NTAC-02 pulse encoder module or NIOB-01 pulse encoder interface selection. The module
is connected in series with the NIOC board on channel CH1. The module is given the
address 16 by setting the DIP switches as shown below.
01
Index
ENCODER MODULE
1 = YES
0 = NO
Pulse encoder module or NIOB-01 pulse encoder interface activated.
Pulse encoder module or NIOB-01 pulse encoder interface not activated.
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
unit:
5 - 56
type: B
Note: See the parameter settings in Group 50 and Par. 98.07
Min:
Max:
Def: NO
Integer scaling:
1 == 1
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 5 – Parameters
98
Group name:
02
Index
OPTION MODULES
COMM MODULE
Description:
This parameter defines the control mode and place in the REMOTE
mode.
1 = NO
unit:
type: I
03
Index
The drive is controlled using the I/O. See settings in the parameter
group 10.
2 = FBA DSET 1
The drive is controlled through the communication link (channel CH0)
using data sets 1 and 2. This is a typical setting for use with a fieldbus
adapter module.
3 = FBA DSET10 The drive is controlled through the communication link (channel CH0)
using data sets 10 to 33 (for example APC2, AC 70, AC 80: also NPBA02, NCSA-01).
Min: 1
Max: 3
Def: 3
Integer scaling:
DI/O EXT MODULE 1
Description:
NDIO I/O extension module 1 can be used to replace or extend the I/O. The module is
connected to channel CH1 on the NAMC board. The module is given the address 2 by
setting the DIP switches as shown below.
1 = NO
2 = REPLACE
3 = EXTEND
No NDIO module 1 used.
NDIO replaces NIOC DI1, DI2, DO1 and DO2.
Activates extended I/O: EXT1_DI1, EXT1_DI2, EXT1_DO1 and
EXT1_DO2.
NDIO-01
NDIO-02
ON
ON
1
1
unit:
type: I
2
3
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
6
7
S7:
DI1 HW Filtering Enabled (Default)
DI1 HW Filtering Disabled
7
Note: DI1 HW filtering must be enabled, if AC voltage is connected to DI1.
Min: 1
Max: 3
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
5 - 57
Chapter 5 – Parameters
98
Group name:
OPTION MODULES
Description:
NDIO I/O extension module 2 can be used to replace or extend the I/O. Module is connected
to channel CH1 on the NAMC board. The module is given the address 3 by setting the DIP
switches as shown below.
04
Index
DI/O EXT MODULE 2
1 = NO
2 = REPLACE
No NDIO module 2 used.
NDIO replaces NIOC DI3, DI4, and DO3.
EXT2_DO1 is activated.
Activates extended I/O: EXT2_DI1, EXT2_DI2, EXT2_DO1 and
EXT2_DO2
3 = EXTEND
NDIO-01
NDIO-02
S7:
DI1 HW Filtering Enabled (Default)
DI1 HW Filtering Disabled
ON
ON
1
1
unit:
type: I
05
Index
2
3
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
6
7
7
Note: DI1 HW filtering must be enabled, if AC voltage is connected to DI1.
Min: 1
Max: 3
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
DI/O EXT MODULE 3
Description:
NDIO I/O extension module 3 can be used to replace or extend the I/O. Module is connected
to channel CH1 on the NAMC board. The module is given the address 4 by setting the DIP
switches as shown below.
1 = NO
No NDIO module 3 used.
2 = REPLACE
NDIO replaces NIOC DI5, DI6.
EXT3_DO1 and EXT3_DO2 are activated.
3 = EXTEND
Activates extended I/O: EXT3_DI1, EXT3_DI2, EXT3_DO1 and
EXT3_DO2.
NDIO-01
NDIO-02
S7:
DI1 HW Filtering Enabled (Default)
DI1 HW Filtering Disabled
ON
ON
1
1
Unit:
5 - 58
type: I
2
3
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
6
7
7
Note: DI1 HW filtering must be enabled, if AC voltage is connected to DI1.
Min: 1
Max: 3
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 5 – Parameters
98
Group name:
OPTION MODULES
Description:
This parameter configures the inputs and outputs of an NAIO analogue I/O extension
module.
The NAIO module is given the address 5 by setting the DIP switches as shown below. The
available input type settings are also illustrated.
1 = NO
No extension AIO board used.
2 = UNIPOLAR AI
An NAIO module replaces NIOC-01 AI1 and AI2, and extends sw
outputs AO3 and AO4.
3 = BIPOLAR AI
An NAIO module replaces NIOC-01 AI1 and AI2, and extends sw
outputs AO3 and AO4.
4 = UNIPOL.
TEMP Motor temperature measurement (PT100 or PTC) using NAIO
module, NIOB-01 board or NBIO-21 unit.
5 = BIPOLAR TEMP
Motor temperature measurement (PT100 or PTC) using NAIO
module, NIOB-01 board or NBIO-21 unit.
06
Index
AI/O EXT MODULE 1
NAIO-03
NAIO-01
Identification number
BIPOLAR AI
ON
ON
(Default)
1
Bit
2
3
4
5
6
7
UNIPOLAR
AI
2
3
4
5
6
AI1
1
7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
AI2
Bit
0(4) - 20 mA
AI2
2
3
2
3
4
ON
0(2) - 10 V
2
3
2
3
4
ON
0-2V
0-2V
1
2
3
1
4
6
7
AI1
AI2
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
0(2) - 10 V
1
4
ON
5
ON
0(2) - 10 V
1
4
0(4) - 20 mA
1
4
ON
3
ON
0(4) - 20 mA
1
2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
ON
0-2V
ON
1
Bit
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
AI1
NAIO-02
Identification number
Identification number
2
3
4
ON
Old NAIO-01 and NAIO-02 modules are compatible types. See switch settings above.
unit:
type: I
Min: 1
07
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
Description:
F01
The selection and supervision of the basic I/O-board is done by means of this parameter.
The address of the NIOC-01 is always 1 and with NBIO-21 or NIOB-01 address is 10 (A16)
set by switch S1 in the NBIO-21 I/O unit.
ADDRESS
1 = NIOC-01
BCD
2 = NBIO-21
NBIO-21/NIOB-01:
S1
Switch S1
3 = NO
4 = NIOB-01
Min: 1
Max: 4
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
789
Index
Max: 5
BASIC I/O BOARD
345
unit:
type:
I
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
5 - 59
Chapter 5 – Parameters
Analogue I/O in v. 6.x of System Application with NIOB-01 / NBIO-21
98.06 = NO
98.07 = NBIO21/NIOB
30.03 = NOT IN USE
NBIO-21
AI1
AI2
NIOB-01
98.06 = UNIPOLAR AI or
BIPOLAR AI
98.07 = NBIO21/NIOB
30.03 = NOT IN USE
30.06 = NOT IN USE
1.19 AI1
1.20 AI2
Software
NIOB-01
NAIO-03
AI1
1.19 AI1
SPEED REF,
if 98.02 = NO
or HAND/AUTO
1.20 AI2
TORQUE REF,
if 98.02 = NO
or HAND/AUTO
1.19 AI1
1.20 AI2
Software
+
NBIO-21
AI1
AI2
NIOB-01
+
1.19 AI1
1.20 AI2
Software
PTC,
PT 100
PTC,
PT 100
+
+
Software
NAIO-03
PTC,
PT 100
98.06 = UNIPOL. TEMP or
BIPOLAR TEMP
30.03 = 1xPT100,
2xPT100,
PTC, PT 100
3xPT100 or
+
1...3 PTC
+
30.06 = 1xPT100,
2xPT100,
3xPT100 or
1...3 PTC
AI2
AO2
mA
Bipolar
AO1
mA
AO2
mA
AO1
mA
AO2
mA
AO3
AO4
Signals
for AOoutputs
AO1
AO2
+
AO2
AO1
SPEED REF,
if 98.02 = NO
or HAND/AUTO
TORQUE REF,
if 98.02 = NO
or HAND/AUTO
AO2
MOTOR 1 Temperature
Measurement and Protection
SPEED REF,
if 98.02 = NO
or HAND/AUTO
1.20 AI2
TORQUE REF,
if 98.02 = NO
or HAND/AUTO
1.19 AI1
1.20 AI2
NIOB-01
NAIO-03
mA
AO2
MOTOR 1 Temperature
Measurement and Protection
1.19 AI1
NBIO-21
AI1
AI2
AO1
AO1
MOTOR 2 Temperature
Measurement and Protection
NIOB-01
AI1
AO1
AO2
MOTOR 1 Temperature
Measurement and Protection
SPEED REF,
if 98.02 = NO
or HAND/AUTO
TORQUE REF,
if 98.02 = NO
or HAND/AUTO
Bipolar
mA
+
+
MOTOR 2 Temperature
Measurement and Protection
NBIO-21
AI1
AI2
AO1
MOTOR 2 Temperature
Measurement and Protection
Ref is also required.
PTC,
PT 100
Signals
for
AOoutputs
Signals
for
AOoutputs
AI1
AI2
98.06 = NO
PTC,
PT 100
NBIO-21
98.07 = NBIO21/NIOB
+
AI1
30.03 = 1xPT100,
AI2
2xPT100,
NIOB-01
3xPT100 or
PT100/PTC to AI2 and
1...3 PTC Connect
Speed Ref to AI1, if I/O Speed
98.06 = NO
98.07 = NBIO21/NIOB
30.03 & 30.06 =
1xPT100,
2xPT100,
3xPT100 or
1...3 PTC
TORQUE REF,
if 98.02 = NO
or HAND/AUTO
NBIO-21 Software
AI2
98.06 = NO
98.07 = NBIO21/NIOB
30.03 & 30.06 =
1xPT100,
2xPT100,
3xPT100 or
1...3 PTC
SPEED REF,
if 98.02 = NO
or HAND/AUTO
Software
SPEED REF,
if 98.02 = NO
or HAND/AUTO
TORQUE REF,
if 98.02 = NO
or HAND/AUTO
Signals
for AOoutputs
Signals
for
AOoutputs
AO2
AO3
AO4
AO1
AO2
+
+
AO1
mA
AO2
mA
AO1
mA
AO2
mA
AI1
MOTOR 1 Temperature
Measurement and Protection
AO1
AI2
MOTOR 2 Temperature
Measurement and Protection
AO2
+
+
NIOB-01_NBIO21_CONF_60.DRW
Figure 5 - 3 Analogue I/O Configuration Examples of NBIO-21or
NIOB Basic I/O Board with Corresponding Parameter
Selections.
5 - 60
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 5 – Parameters
Analogue I/O in the version 6.x of System Application with NIOC-01
98.06 = NO
98.07 = NIOC-01
NIOC-01
AI1
AI2
AI3
30.03 = NOT IN USE
1.19 AI1
1.20 AI2
1.21 AI3
Software
98.06 = UNIPOLAR AI or
BIPOLAR AI
98.07 = NIOC-01
NIOC-01
30.03 = NOT IN USE
NAIO-03
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI1
AI2
98.06 = NO
98.07 = NIOC-01
30.03 = 1xPT100,
2xPT100,
3xPT100 or
1...3 PTC
98.06 = UNIPOLAR AI
or BIPOLAR AI
98.07 = NIOC-01
PTC,
PT 100
+
PTC,
PT 100
+
30.03 = 1xPT100,
2xPT100,
3xPT100 or
1...3 PTC
98.06 = UNIPOLAR TEMP or
BIPOLAR TEMP
98.07 = NIOC-01
30.03 = 1xPT100,
PTC, PT 100
2xPT100,
+
3xPT100 or
+
1...3 PTC
30.06 = 1xPT100,
2xPT100,
3xPT100 or
1...3 PTC
1.19 AI1
SPEED REF,
if 98.02 = NO
or HAND/AUTO
1.20 AI2
TORQUE REF,
if 98.02 = NO
or HAND/AUTO
1.20 AI2
1.21 AI3
AI1
AI2
NAIO-03
SPEED REF,
if 98.02 = NO
or HAND/AUTO
TORQUE REF,
if 98.02 = NO
or HAND/AUTO
mA
AO1
mA
AO2
mA
AO1
mA
AO2
mA
AO3
AO4
Signals
for AOoutputs
Signals
for AOoutputs
AO1
AO2
AO2
mA
+
AO2
1.20 AI2
TORQUE REF,
if 98.02 = NO
or HAND/AUTO
AO4
Signals
for
AOoutputs
+
AO1
AO3
TORQUE REF,
if 98.02 = NO
or HAND/AUTO
AO2
AO2
MOTOR 1 Temperature
Measurement and Protection
SPEED REF,
if 98.02 = NO
or HAND/AUTO
mA
AO1
SPEED REF,
if 98.02 = NO
or HAND/AUTO
1.19 AI1
1.20 AI2
1.21 AI3
AO1
AO2
1.19 AI1
NIOC-01
AI1
AI2
AI3
AO1
MOTOR 1 Temperature
Measurement and Protection
1.21 AI3
NAIO-03
Signals
for
AOoutputs
Signals
for
AOoutputs
1.21 AI3
NIOC-01 Software
AI1
AI2
AI3
TORQUE REF,
if 98.02 = NO
or HAND/AUTO
Software
NIOC-01 Software
AI1
AI2
AI3
SPEED REF,
if 98.02 = NO
or HAND/AUTO
AO1
AO2
AO2
mA
AO1
mA
AO2
mA
AO1
mA
AO2
mA
Software
AI1
MOTOR 1 Temperature
Measurement and Protection
AO1
AI2
MOTOR 2 Temperature
Measurement and Protection
AO2
+
+
NAIO_CON1_60.dsf
Figure 5 - 4 Analogue I/O Configuration Examples of NIOC-01 Basic
I/O Board with Corresponding Parameter Selections.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
5 - 61
Chapter 5 – Parameters
Group 99 Start Up
Data
Note: The drive will not start if the Start-up Data Parameters have
not been changed from the factory settings, or the nominal current of
the motor is too small compared to the nominal current of the
inverter.
WARNING! Running the motor and the driven equipment with
incorrect start-up data can result in improper operation, reduction in
control accuracy and damage to equipment.
If several motors are connected to the ACS 600 drive, some
additional instructions must be considered when setting the Start-up
Data Parameters. Please contact your local ABB representative for
more information.
Note: Changing any of the motor parameters in Group 99,
causes the cancellation of all existing Motor ID Run results!
99
Group name:
START UP-DATA
Description:
Parameters for setting up the motor information.
Description:
If English (Am) is selected, the unit of power used is HP instead of kW.
0 = ENGLISH
1 = ENGLISH AM
2 = DEUTSCH
available since System SW version 5.2
3 = ITALIANO
not available
4 = ESPAÑOL
not available
5 = PORTUGUÊS not available
6 = NEDERLANDS not available
7 = FRANÇAIS
not available
8 = DANSK
not available
9 = SUOMI
not available
10 = SVENSKA
not available
Min: 0
Max: 12
Def: 0
Integer scaling:
01
Index
unit:
LANGUAGE
type: I
02
Index
unit: V
MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE
Description:
type: R
03
Index
unit: A
MOTOR NOM CURRENT
Description:
type: R
04
Index
unit: Hz
type: R
Description:
unit: rpm
type: R
5 - 62
Rated motor current. If several motors are connected to the inverter, enter the total current of
the motors.
Min: 0 A
Max:
Def: 0 A
Integer scaling: 10 == 1A
MOTOR NOM FREQ
Description:
05
Index
Nominal voltage from the motor rating plate. It is not possible to start the ACS 600 without
setting this parameter.
Note: It is not allowed to connect a motor with nominal voltage less than 1/2 * UN or more
than 2 * UN of the ACS 600.
Min: 207 V
Max: 830 V
Def: 0 V
Integer scaling: 1 == 1V
Nominal frequency from the motor rating plate.
Note: If the nominal frequency of the motor is higher than 50 Hz, speed limits in DTC mode
or frequency limits in scalar control mode must be set before an ID Run command. See
Parameter Group 20 DTC mode or Group 29 (SCALAR control mode).
Min: 8 Hz
Max: 300 Hz
Def: 50 Hz
Integer scaling: 100 == 1 Hz
MOTOR NOM SPEED
Nominal speed from the motor rating plate.
Min: 1 rpm
Max: 18000 rpm Def: 1 rpm
Integer scaling:
1 == 1 rpm
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 5 – Parameters
99
Group name:
START UP-DATA
Description:
Nominal power from the motor rating plate. If several motors are connected to the inverter,
enter the total power of the motors. Set also parameter 99.12 MOTOR NOM COS FII.
Min: 0 kW
Max: 9000 kW Def: 0 kW
Integer scaling: 10 == 1 kW
06
Index
unit: kW
MOTOR NOM POWER
type: R
07
Index
MOTOR ID RUN
Description:
This parameter is used to initiate the Motor Identification Run. During the run, the drive will
identify the characteristics of the motor for optimum motor control. The ID Run takes about
one minute.
The ID Run cannot be performed if scalar control is selected (Parameter 99.08 is set to
SCALAR).
Note: The ID Run (Standard or Reduced) should be selected if:
• operation point is near zero speed
• operation at torques above the motor nominal torque within a wide speed range and
without a pulse encoder is required.
Note: Check the rotation direction of the motor by first start before starting the Motor ID Run.
During the run the motor will rotate in the forward direction.
Warning! The motor will run at up to approximately 50%... 80% of nominal speed during the
Motor ID Run. BE SURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING
THE MOTOR ID RUN.
1 = NO
The Motor ID Run is not performed.
If an ID Run has not been done yet, or any of the motor parameters have
been changed, the motor will start the mode FIRST START after the start
command has been given. The DC-magnetising phase lasts much longer
than the normal start because the stator resistance and other electrical
losses are first identified and stored into the FPROM memory.
unit:
type: I
08
Index
unit:
unit:
Performing the Standard Motor ID Run guarantees the best possible
control accuracy. The motor must be decoupled from the driven
equipment before performing the Standard ID Run.
3 = REDUCED
Only to be selected if the motor cannot be decoupled from the driven
equipment. The Reduced Motor ID Run should be selected in applications
where mechanical losses are higher than 20% (i.e. the load cannot be
disconnected) or where flux reduction is not allowed (i.e. there are
auxiliary devices connected in parallel with the motor) while the motor is
running.
Max: 3
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
Min: 1
MOTOR CTRL MODE
Description:
type: B
09
Index
2 = STANDARD
Motor control mode selection.
1 = SCALAR
Scalar control mode.
0 = -DTCDirect Torque Control mode.
If several motors are connected to the inverter, there are certain restrictions on the usage of
DTC. Please contact your local ABB representative for more information.
Min:
Max:
Def: DTC
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
APPLIC RESTORE
Description:
type: B
Restores either USER MACRO 1, USER MACRO 2 or FACTORY parameter values
depending on the selection in Parameter 99.11 APPLICATION MACRO except parameter
group 99.
1 = YES
Values are restored.
0 = NO
Min: 0
Max: 1
Def: 0
Integer scaling: 1 == 1
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
5 - 63
Chapter 5 – Parameters
99
Group name:
START UP-DATA
Description:
This parameter can be used by the overriding system to check the correct connections of the
optical cables to the drive type. This parameter requires support from the overriding system.
Min: 0
Max: 32767
Def: 0
Integer scaling:
10
Index
unit:
DRIVE ID NUMBER
type: I
11
Index
APPLICATION MACRO
Description:
This parameter selects the application macro to be used. In addition to the default settings
(FACTORY), two user-definable parameter sets (USER) are available.
In addition to the FACTORY setting there is a selection for saving the current settings as a
User Macro (USER 1 SAVE or USER 2 SAVE), and recalling these settings (USER 1 LOAD
or USER 2 LOAD).
If User Macro 1 or 2 is in use, the parameter values are restored to the last saved values. In
addition, the last saved results of the motor identification are restored. Exception: Settings of
Parameters 16.05 and 99.11 remain unchanged.
Note: The Back-Up function in DriveWindow only saves the active User Macro if called: thus
both User Macros must be backed up separately.
The macro can be changed from the overriding system using AUX CTRL WORD 2 7.03 bit
12. See also Parameter 16.05 USER MACRO CHG. The status of the active macro can be
seen at 8.02 AUX STATUS WORD bits 14 and 15.
1 = FACTORY
unit:
type: I
12
Index
unit:
MOTOR NOM COS FII (available with sw version 5.1x)
Description:
type: R
Cos ϕ from the motor rating plate.
Min: 0
Max: 1
Description:
The first start/ ID run can be performed by using either power or Cos ϕ of the motor. Cos ϕ is
recommended. Use power selection if Cos ϕ is unknown.
0 = COSFII
1 = POWER
Min: 0
Max: 1
Def: 0 COSFII
Integer scaling:
1 == 1
13
Index
unit:
5 - 64
Factory parameters (default values) are recalled and stored to the
FPROM memory.
2 = USER 1 LOAD
Parameter set 1 (User Macro 1) is loaded to the RAM memory.
3 = USER 1 SAVE
Parameter set 1 (User Macro 1) is saved to the FPROM memory.
4 = USER 2 LOAD
Parameter set 2 (User Macro 2) is loaded to the RAM memory.
5 = USER 2 SAVE
Parameter set 2 (User Macro 2) is saved to the FPROM memory.
Min: 1
Max: 5
Def: 1
Integer scaling:
Def: 0.7
Integer scaling:
100 == Cos ϕ 1
POWER IS GIVEN (available with sw version 5.1x)
type: B
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 6 - Overview of the CDP 312 Control Panel
Overview
This chapter describes the programming principles of the ACS 600
using the CDP 312 Control Panel.
The user can change the configuration of the ACS 600 to meet the
needs of the requirements by programming. The ACS 600 is
programmable through a set of parameters. This chapter describes
the operation of the CDP312 Control Panel and how to use the panel
with the ACS 600 to modify the parameters, to measure the actual
values and to control the drive(s).
Panel Link
The CDP312 Control Panel is connected to the drive through a
Modbus-protocol communication bus. Modbus is the common bus
protocol for ABB Drives products. The communication speed is 9600
bit/s. 31 drives and one panel can be connected on this bus. Each
station must have a unique ID number.
1 L "
LED PANE
MOTOR SP
MOTOR TO
ACT
PAR
0.0 rpm 0
0 %
0.0 rpm
0.00 %
FUNC
DRIVE
ENTER
LOC
RESET
REF
REM
0
CDP 312
Figure 6 - 1 CDP 312 Control Panel
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
6-1
Chapter 6 – Overview of the CDP 312 Control Panel
Display
The LCD type display has 4 lines of 20 characters.
The language selection is made at Start-up by Parameter 99.01
LANGUAGE. Depending on the customers selection, a set of four
languages is loaded into the memory of the ACS 600 at the factory.
Keys
The Control Panel keys are flat, labelled, push-button keys that allow
you to monitor drive functions, select drive parameters, and change
settings.
Actual Signal Display Mode
Status Row
1 L "
LED PANE
MOTOR SP
MOTOR TO
Actual Signals
Names and
Values
0.0 rpm 0
0 %
0.0 rpm
0.00 %
Display/group selection
ACT
Row/parameter selection
ENTER
Status Row
Group number
and name
Index number
and name
Parameter value
1 L "
0.0 rpm
99 START-UP DATA
01 LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
Status Row
1 L "
UPLOAD
DOWNLOAD
CONTRAST
Selectable
functions
Device type
Drive name
Application sw
name + version. *)
ID-number of drive
in the Modbus link
0
Parameter Mode
Group selection
Fast value change
PAR
Parameter selection
Slow value change
ENTER
0.0 rpm 0
<= <=
=> =>
4
ACN 634
0005_3
DRYER SECTION 1
AMAM15D3 980605
ID-NUMBER 1
Enter selection mode
Accept new parameter
Enter selection mode
Accept new value
Function Mode
FUNC
Row selection
ENTER
Drive Selection Mode
DRIVE
ENTER
Function start
Drive/ID selection
Enter change mode
Accept new value
*) Name of the downloaded FCB (Function Chart Builder) application.
Figure 6 - 2 Control Panel Display Indications and Functions of the
Control Panel Keys
LOC
REM
RESET
REF
Keypad /
External Control
Fault Reset
0
Forward
Start
Reverse
Stop
Reference Setting
Function
Figure 6 - 3 Operational Commands of the Control Panel Keys
6-2
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 6 – Overview of the CDP 312 Control Panel
Panel Operation
Keypad Modes
Identification
Display
The following is a description of the operation of the CDP 312 Control
Panel.
The CDP 312 Control Panel has four different keypad modes: Actual
Signal Display Mode, Parameter Mode, Function Mode, and Drive
Selection Mode. In addition, there is a special Identification Display,
which is displayed after connecting the panel to the link. The
Identification Display and the keypad modes are described briefly
below.
When the panel is connected for the first time, or the power is
applied to the drive, the Identification Display appears, showing the
panel type and the number of drives connected to the Panel Link.
Note: The panel can be connected to the drive while power is
applied to the drive.
ACN 634
0005_3
ID NUMBER 1
After two seconds, the display will clear, and the Actual Signals of the
drive will appear.
Actual
Signal
Display
Mode
This mode includes two displays, the Actual Signal Display and the
Fault History Display. The Actual Signal Display is displayed first
when the Actual Signal Display mode is entered. If the drive is in a
fault condition, the Fault Display will be shown first.
The panel will automatically return to Actual Signal Display Mode
from other modes if no keys are pressed within one minute
(exceptions: Status Display in Drive Selection Mode and Fault
Display Mode).
In the Actual Signal Display Mode you can monitor three Actual
Signals at a time.
The Fault History includes information on the 16 most recent faults
that have occurred in your ACS 600. The name of the fault and the
total power-on time are displayed. If the APC2 overriding system has
been connected to the drive (DDCS channel 0), this time can be
seen in the date format instead of power-on time.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
6-3
Chapter 6 – Overview of the CDP 312 Control Panel
The following table shows the events that are stored in the Fault
History. For each event it is described what information is included.
Event
Information
Display
A fault is detected by ACS 600
Sequential number of the event.
Name of the fault and a “+” sign in
front of the name. Total power on
time or date and time updated by
overriding system.
1 L "
0.0 rpm 0
2 LAST FAULT
+OVERCURRENT
12 H 49 MIN 10 S
A fault is reset by user.
Sequential number of the event.
-RESET FAULT text.
Total power on time or date and
time updated by the overriding
system.
1 L "
0.0 rpm 0
1 LAST FAULT
-RESET FAULT
12 H 50 MIN 10 S
A warning is activated by ACS 600
Sequential number of the event.
Name of the warning and a “+”
sign in front of the name. Total
power on time or date and time
updated by the overriding system.
1 L "
0.0 rpm 0
1 LAST WARNING
+EMESTOP
12 H 50 MIN 10 S
A warning is deactivated by
ACS 600
Sequential number of the event.
Name of the warning and a “-” sign
in front of the name. Total power
on time or date and time updated
by the overriding system.
1 L "
0.0 rpm 0
1 LAST WARNING
-EMESTOP
12 H 50 MIN 35 S
When a fault or warning occurs in the drive, the message will be
displayed immediately, except in the Drive Selection Mode. From the
fault display, it is possible to change to other displays without
resetting the fault. If no keys are pressed the fault or warning text is
displayed as long as the fault exists.
6-4
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 6 – Overview of the CDP 312 Control Panel
Table 6 - 1 How to Display the Full Name of the three Actual Signals
Step
1.
Function
To display the full
name of the three
actual signals
To return to the Actual
Signal Display Mode.
2.
Press key
Hold
ACT
Release
ACT
Display after key is pressed
1 L "
0.0 rpm
LED
PANEL
OUTP
MOTOR SPEED FILT
MOTOR TORQUE FILT
1 L "
LED
PANE
MOTOR SP
MOTOR TO
0
0.0 rpm 0
0 %
0.0 rpm
0.00 %
Table 6 - 2 How to Select Actual Signals to the Display
Step
1.
Function
To enter the Actual
Signal Display Mode
Press key
ACT
Display after key is pressed
1 L "
LED
PANE
MOTOR SP
MOTOR TO
0.0 rpm 0
0 %
0.0 rpm
0.00 %
0.0 rpm 0
0 %
0.0 rpm
0.00 %
2.
To select the desired
row.
1 L "
LED PANE
MOTOR
SP
MOTOR
TO
3.
To enter the Actual
Signal Selection
Mode.
1 L "
0.0 rpm 0
1 ACTUAL SIGNALS
01 MOTOR SPEED FILT
0.0 rpm
ENTER
4.
To select a different
group.
1 L "
0.0 rpm
2 ACTUAL SIGNALS
01 SPEED REF 2
0 rpm
0
5.
To select a index.
1 L "
0.0 rpm
2 ACTUAL SIGNALS
02 SPEED REF 3
0 rpm
0
6.
To accept the
selection and to return
to the Actual Signal
Display Mode.
1 L "
LED PANE
SPEED
RE
MOTOR
TO
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
ENTER
0.0 rpm 0
0 %
0.0 rpm
0.00 %
6-5
Chapter 6 – Overview of the CDP 312 Control Panel
Table 6 - 3 How to Display a Fault and Reset the Fault History
Step
1.
2.
Function
Press key
To enter the Actual
Signal Display Mode
ACT
To clear all the faults
from the Fault History
Buffer.
0.0 rpm 0
0 %
0.0 rpm
0.00 %
s = fault or alarm logged into the
fault logger
r = fault or alarm reset
RESET
A view of cleared fault
logger.
4.
1 L "
LED
PANE
MOTOR
SP
MOTOR TO
1 L "
0.0 rpm 0
1 LAST FAULT
+PANEL LOST
20 H 49 MIN 56 S
1 L "
0.0 rpm 0
1 LAST FAULT
+PANEL LOST
980621 10:26:19.3043
To enter the Fault
History Display.
The time of
occurrence can be
seen either as total
power-on time or in
the date format if an
overriding system (eg.
APC2) has been
connected to control
the drive.
3.
Display after key is pressed
1 L "
0.0 rpm 0
2 LAST FAULT
+OVERCURRENT
12 H 49 MIN 10 S
1 L "
0.0 rpm 0
2 LAST FAULT
H
1 L "
LED
PANE
MOTOR
SP
MOTOR TO
To return to the Actual
Signal Display Mode.
MIN
S
0.0 rpm 0
0 %
0.0 rpm
0.00 %
Table 6 - 4 How to Display and Reset an Active Fault
Step
1.
2.
6-6
Function
Press key
To enter the Actual
Signal Display Mode.
To reset the fault. The
Reset button functions
also in the REMOTE
mode.
ACT
RESET
Display after key is pressed
0.0 rpm 0
1 L "
ACS 600
75 kW
*** FAULT ***
PANEL LOST
1 L "
LED
PANE
MOTOR SP
MOTOR TO
0.0 rpm 0
0 %
0.0 rpm
0.00 %
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 6 – Overview of the CDP 312 Control Panel
Parameter
Mode
The Parameter Mode is used for making changes to the ACS 600
parameters. When this mode is entered for the first time after power
up, the display will show the first parameter of the first group. The
next time, the Parameter Mode is entered, the previously selected
parameter is shown.
Note: If you try to write to a write-protected parameter, the following
warning will be displayed.
**WARNING**
WRITE ACCESS DENIED
PARAMETER SETTING
NOT POSSIBLE
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
6-7
Chapter 6 – Overview of the CDP 312 Control Panel
Table 6 - 5 How to Select a Parameter and Change the Value
Step
1.
2.
Function
Press key
To enter the
Parameter Mode.
PAR
4.
5.
1 L "
0.0 rpm 0
14 DIGITAL OUTPUTS
01 DO1 CONTROL
OFF
1 L "
0.0 rpm 0
14 DIGITAL OUTPUTS
01 DO1 GROUP+INDEX
To select an index
number.
While holding the
arrow down, only the
parameter name and
number are displayed.
When the key is
released the value of
the parameter is also
displayed.
To enter the
parameter value.
1 L "
0.0 rpm 0
13 ANALOGUE INPUTS
01 AI1 HIGH VALUE
10000
1 L "
0.0 rpm 0
14 DIGITAL OUTPUTS
To select another
parameter group.
While holding the
arrow down, only the
group name and
number are displayed.
When the key is
released, name,
number and value of
the first parameter in
the group are
displayed.
3.
Display after key is pressed
1 L "
0.0 rpm 0
14 DIGITAL OUTPUTS
02 DO1 GROUP+INDEX
801
ENTER
1 L "
0.0 rpm 0
14 DIGITAL OUTPUTS
02 DO1 GROUP+INDEX
[801]
1 L "
0.0 rpm 0
14 DIGITAL OUTPUTS
02 DO1 GROUP+INDEX
[901]
To change the
parameter value.
(slow change)
(fast change)
6a.
To send a new value
to the drive.
ENTER
6b.
To cancel the new
setting and keep the
original value.
ACT
PAR
FUNC DRIVE
1 L "
0.0 rpm 0
14 DIGITAL OUTPUTS
02 DO1 GROUP+INDEX
901
1 L "
0.0 rpm 0
14 DIGITAL OUTPUTS
02 DO1 GROUP+INDEX
801
The selected Keypad
Mode is entered.
6-8
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 6 – Overview of the CDP 312 Control Panel
Function
Mode
The Function Mode is used to select special functions. These
functions include Parameter Upload, Parameter Download and
setting the contrast of the CDP 312 Panel Display.
Parameter Upload will copy existing parameters from Groups 10 to
98 from the drive to the panel. The upload function can be performed
while the drive is running. Only the STOP command can be given
during the uploading process.
Parameter Download will copy existing parameter Groups 10 to 97
stored in the panel to the drive.
Note: Parameters in Groups 98 and 99 concerning options, language
and motor data are not copied.
If downloading is attempted before uploading, the following warning
will be displayed:
**WARNING**
NOT UPLOADED
DOWNLOADING
NOT POSSIBLE
The parameters can be uploaded and downloaded only if the DTC
software version and application software version (see Signals 4.02
DTC SW VERSION and 4.03 APPL SW VERSION) of the destination
drive are the same as the software versions of the source drive.
Otherwise the following warning will be displayed:
**WARNING**
DRIVE INCOMPATIBLE
DOWNLOADING
NOT POSSIBLE
The drive must be stopped during the downloading process. If the
drive is running and downloading is selected, the following warning is
displayed:
**WARNING**
DRIVE IS RUNNING
DOWNLOADING
NOT POSSIBLE
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
6-9
Chapter 6 – Overview of the CDP 312 Control Panel
Table 6 - 6 How to Select and Perform a Function
Step
1.
Function
Press key
To enter the Function
Mode
2.
To select a function.
3.
To activate the
selected function.
FUNC
1 L "
UPLOAD
DOWNLOAD
CONTRAST
0.0 rpm 0
<= <=
=> =>
0
1 L "
UPLOAD
DOWNLOAD
CONTRAST
0.0 rpm 0
<= <=
=> =>
0
1 L "
ENTER
4.
Display after key is pressed
0.0 rpm 0
=> => => => => => =>
DOWNLOAD
0.0 rpm 0
0 %
0.0 rpm
0.00 %
1 L "
LED
PANE
MOTOR SP
MOTOR TO
Loading completed.
Table 6 - 7 How to Set the Contrast of the Panel Display.
Step
1.
Function
Press key
To enter the Function
Mode.
FUNC
Display after key is pressed
1 L "
UPLOAD
DOWNLOAD
CONTRAST
0.0 rpm 0
<= <=
=> =>
0
2.
To select a function.
1 L "
UPLOAD
DOWNLOAD
CONTRAST
0.0 rpm 0
<= <=
=> =>
0
3.
To enter the contrast
setting function.
1 L "
CONTRAST
0.0 rpm 0
[0]
1 L "
CONTRAST
0.0 rpm 0
[7]
1 L "
UPLOAD
DOWNLOAD
CONTRAST
1 L "
UPLOAD
DOWNLOAD
CONTRAST
0.0 rpm 0
<= <=
=> =>
7
0.0 rpm 0
<= <=
=> =>
0
ENTER
4.
To set the contrast.
(0...7)
5a.
To accept the
selected value.
To cancel the new
setting and keep the
original value, press
any of the Mode keys.
ENTER
ACT
PAR
FUNC DRIVE
The selected Keypad
Mode is entered.
6 - 10
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 6 – Overview of the CDP 312 Control Panel
Copying
Parameters
from One
Unit to
Other Units
You can copy parameters in Groups 10...97 from one drive to
another by using the Parameter Upload and Parameter Download
functions in the Function Mode. Typically this kind of function can be
used if the processes and the motor types are same. This procedure
is permitted only if the DTC SW and APPL SW versions are the
same on both units. Follow the procedure below:
1. Select the correct options (Group 98) and language (Group 99)
for each drive.
2. Set the rating plate values for the motors (Group 99) and perform
the identification run for each motor if required.
3. Set the parameters in Groups 10 to 97 as preferred in one ACS
600 drive.
4. Upload the parameters from the ACS 600 to the panel (see Table
6-6).
5. Disconnect the panel and reconnect it to the next ACS 600 unit.
6. Download the parameters from the panel to the ACS 600 unit.
(see Table 6-6).
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for the rest of the units.
Note: Parameters in Groups 98 and 99 concerning options, language
and motor data are not copied.
Setting the
Contrast
Drive
Selection
Mode
If the Control Panel Display is not clear enough, set the contrast
according to the procedure explained in Table 6-7.
In normal use, the features available in the Drive Selection Mode are
not needed; these features are reserved for applications where
several drives are connected to one Modbus Link.
Modbus Link is the communication link connecting the Control Panel
and the ACS 600. Each on-line station must have an individual
identification number (ID).
Caution: The default ID number setting of the ACS 600 must not be
changed unless it is to be connected to the Modbus Link with other
drives on-line.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
6 - 11
Chapter 6 – Overview of the CDP 312 Control Panel
Table 6 - 8 How to Select a Drive
Step
1.
2.
Function
Press key
To enter the Drive
Selection Mode.
DRIVE
Display after key is pressed
ACN 634
0005_3
DRIVE NAME
AMAM1050 980612
ID NUMBER 1
ACN 634
0005_3
DRIVE NAME
AMAM1050 980612
ID NUMBER 1
ACN 634
0005_3
DRIVE NAME
AMAM1050 980612
ID NUMBER 2
1á 2Ñ 3Ü 4Ö 5Ö
6á 7F 8Ö 9Ö 10Ö
To select the drive.
The drive connected to
the panel is selected with
the arrow
buttons.
Selected ID number is
shown on the bottom row
in the display.
The Status Display of all
devices connected to the
Panel Link is shown after
the last individual station.
If all stations do not fit on
the display at once, press
to view the rest of
them.
3.
To connect to the last
displayed drive and to
enter another mode,
press one of the Mode
keys.
ACT
PAR
FUNC
1 L "
LED
PANE
MOTOR SP
MOTOR TO
0.0 rpm 0
0 %
0.0 rpm
0.00 %
The selected Keypad
Mode is entered.
6 - 12
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 6 – Overview of the CDP 312 Control Panel
Table 6 - 9 How to Change ID Number of the Drive
Step
1.
2.
Function
To enter the Drive
Selection Mode
Press key
DRIVE
Display after key is pressed
ACN 634
0005_3
DRIVE NAME
AMAM1050 980612
ID NUMBER 1
ACN 634
0005_3
DRIVE NAME
AMAM1050 980612
ID NUMBER 1
1á 2Ñ 3Ü 4Ö 5Ö
6á 7F 8Ö 9Ö 10Ö
To select the next view.
The ID number of the
station is changed by first
pressing ENTER (the
brackets round the ID
number appear) and then
adjusting the value with
the arrow
buttons.
The new value is
accepted with ENTER.
The power of the ACS
600 must be switched off
to validate its new ID
number setting (the new
value is not displayed
until the power is
switched off and on).
á
= Drive stopped, direction forward
Ñ
= Drive running, direction reverse
F
= Drive has tripped on a fault
The Status Display of all
devices connected to the
Panel Link is shown after
the last individual station.
If all stations do not fit on
the display at once, press
to view the rest of
them.
3.
To connect to the last
displayed drive and to
enter another mode,
press one of the Mode
keys.
ACT
PAR
FUNC
1 L "
LED
PANE
MOTOR
SP
MOTOR TO
0.0 rpm 0
0 %
0.0 rpm
0.00 %
The selected Keypad
Mode is entered.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
6 - 13
Chapter 6 – Overview of the CDP 312 Control Panel
Operational
Commands
Operational commands control the operation of the ACS 600. They
include starting and stopping the drive, changing the direction of
rotation and adjusting the reference. The reference value is used for
controlling motor speed (Local Reference 1), motor torque (Local
Reference 2) or frequency in scalar control (Local Reference 3).
Operational commands can be given from the CDP 312 Control
Panel always when the status row is displayed and the control
location is the panel. This is indicated by L (Local Control) on the
display. See the following figure.
1 L "
0.0 rpm 0
Remote Control (control from the overriding system or I/O is
indicated by an empty field).
1
0.0 rpm 0
"
Operational commands cannot be given from this panel when in
Remote Control. Only monitoring actual signals, setting parameters,
uploading and changing ID numbers is possible.
The control is changed between Local and External control locations
by pressing the LOC / REM key. Only one of the Local Control
devices (CDP 312 or DriveWindow) can be used as the local control
location at a time.
Direction of actual rotation is indicated by an arrow.
1
"
0.0 rpm 0
1
#
Forward
Start, Stop,
Direction
and
Reference
Reverse
Start, Stop and Direction commands are given from the panel by
pressing the keys
Forward
6 - 14
0.0 rpm 0
0
Reverse
Start
Stop
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 6 – Overview of the CDP 312 Control Panel
Table 6 - 10 How to Set the Reference
Step
1.
2.
3.
Function
To display enter a
Keypad Mode
displaying the status
row.
To enter the
Reference Setting
Mode
Press key
Display after key is pressed
ACT
1 L "
LED
PANE
MOTOR
SP
MOTOR TO
0.0 rpm 0
0 %
0.0 rpm
0.00 %
1 L "[
LED PANE
MOTOR SP
MOTOR TO
0.0 rpm]0
0 %
0.0 rpm
0.00 %
PAR
FUNC
REF
1 L "[ 1030.0 rpm]0
LED PANE
0 %
MOTOR SP
0.0 rpm
MOTOR TO
0.00 %
To change the
reference.
(slow change)
(fast change)
4.
To escape the
Reference Setting
Mode.
The selected Keypad
Mode is entered.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
ACT
PAR
FUNC DRIVE
1 L "
LED
PANE
MOTOR
SP
MOTOR TO
0.0 rpm 0
0 %
0.0 rpm
0.00 %
6 - 15
Chapter 6 – Overview of the CDP 312 Control Panel
6 - 16
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing
Overview
This chapter describes the protections and fault tracing of ACS 600
drive.
Protections
I/O- Monitoring
Communication
Monitoring
If the Application and Motor Control Board (NAMC) cannot
communicate with the I/O Control Board (NIOC), or with an I/O
Extension Module connected to the I/O Extension Link, the following
alarms are given:
DIO ALARM
AIO ALARM
EXT DIO ALM
bit 7 in ALARM WORD_1 (9.04)
bit 8 in ALARM WORD_1 (9.04)
bit 9 in ALARM WORD_1 (9.04)
EXT AIO ALM
bit 10 in ALARM WORD_1 (9.04)
Messages received from the overriding system are monitored in the
NAMC diagnostics program. The monitoring function is activated by
parameter 70.4 CH0 TIME OUT. This parameter defines the delay
before the communication fault is indicated. By entering a value of
zero, this function is disabled. The action in case of communication
fault is defined in the parameter CH0 COM LOSS CTRL (70.05). On
a communication fault, bit 12 (fault “CH0 COM LOS”) in FAULT
WORD 2 (9.02), is set to 1.
Note: If updating interval to the data set 10 is slower than 2 s, an
alarm and fault is activated.
Inverter
Overtemperature
Fault
The ACS 600 drive supervises the inverter power plate module
temperature. If it exceeds 115 °C, a warning “ACS 600 TEMP” is
given and AW_1 (9.04) bit 4 is set to 1.
If the power plate module temperature exceeds 125°C, a fault “ACS
600 TEMP” is given and FW_1 (09.01) bit 3 is set to 1.
Ambient
Temperature
The ACS 600 measures the ambient temperature on the surface of
the NIOC board. The drive will not start if the temperature is below 5°C or above 73 to 82°C (depending on converter type). Also a fault
“CABIN TEMP F” is given and FW_2 (9.02) bit 7 is set to1.
Overcurrent
The Overcurrent trip limit is 3.5 * Ihd (nominal motor current for heavy
duty use). There are several sources of the overcurrent trip:
•
Software trip (time level 100 µs, level = 97 % of measurement
scale)
•
Hardware level trip (97 % of measurement scale for 35 µs)
•
Hardware derivative trip (12.5 % of measurement scale for 75 µs)
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
7-1
Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing
•
Hardware level trip in parallel connected units by PBU logic (94 %
of measurement scale for 75 µs)
A fault “OVERCURRENT” is given and FW_1 (09.01) bit 1 is set to 1.
The current measurement is calibrated automatically during the start
procedure.
DC Overvoltage
The DC Overvoltage trip limit is 1.3 * 1.35 * U1max, where U1max is the
maximum value of the mains voltage range.
Nominal Voltage
of Inverter Unit
U1max(AC)
UDC Overvoltage Trip Limit
400 V
415 V
730 V
500 V
500 V
880 V
690 V
690 V
1210 V
A fault “DC OVERVOLT” is given and FW_1 (09.01) bit 2 is set to 1.
HIGH VOLTAGE TRIP LIMIT: 130%
HIGH VOLTAGE CONTROL LIMIT: 124%
BRAKE CHOPPER LIMIT: 120%
LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL LIMIT: 82%
CHARGING LIMIT: 79%
LOW VOLTAGE TRIPPING LIMIT: 60%
Figure 7 - 1 DC Voltage Control and Tripping Limits
DC Undervoltage
The DC Undervoltage trip limit is 0.60 * 1.35 * U1min, where U1min is the
minimum value of the mains voltage range.
Nominal Voltage
of Inverter Unit
U1min
(AC)
UDC Undervoltage Trip Limit
400 V
380 V
307 V
500 V
380 V
307 V
690 V
525 V
425 V
A fault “DC UNDERVOLT” is given and FW_2 (09.02) bit 2 is
set to 1.
7-2
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing
Local Control Lost
Function
The Local Control Lost function defines the operation of the ACS 600
drive when, while in local control mode, the communication between
the local control device (control panel or DriveWindow) and the ACS
600 stops.
RUN ENABLE Digital input DI2 state ”0” activates the RUN ENABLE function, used
Interlocking for external RUN interlocking and for internal charging logic, when the
Function optional load switch is used at the input DC circuit of the inverter unit.
When the state of DI2 switches to 0, the drive stops by coasting, a
fault “RUN DISABLD” is given and FW_2 (9.02) bit 4 and ASW
(08.02) bit 4 are set to 1.
START
INHIBITION
Interlocking
Function
START INHIBIT DI function is used to control and monitor the
prevention of unexpected start-up function. Inverter IGBT pulses are
first blocked directly by this digital input, when the safety relay -A40
or -K14 contact opens in the prevention of Unexpected start-up
circuit. Selected digital input effects as an AND interlocking for the bit
3 (RUN) of Main Control Word. Status of both signals “START
INHIBIT DI” digital input and “START INHIBIT” ASW (8.02) bit 8 from
the PPCC link must follow each other within 3 seconds. If contact of
“START INHIBIT DI” opens but still the status of “START INHIBIT”
indicates different status, a fault “START INH HW” is given and bit
9.06 FW_3 (9.06) bit 1 is set. This diagnostics indicates incorrect HW
and faulty NGPS board power supply. If there is no Prevention of
Unexpected start-up circuit in use, selection NO must be selected.
Short Circuit
There are separate protection circuits for supervising the motor cable
and the inverter short circuits. If a short circuit occurs, the drive will
not start and a fault “SHORT CIRC” is given and FW_1 (09.01) bit 0
is set to “1”.
Intermediate DC
Link Current
Ripple Fault
Input phase loss protection circuits supervise the status of the mains
in the supply section by detecting the intermediate current ripple. If
an input phase is lost, the intermediate circuit current ripple
increases. If the ripple exceeds 13% the drive is stopped and a fault
“SUPPLY PHASE” is given. FW_2 (09.02) bit 0 is set to 1.
Overspeed Fault
If the ACS 600 drive output frequency exceeds the preset level (eg.
in the case of overshooting in speed control), the drive is stopped and
a fault “OVER FREQ” is given. FW_1 (09.01) bit 9 is set to 1.
The trip level frequency margin is adjustable by Parameter FREQ
TRIP MARGIN (20.11).
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
7-3
Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing
This section describes how to track the cause of earth fault in ACS
600 MultiDrive R2i-R12i, 2xR11i/R12i and 4xR11i/R12i modules.
Earth/Fault Logics
Earth fault notification of inverter module does not always indicate
actual earth fault. Failure can sometimes be in IGBTs or NGDRs.
Earth fault
notification
R2-R7:
R8-4xR12:
Are mains
grounded?
Check that currents UI and
IW ≈ 0A when UDC is on
no
yes
Change:
1. NINT-XX
2. Current transducers
3. Cabling (40 pin / 3 pin)
4. NXPP-XX
yes
Measure:
Earth leakage on
motor or cabling?
no
Change:
1. NINT-XX
2. Earth fault current
transducer
no
Set Earth fault
limit = 4
yes
Change:
Damaged motor,
switchgear or
cabling
Fault fixed?
Check the LEDs of the hottest INU (See
Chart 1). Which is the hottest Phase /
Power Plate?
Change:
1. NGDR of the hottest Power Plate
no
yes
Are the inverters
connected parallel?
Fault fixed?
no
no
Fault fixed?
yes
yes
Are the Power Plate
temperatures within
no
yes
NGDR-XX
damaged.
Breakthrough
fault
no
5 ºC?
Change:
1. NGDR-XX of the
adjacent Power Plate(s)
yes
Fault fixed?
Is the fibre
between NINT and
NPBU damaged?
yes
Change:
1. Fibre between
NINT and NPBU
no
Contact ABB
Helsinki.
Set limit = 5
Fault fixed?
no
yes
no
NGDR-XX
damaged. No
control
Contact ABB
Helsinki.
Set limit = 6
yes
Fault fixed?
no
Change:
Cabling to less
capasitive one
yes
OK
Figure 7 - 2 This Flowchart can be used to Trace the Cause of Earth
Fault and to Find Faulty Parts.
7-4
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing
Indicator LEDs in
the NINT Board
Following figure describes how to find the hottest phase or power
plate by checking the LEDs of NINT-XX and NXPP-0X boards. This
applies only to parallel connected phase modules and power plates
of R8i – R12i modules.
NINT -67
R 8i...R 9i
P HAS E
and
U
V
W
P OWE R
P L AT E
R 10i...R 11i
NINT -68
NXPP -02
NXP P-02
V-P HAS E
TU
U-P HAS E
TV
TW
W-P HAS E
P HAS E
T1
T2
P OWE R
P L AT E
T1
T2
T1
T2
P OWE R
P L AT E
P OWE R
P L AT E
R 12i
NINT -70
NXPP-03
NXPP-03
V-P HAS E
U
U-P HAS E
V
W
W-P HAS E
P HAS E
1
P OWE R
P L AT E
2
3
1
P OWE R
P L AT E
2
3
P OWE R
P LAT E
1
2
3
Figure 7 - 3 LED Indicators of NINT Boards.
Interpretation of
the LEDs
All LEDs are unlit on NINT-XX or NXPP-0X board:
• No DC-voltage connected.
•
Possibly burned fuse on the NPOW-62 board.
•
Connection between NRED-61 and NPOW-62 is faulty.
•
Connection between NPOW-62 (X32) and NINT-XX (X42) is
faulty.
Only one LED is lit on NINT-XX or NXPP-0X board: That phase or
power plate is hotter than the other ones.
One LED is brighter than other ones on NINT-XX or NXPP-0X
board: That phase or power plate is hotter than the other ones.
All LEDs are lit on NINT-XX or NXPP-0X board: That phase or
power plate is hotter than the other ones.
R8i – R9i modules: The three LEDs of NINT-XX tell the hottest
phase and also the hottest power plate, because on each phase
there is only one power plate.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
7-5
Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing
R10i – R11i modules: The upper three LEDs of NINT-XX board
show, which phase is the hottest. The lower two LEDs of NINT-XX
indicate the hottest power plate on V-phase and the two LEDs of
NXPP-0X indicate the hottest power plate on U-phase (left NXPP-0X)
and W-phase (right NXPP-0X). Two power plates are connected
parallel in each phase module.
R12i module: The upper three LEDs of NINT-XX board show, which
phase is the hottest. The lower three LEDs of NINT-XX tell the
hottest power plate on V-phase and the three LEDs of NXPP-0X tell
the hottest power plate on U-phase (left NXPP-0X) and W-phase
(right NXPP-0X). Three parallel connected power plates are placed in
each phase module.
The causes of overheated power plate are usually faulty NGDR-XX
boards, damaged power plates or badly installed power plates
(greasing or quality of the surface).
The colors of the three LEDs and the matching phases or power
plates are:
U-phase / power plate 1
V-phase / power plate 2
W-phase / power plate 3
Green (left)
Yellow (middle)
Red (right)
For two power plates per phase (R10i – R11i):
Power plate T1
Yellow (left)
Power plate T2
Green (right)
Speed
Measurement
Fault
Speed Measurement Fault is activated, if
•
no pulses are received within the time of Parameter (50.11)
ENCODER DELAY and the drive is simultaneously at the current
or torque limit.
•
measured and estimated speed differ 20 % from nominal speed
of motor.
•
there is no communication between the pulse encoder module
and NAMC board.
•
there is observed big change in the pulse frequency of the pulse
encoder during 1 ms.
The Fault/Alarm function is activated by Parameter (50.05)
ENCODER ALM/FLT. In case of a fault, FW_2 (09.02) bit 5 is set to
1 and a fault “ENCODER FLT” is given.
7-6
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing
Switching
from
Measured
Speed to
Estimated
Speed
In case of an alarm, AW_1 (9.04) bit 5 is set to 1 and an alarm
“ENCODER ERR” is given. If an alarm function has been selected
and the speed measurement error is detected based on derivation
term the drive automatically turns to use estimated speed. Drive uses
estimated speed as long as the difference between estimated and
measured speed is bigger than 1%. The difference is checked every
five seconds. When the difference is smaller than 1% drive turns
back to use measured speed. The status of the used actual speed
can be seen from the ASW (802) bit 12.
Overswitching
Frequency Fault
If the inner control loop exceeds the maximum switching frequency, a
fault “OVER SWFREQ” is given and FW_2 (9.02) bit 9 is set to 1.
System Fault
Short Time
Overloading
If the program on the NAMC board has failed and causes an
interruption, FW_1 (09.01) bit 7 (SYSTEM_FAULT) is set to 1.
The inverter section of the ACS 600 MultiDrive incorporates an IGBTtransistor power stage. Duty Cycles A and B are presented for each
inverter type in the ACS 600 MultiDrive catalogue (code 3BFE
63981915). See also the environmental limits.
IAC_NOMINAL
= nominal current (continuous)
IAC_4/5 min
= I2 base current for Duty Cycle A
IAC_1/5 min
= I2 max current for Duty Cycle A (150% of the base
current IAC_4/5 min)
IAC_50/60 s
= I2 base current for Duty Cycle B
IAC_10/60 s
= I2 max current for Duty Cycle B (200% of the base
current IAC_50/60 s)
If the overload cycle is longer than described for Duty Cycle A or B,
the inverter section is protected against the overload with a
temperature measurement sensor and a software algorithm.
Overloading
between I AC_Nominal
and I AC_1/5 min
If the load current is continuously between I AC_Nominal and I AC_1/5 min , the
temperature of the IGBT power plate(s) and the heat sink will
increase further. The overloading time is limited by means of the
temperature sensor.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
7-7
Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing
I/(A)
ACA 610 2340-3 Duty Cycle A
4000
IAC_1/5 min
IAC_Nominal
3000
2000
1000
t/(min)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Figure 7 - 4 Overloading Range between I AC_Nominal and I AC_1/5 min in ACA
610 2340-3
If the measured temperature exceeds 115 °C, a warning “ACS 600
TEMP” is given and Alarm Word 1 (AW1) bit 4 is set to 1.
If the power plate module temperature exceeds 125 °C, a fault “ACS
600 TEMP” is given and Fault Word 1 (FW1) bit 3 is set 1. The
inverter pulses are blocked and the drive stops by coasting (zero
torque).
The maximum current is limited by parameter 20.04 MAXIMUM
CURRENT. If the actual current exceeds the I AC_1/5 min level, a software
algorithm is also activated. The load cycle between I AC_1/5 min and the
maximum current is time-limited as a function of current by means of
a software integrator and thus the areas of the A1, A2 and A3 are
equal.
Overloading
between the
I AC_1/5 min and
Maximum
Current
A1 = 10 s * (l AC_10/60s - AC_1/5 min.).
I/(A)
ACA 610 2340-3 Duty Cycle B examples
overloading is limited by the inverter software
5000
IAC_10/60s
A1 = A2 = A3
4000
3796
A1
A2
A3
IAC_1/5 min
IAC_Nominal
3374
3000
2402
Forced Cooling Cycle
2000
Short time Overload Cycle
Forced Cooling Cycle
Short time Overload Cycle
IAC_50/60s
Forced Cooling Cycle
Short time Overload Cycle
1000
t/(s)
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
Figure 7 - 5 Overloading example when the Load Current is > I AC_1/5 min
7-8
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing
At the beginning of a forced cooling cycle, AW_2 (9.05) bit 2 is set to
1 and an alarm “INV OVERLOAD” is given.
Motor Protections
Motor Thermal
Protection
Functions
The motor can be protected against overheating by:
•
activating the DTC motor thermal model or User Mode.
•
measuring motor temperature by PT 100 or
PTC sensors (1 or 2 separate measurement channels).
•
by detecting the state of a thermal switch (KLIXON) inside the
motor by the digital input DI6. See Parameter Group 10, selection
KLIXON. If the contact opens, fault “KLIXON” is activated and
FW_1 (09.01) bit 5 is set to 1
The motor thermal model can be used parallel with other temperature
protections (PTC, PT100, KLIXON).
C
180
15
155
130
120
10
Hot spot temperature margin
10
Permissible temperature rise
80
80
105
125
40
40
40
40
Maximum ambient
temperature
Insulation class
Maximum winding temperature
B
130 C
F
155 C
H
180 C
Figure 7 - 6 Motor Insulation Classes According to IEC 85
Motor
Thermal
Model
The ACS 600 drive calculates the temperature of the motor based on
the following assumptions:
1. The motor ambient temperature is 30 °C.
2. Motor temperature is calculated using either the user-adjustable
or automatically calculated Motor Thermal Time and Motor Load
Curve. The load curve should be adjusted in case the ambient
temperature is higher than 30 °C.
The thermal model provides protection equivalent to standard class
10, 20, or 30 overload relays by setting the Motor Thermal Time to
350, 700, or 1050 seconds respectively and parameter 30.29 THERM
MOD FLT L to value 110 °C.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
7-9
Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing
There are two levels of temperature monitoring:
Usage of PT100,
PTC or KTY84-1xx
Temperature
Sensors
•
alarm “MOTOR TEMP” is activated when the alarm temperature
limit defined by Parameter 30.28 THERM MOD ALM L is reached
and AW_1 (09.04) bit 3 is set to 1.
•
fault “MOTOR TEMP” is activated when the trip temperature limit
defined by Parameter 30.29 THERM MOD FLT L is reached,
FW_1 (09.01) bit 6 is set to 1.
Motor temperature can be measured by using the analogue inputs
and outputs of the drive. The System Application program supports
two measurement channels: AI1 and AI2 for motor 1 and motor 2
temperature measurements.
WARNING! According to IEC 664, the connection of the thermistor to
the analogue I/O (NIOC-01 or NAIO) or to digital input DI6 of the
NIOC-01 requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live
parts and the thermistor. Reinforced insulation entails a clearance
and creepage of 8 mm (400/500 VAC equipment). If the thermistor
assembly does not fulfil the requirement, the other I/O terminals of
ACS 600 must be protected against contact, or a thermistor relay
must be used to isolate the thermistor from the digital input.
AO+
AOAI+
AI-
T
Motor
Figure 7 - 7 Thermistor Connection example using Analogue I/O.
Motor overtemperature can be detected by connecting 1...3 PTC
thermistors, 1...3 PT100 elements or silicon temperature sensor
KTY84-1xx (1000Ω at 100 °C). The purpose of the analogue output is
to supply a constant current to the temperature element, the
analogue input measures the voltage across the element. The
application program sets the correct constant current according to the
sensor type selection. Alarm and trip limits are defined by Parameters
30.04 and 30.05 for the motor 1 and 30.07 and 30.08 for the motor 2.
7 - 10
•
alarm “MOTOR TEMP M” is activated when the alarm
temperature limit is reached. AW_1 (09.04) bit 2 is set to 1.
•
fault “MOTOR TEMP M” is activated when the trip temperature
limit is reached and the FW_1 (09.01) bit 5 is set to 1.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing
•
Note: The thermistor can also be connected to digital input DI6
on the NIOC board according to the following figure. If direct
thermistor connection is used, digital input DI6 goes to 0 false
when resistance rises higher than 4 kΩ. As a result, the drive is
tripped, fault “KLIXON” is activated and appended to the fault
logger, and FW_1 (09.01) bit 5 is set to 1.
Alternative 1
Thermistor
relay
Alternative 2
NIOC-01
X22:
NIOC-01
X22:
6
DI6
6
DI6
7
+24 V d.c.
7
+24 V d.c.
10 nF
T
T
Motor
Motor
Alternative 2: At the motor end, the cable shield should be earthed
through a 10 nF capacitor. If this is not possible, the shield is to be
left unconnected.
Stall Function
The ACS 600 drive protects the motor upon a stall situation. It is
possible to adjust the supervision limits (torque, frequency, time) and
choose how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition (warning
indication fault indication & stop; no reaction).
The protection is activated if all the following conditions are fulfilled at
the same time:
1. The ACS 600 output frequency is below the Stall Frequency limit
set by the user.
2. The motor torque has risen to the maximum allowed value (the
value Tm.a in the figure) calculated by the ACS 600 application
program. This limit is continuously changing depending on
variables such as the motor temperature calculated by the
frequency converter software.
3. Conditions 1 and 2 have been fulfilled longer than the period set
by the user (Stall Time Limit).
An alarm or fault function can be selected by Parameter 30.13
STALL FUNCTION. If FAULT is selected, a stall situation produces a
fault “MOTOR STALL” and sets FW_2 (9.02) bit 14 to 1. If
WARNING is selected, a stall situation produces a warning “MOTOR
STALL” and sets AW_2 (9.05) bit 9 to 1.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
7 - 11
Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing
Torque
Stall region
Tm.a
Stall
Frequency
f (Hz)
Figure 7 - 8 Stall Protection Area
Underload
Function
The loss of motor load may indicate a process malfunction.
The ACS 600 drive provides an Underload Function to protect the
machinery and process in such a fault condition. The supervision
limits (Underload Curve and Underload Time) can be chosen as well
as the drive operation in an underload condition (warning indication;
fault indication & stop; no reaction).
The protection is activated if all the following conditions are fulfilled at
the same time:
1. The motor load is below the Underload Curve selected by the
user.
2. The motor load has been below the selected Underload Curve
longer than the time set by the user (Underload Time).
3. The ACS 600 drive output frequency is more than 10 % of the
motor nominal frequency.
An alarm or fault function can be selected by Parameter 30.16
UNDERLOAD FUNC. If FAULT is selected, an underload situation
produces a fault “UNDERLOAD” and sets FW_1 (9.01) bit 8 to 1. If
WARNING is selected, an underload situation produces a warning
“UNDERLOAD” and sets AW_2 (9.05) bit 1 to 1.
Motor Phase Loss
Function
The Motor Phase Loss function monitors the status of the motor
cable connections. The function is most useful during motor start.
The ACS 600 drive detects if any of the motor phases have not been
connected and refuses to start. The Phase Loss function also
supervises the motor connection status during normal operation.
The user can define the operation upon motor phase loss. The
alternatives are either a fault indication and Stop, or no reaction.
The fault indication is “MOTOR PHASE”. FW_2 (09.02) bit 15 is
simultaneously set to a 1.
7 - 12
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing
Earth Fault
Protection
Function
The Earth Fault protection detects earth faults in the motor, the motor
cable or the inverter. The Earth Fault protection is based on earth
leakage current measurement with a summation current transformer
at the input of the converter. Depending on the user’s selection, the
Earth Fault function stops the drive and gives a fault indication, or the
drive continues operation and gives an alarm.
The tripping level of inverter sizes R10i…R12i can be selected by
parameter 30.25 EARTH FAULT LEVEL. The parameter defines the
unbalance trip level of sum current measured by the NINT board.
A fault function can be selected by selecting FAULT at parameter
30.20 EARTH FAULT. In case of fault, “EARTH FAULT” is indicated
and FW_1 (09.01) bit 4 is set to 1. If NO is selected, an alarm
“EARTH FAULT” is given and AW_1 (09.04) bit 14 is set to 1.
Motor Fan
Diagnostics
If the motor has an external cooling fan motor, it is possible to control
the starter of the fan motor by digital output. See Parameter group 14
and 35. The diagnostics is activated by Parameter 35.01 MOTOR
FAN CTRL. The acknowledge signal to the digital input from the
motor starter is selected by Parameter 10.06 MOTOR FAN ACK.
Diagnostics
1. When first starting the motor, if the motor fan acknowledge signal
is not received within the time defined by parameter 35.02 FAN
ACK DELAY, a fault is generated and the drive is tripped.
2. While running the motor:
If the acknowledge signal is lost, an alarm “MOTOR FAN” is
generated. If the acknowledge signal is still lost after 35.02 FAN
ACK DELAY, a fault is indicated and drive is tripped. If the
acknowledge time is zero, only alarm is indicated.
3. AW_2 bit 0 is set to 1 in case of motor fan alarm.
4. FW_3 bit 0 is set to 1 in case of motor fan fault, if 35.01 MOTOR
FAN CTRL has selection ALARM/FAULT.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
7 - 13
Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing
Fault and Alarm
Messages
Fault Message Table
FAULT MESSAGES
(in alphabetical order)
Alarm / Fault
Text
Cause
What to do
ACS 600 TEMP
The ACx 600 internal temperature is
excessive. A warning is given if
inverter module temperature
exceeds 115 °C.
Check ambient conditions. Check air flow and
fan operation. Check heatsink fins for dust
pick-up. Check motor power against unit
power.
I/O reference 4…20 mA is below
4mA level.
Check for proper analogue control signal
levels. Check the control wiring. Check
AI < MIN FUNC Fault Function parameters.
9.01 FW_1, bit 3
AI<MIN FUNC
9.02 FW_2, bit 10
(programmable fault or alarm, see
Parameter 30.27).
CABIN TEMP F
9.02 FW_2, bit 7
CABLE TEMP
9.02 FW_2 bit 3
CH0 COM LOS
9.02 FW_2, bit 12
Cabinet over- or undertemperature
detected on the NIOC-01 I/O board
(thermistor). Environment
temperature is too high (>73 °C) or
too low (<5 °C).
Boost the cooling of air.
Motor cable overtemperature trip.
Thermal model of cable has reached
100% temperature level.
Check the motor load.
Communication break detected on
CH0 receive.
Check the optical fibres between the NAMC
board and overriding system (or fieldbus
adapter). Test with new optical fibres.
(programmable fault, see Parameter
70.04)
Check the motor cable and its type. Verify with
the cable thermal model parameters in
Parameter Group 36.
Check that the node address is correct in the
drive.
Check the status of the fieldbus adapter. See
appropriate fieldbus adapter manual.
Check parameter settings of Group 51, if a
fieldbus adapter is present. Check the
connections between the fieldbus and the
adapter.
Check that the bus master is communicating
and correctly configured.
CH2 COM LOS
9.01 FW_1, bit 11
Communication break detected on
CH2 receive.
(programmable fault or alarm, see
parameter 70.13)
7 - 14
Check the optical fibres between the NAMC
boards. Check that the optical fibre loop is
closed.
Test with new optical fibres.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing
FAULT MESSAGES
(in alphabetical order)
Alarm / Fault
Text
Cause
What to do
DC OVERVOLT
Intermediate circuit DC voltage is
excessive. This can be caused by
Check the functioning of the braking chopper.
2. Faulty braking chopper or
resistor (if used).
Check the level of DC voltage and inverter
nominal voltage.
3. Deceleration time being too
short, if there is no braking
chopper or regenerative
incoming section.
Replace the NINT-xx board (its voltage
measurement circuit is faulty).
9.01 FW_1, bit 2
If using a regenerative incoming section check
1. Static or transient overvoltages in that the diode mode is not forced during
the mains.
deceleration.
4. Internal fault in the inverter unit.
DC UNDERVOLT
9.02 FW_2, bit 2
Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not Checks mains supply and inverter fuses.
sufficient. This can be caused by a
If Standard HW is used, check that digital input
missing mains phase in the diode
DI2 is on 1, when the inverter is powered.
rectifying bridge.
DDF FORMAT
File error in FLASH memory.
Replace the NAMC board.
9.03 SFW, bit 3
EARTH FAULT
9.01 FW_1, bit 4
The load on the incoming mains
Check motor.
system is out of balance. This can be Check motor cable.
caused by a fault in the motor, motor
Check that there are no power factor
cable or an internal malfunction.
correction capacitors or surge absorbers in the
(programmable fault, see parameter motor cable.
30.20)
Tripping level setting is too sensitive
in the non parallel connected
R10i…R12i inverters. Check
Parameter 30.25.
ENCODER FLT
9.02 FW_2 bit 5
Speed measurement fault detected.
This can be caused by loose cable
connection, communication time-out,
faulty pulse encoder, or too great a
difference between the internal and
measured actual speeds.
(programmable fault or alarm, see
Parameter 50.05)
Check settings of Parameter Group 50.
Check pulse encoder and its cabling including
Ch A and Ch B phasing. The sign of the signal
1.03 SPEED MEASURED must be same as
internal actual speed 1.02 MOTOR SPEED
when rotating the motor. If not, exchange
channels A and B.
Check fibre optic connection between the
NAMC board and the NTAC-0x module.
Check the proper earthing of equipment.
Check for highly emissive components nearby.
FACTORY FILE
Factory macro parameter file error.
Replace the NAMC board.
There is an internal fault in the
ACS 600.
Check for loose connections inside of
frequency converter cabinet. Write down the
Fault code (in brackets). Contact ABB Service.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
7 - 15
9.03 SFW bit 0
FLT (xx)
8.01 MSW bit 3
Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing
FAULT MESSAGES
(in alphabetical order)
Alarm / Fault
Text
Cause
ID RUN FLT
Motor ID Run not possible due to the Check that no overriding system is connected
limits or locked rotor.
to the drive. Switch off the auxiliary voltage
supply from the NAMC board and power up
again.
8.01 MSW bit 3
What to do
Check the parameter values in Group 20. Check that no limits prevent the ID Run.
Restore factory settings and try again.
Check that the motor shaft is not locked.
IO FAULT
9.02 FW_2 bit 6
I/O communication fault or error
detected on CH1. This can be
caused by a fault in the I/O unit, a
fibre optic cable connection problem
or incorrect module identification
number (if I/O extension modules
are present).
Check for loose connections between the
NIOC-01 or extension module and NAMC
board. Measure that every I/O unit receives
+24 V DC auxiliary voltage.
Test with new optic fibre cables.
Check the identification numbers of extension
I/O modules.
If the fault is still active, replace the I/O
board/extension unit(s).
KLIXON
9.01 FW_1 bit 5
Motor 1 or 2 overtemperature fault. A Check motor ratings and load.
thermal switch or thermistor
Check cable.
connected to DI6 has opened.
Check thermistor (only to DI6 of NIOC-01) or
Also PTC thermistor connected to
thermal switch connections to digital inputs. If
DI6 of NIOC-01detects motor
the resistance of the thermistor is over 4 kΩ,
overtemperature.
real overtemperature occurs in the motor. Wait
until the motor has cooled. The state of DI6
returns back to 1 when the resistance of the
thermistor is between 0...1.5 kΩ.
Replace the I/O board if the voltage in the
selected KLIXON digital input is correct, but
the state of DI6 is 0 in 1.15 DI6-1 STATUS or
8.03 DI STATUS WORD.
Check Parameter 10.05 KLIXON.
MOTOR TEMP M
9.01 FW_1 bit 5
Motor 1 or 2 overtemperature fault.
(PT100 or PTC measurement to
analogue I/O). Motor temperature
has exceeded the tripping level.
(programmable fault or alarm, see
Parameter 30.02)
7 - 16
Check motor ratings, load and cooling. Check
start-up data. Check MOTOR TEMP Fault
Function parameters.
If an NAIO module is used for temperature
measurement, check its DIP switch settings as
well as Parameter 98.06 AIO EXT MODULE 1.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing
FAULT MESSAGES
(in alphabetical order)
Alarm / Fault
Text
Cause
What to do
MOTOR FAN
Acknowledge signal is missing from
the external motor fan starter.
Check the acknowledge circuit connection to
the selected digital input. Check Parameter
35.02.
9.06 FW_3 bit 0
Check the overload protection device of the
fan motor. If it has tripped, reset it.
Check the condition of the bearings of the fan
motor by rotating fan motor manually. Replace
the spare part fan if faulty.
Replace the spare part fan if overload trippings
continue and the bearings are OK.
MOTOR PHASE
9.02 FW_2 bit 15
Fault in the motor circuit. One of the
motor phases is lost. This can be
caused by a fault in the motor, the
motor cable, a thermal relay (if
used), or an internal fault.
(programmable fault or alarm, see
Parameter 30.19).
MOTOR STALL
9.02 FW_2 bit 14
Check motor and motor cable. If the motor is
disconnected, this fault is activated.
Check thermal relay (if used).
Check MOTOR PHASE Fault Function
parameters. Disable this protection.
If the cable and motor is ok, this fault can
appear with small motors (<30 kW) in low
speed. Deactivate protection in this case.
Motor or process stall. Motor is
Check motor load and the ACx 600 ratings.
operating in the stall region. This can Check MOTOR STALL Fault Function
be caused by excessive load or
parameters (30.13 ... 30.15).
insufficient motor power.
(programmable fault or alarm, see
Parameter 30.13)
MOTOR TEMP
9.01 FW_1 bit 6
Overtemperature fault (thermal
model). Temperature has exceeded
the tripping level of the thermal
model.
Check motor ratings, load and cooling. Check
start-up data. Check MOTOR TEMP Fault
Function parameters.
(programmable fault or alarm, see
parameter 30.02)
NVOS ERROR
Non-volatile operating system error.
Replace the NAMC board.
OVER SWFREQ
Over switching frequency fault.
Replace the NAMC board.
9.02 FW_2 bit 9
This may be due to a hardware fault
in the electronics boards.
Replace the NINT board.
9.03 SFW bit 2
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
On units with parallel connected inverters,
replace the NPBU board.
7 - 17
Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing
FAULT MESSAGES
(in alphabetical order)
Alarm / Fault
Text
Cause
What to do
OVERCURRENT
Overcurrent has been detected.
If the drive tripped during flying start, check
that Parameter 21.01 START FUNCTION is
set to AUTO. (Other modes do not support
flying start).
9.01 FW_1 bit 1
Check motor load.
Check acceleration time.
Check motor and motor cable (including
phasing).
Check pulse encoder and pulse encoder cable.
Check that there are no power factor
correction capacitors or surge absorbers in the
motor cable.
Check the nominal motor values from Group
99 to confirm that the motor model is correct.
OVERFREQ
9.01 FW_1 bit 9
Motor is turning faster than the
highest allowed speed. This can be
caused by an incorrect setting of
parameters, insufficient braking
torque or changes in the load when
using torque reference.
Check the minimum and maximum speed
settings.
Check the adequacy of motor braking torque.
Check the applicability of torque control.
Check the need for a Braking Chopper and
Braking Resistor if the drive has a Diode
Supply Unit DSU.
Check Parameter 20.11 FREQ TRIP MARGIN.
PANEL LOST
9.02 FW_2 bit 13
A Local Control device (CDP 312 or Check Control Panel connector. Replace
DriveWindow) has ceased
Control Panel in the mounting platform. Check
communicating. This can be caused PANEL LOST Fault Function parameters.
by the disconnetion of the selected
local control device during local
control or an internal fault in the local
controlling device.
(programmable fault or alarm, see
parameter 30.21)
PPCC LINK
9.02 FW_2 bit 11
NINT board current measurement or
communication fault between the
NAMC and NINT boards.
(This fault can be masked, if the DC
intermediate circuit voltage has been
disconnected, but the NAMC board
has an external power supply and
fault indication is not needed. The
Fault appears only if the motor is
start. See Parameter 30.24)
Check the fibre optic cables connected
between the NAMC and NINT boards. In
parallel connected inverters, also check the
cabling on the NPBU-xx board.
If the fault is still active, replace the NPBU
board (only with parallel connected inverters),
NAMC and NINT board (in this order) until the
fault disappears.
Test with new fibre optic cables in the PPCC
link.
Check that there is no short circuit in the power
stage. The short circuit or over current can
cause this message due to the possible faulty
power plate. It can causes possible
overloading for auxiliary power and as a result
PPCC link communication failure.
7 - 18
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing
FAULT MESSAGES
(in alphabetical order)
Alarm / Fault
Text
Cause
What to do
RUN DISABLD
External interlocking (DI2=0) circuit
is open. There is a fault in the
external devices.
Check the circuit connected to digital input DI2.
SAFETY SWITC
The motor is running and safety
switch is opened.
Close the safety switch. Reset the fault and
start the motor again.
SC (INU 1)
Short Circuit in (parallel connected)
inverter unit 1
Short circuit detected in parallel connected
inverter unit 1. Check the optic fibre connection
from the NPBU-xx board channel CH1 (INT1)
to the inverter.
9.02 FW_2 bit 4
9.01 FW_1 bit 12
Check the motor and motor cable.
Check all power plates in inverter unit 1.
If a faulty power plate is detected, replace the
whole phase module by another.
SC (INU 2)
9.01 FW_1 bit 13
Short Circuit in (parallel connected)
inverter unit 2
Short circuit detected in the parallel connected
inverter unit 2. Check the optic fibre connection
from the NPBU-xx board channel CH2 (INT2)
to the inverter.
Check the motor and motor cable.
Check all power plates in inverter unit 2.
If a faulty power plate is detected, replace the
whole phase module by another.
SC (INU 3)
9.01 FW_1 bit 14
Short Circuit in (parallel connected)
inverter unit 3
Short circuit detected in the parallel connected
inverter unit 3. Check the optic fibre connection
from the NPBU-xx board channel CH3 (INT3)
to the inverter.
Check the motor and motor cable.
Check all power plates in inverter unit 3.
If a faulty power plate is detected, replace the
whole phase module by another.
SC (INU 4)
9.01 FW_1 bit 15
Short Circuit in (parallel connected)
inverter unit 4
Short circuit detected in the parallel connected
inverter unit 4. Check the optic fibre connection
from the NPBU-xx board channel CH4 (INT4)
to the inverter.
Check the motor and motor cable.
Check all power plates in inverter unit 4.
If a faulty power plate is detected, replace the
whole phase module by another.
SHORT CIRC
9.01 FW_1 bit 0
Short circuit has been detected. The
output current is excessive.
Check the motor and motor cable.
Measure the resistances of the power plate(s).
If a faulty power plate is detected, replace the
power plate and the NINT and NGDR boards
or the whole inverter phase module.
Check that the prevention of unexpected startup circuit has not opened during the run.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
7 - 19
Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing
FAULT MESSAGES
(in alphabetical order)
Alarm / Fault
Text
Cause
What to do
START INH HW
Start Inhibit HW fault has been
detected in the Prevention of
Unexpected Start-Up circuit.
Check that the LED indicator is ON in the
NGPS-xx power supply, when powered. If not,
change the NGPS-xx power supply.
9.06 FW_3 bit 1
Check the digital input connection in the
START INHIB DI circuit according to
parameter selection 10.08.
Check the status of START INHIB DI in the
HW by measuring the voltage between the
input terminals. Check the SW status from the
signal DI STATUS WORD (8.05). If there is a
voltage in the input terminals of START INHIB
DI, but the DI STATUS WORD (8.05) indicates
state FALSE, change the I/O board / module.
SUPPLY PHASE
9.02 FW_2 bit 0
UNDERLOAD
9.01 FW_1 bit 8
Ripple voltage in the DC link is too
high. This can be caused by a
missing mains phase in the diode
rectifier bridge, or DC voltage
oscillation by a thyristor rectifying
bridge (if used in the incoming
section).
Check for mains supply imbalance.
Process underload situation
detected. Motor load is too low. This
can be caused by a release
mechanism in the driven equipment.
Check the driven equipment.
Check the mains fuses.
Check UNDERLOAD Fault Function
parameters.
(programmable fault or alarm, see
Parameter 30.16.)
USER MACRO
9.03 SFW bit 1
7 - 20
User Macro parameter file error.
There is no User Macro saved or the
file is defective.
Create the User Macro again.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing
Alarm Message Table
ALARM MESSAGES
(in alphabetical order)
Alarm Message
Cause
Action
ACS 600 TEMP
9.04 AW_1 bit 4
Power plate overtemperature alarm. The
ACS 600 internal temperature is
excessive.
Check ambient conditions. Check air
flow and fan operation. Check heatsink
fins for dust pick-up. Check motor power
against unit power.
AI<MIN FUNC
I/O reference 4…20 mA is below 4 mA.
9.05 AW_2 bit 10
(programmable fault or alarm, see
parameter 30.27).
Check for proper analogue control
signal levels. Check the control wiring.
Check AI < MIN FUNC Fault Function
parameters.
AIO ALARM
Analogue I/O error detected on the
Standard I/O board NIOC-01.
Replace the NIOC-01 board. Test with
new fibre optic cables on CH1.
8.01 MSW bit 7
There is an internal alarm in the
ACS 600.
Check for loose connections inside of
frequency converter cabinet. Write
down the Alarm code (in brackets).
Contact ABB Service.
CABLE TEMP
Motor cable overtemperature alarm.
Check the motor load.
8.05 AW_2 bit 3
Thermal model of the cable has reached
90% temperature level.
Check the motor cable and its type and
verify the cable thermal model
parameters from the parameter group
36.
CH0 TIMEOUT
Communication break detected on CH0
receive. CONSTANT SPEED1 mode
selected with Par. 70.05.
Check the fibre optic cables between
the NAMC board and the overriding
system (or fieldbus adapter). Test with
new fibre optic cables on CH0.
9.04 AW_1 bit 8
ALM (xx)
9.05 AW_2 bit 11
(can be deactivated: see Parameter
70.04)
Check that the node address is correct
for the drive.
Check the status of the fieldbus
adapter. See appropriate fieldbus
adapter manual.
Check parameter settings of Group 51
in case of FBA module and connections
between control system and adapter
module.
Check if the bus master is not
communicating or configured.
CH2 COM LOS
9.04 AW_1 bit 11
Communication break detected on CH2
receive.
(programmable fault or alarm; see
Parameter 70.13)
Check the fibre optic cables on CH2
between the NAMC boards. Check that
the fibre optic loop is closed. Test with
new fibre optic cables on CH2.
Check that there is one master drive
and the remainder are followers in the
M/F link. See Parameter 70.08 CH2 M/F
MODE.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
7 - 21
Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing
ALARM MESSAGES
(in alphabetical order)
Alarm Message
Cause
Action
DC UNDERVOLT
An undervoltage trip has been detected
with the Auto Restart function. This is
indicated to the AW2 diagnostics.
n.a. Only indication.
Digital input malfunction detected in the
I/O board NIOC-01.
Check the fibre optic cables. Test with
new fibre optic cables on CH1.
9.05 AW_2 bit 14
DIO ALARM
9.04 AW_1 bit 7
Replace the NIOC-01 board.
EARTH FAULT
9.04 AW_1 bit 14
The load on the incoming mains system
is out of balance. This can be caused by
a fault in the motor, motor cable or an
internal malfunction.
(programmable fault or alarm; see
Parameter 30.20)
Check motor.
Check motor cable.
Check that there are no power factor
correction capacitors or surge absorbers
in the motor cable.
Tripping level setting is too sensitive in
the R10i…R12i inverters. See Parameter
30.25.
EM STOP
9.04 AW_1 bit 1
Emergency Stop has been activated
either by digital input DI1( = 0) or MAIN
CONTROL WORD 7.01 bit 2 (= 0).
Emergency stop push buttons must be
returned to their normal position after
the emergency stop situation is over.
Check that the overriding system keeps
sending the MAIN CONTROL WORD
to drive. See bit 2 of MCW.
To get drive to ready status, the MCW
bit 0 must be set to state FALSE and
back to TRUE.
ENCODER ERR
9.04 AW_1 bit 5
Speed measurement alarm detected.
This can be caused by a loose cable
connection or faulty pulse encoder.
(programmable fault or alarm, see
parameter 50.05)
Check settings of Parameter Group 50.
Check the pulse encoder and its cabling
(including CH A and CH B phasing).
The sign of signal 1.03 SPEED
MEASURED must be the same as
internal actual speed 1.02 SPEED
ESTIMATED. If it is not, reverse the
channels A and B.
Check fibre optic connection between
the NAMC board and the NTAC-0x
module.
Check the proper earthing of
equipment.
Check for highly emissive components
nearby.
EXT AIO ALM
9.04 AW_1 bit 10
EXT DIO ALM
9.04 AW_1 bit 9
INV OVERLOAD
9.05 AW2_ bit 2
7 - 22
Analogue I/O error detected in the NAIO
I/O Extension module
If the alarm is continuously active,
replace the NAIO module.
Digital input error detected in the NDIO
I/O Extension module.
If the alarm is continuously active,
replace the NDIO module.
Forced cooling cycle for inverter is
active after the overloading cycle 10/60s.
Load is too high. Check the
dimensioning and process.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing
ALARM MESSAGES
(in alphabetical order)
Alarm Message
Cause
Action
M/F CONNECT
Wrong data type has been selected at
parameters MASTER REF 1, 2 or 3
(70.09...70.11)
Select zero or correct data type at the
following parameters:
70.09 packed boolean
70.10 real or integer
70.11 real or integer
Motor 1 or 2 overtemperature alarm
(PT100 or PTC measurement to
Analogue I/O)
Check motor ratings and load. Check
start-up data. Check PT100 or
thermistor connections for AI and AO of
the NIOC-01 board or NAIO extension
module according to the hardware
configuration.
Fault Logger
MOTOR TEMP M
9.04 AW_1 bit 2
(programmable fault or alarm; see
Parameter (30.01, 30.03...30.05)
Check the DIP switches and selection of
parameter 98.06 AIO EXT MODULE 1,
if an NAIO extension module is used for
temperature measurement.
MOTOR FAN
9.05 AW_2 bit 0
Acknowledge signal is missing from the
external motor fan and an alarm is
present the time defined by Parameter
35.03 FAN ACK DELAY.
Check the acknowledge circuit on the
selected digital input. See Parameter
35.02.
Check the overload protection device of
the fan motor. If it has tripped, reset it.
Check the condition of the bearings of
the fan motor by rotating the fan motor
manually. Replace the spare part fan if
faulty.
Replace the spare part fan if overload
trippings continue and the bearings are
OK.
MOTOR STALL
9.05 AW_2 bit 9
Motor or process stall. Motor operating in Check motor load and the ACx 600
the stall region. This can be caused by
ratings. Check MOTOR STALL Fault
excessive load or insufficient motor
Function parameters.
power.
(programmable fault or alarm; see
Parameter 30.13)
MOTOR STARTS
Motor ID Run has been selected and the
drive started in the Local control mode.
Wait until the Motor ID Run is complete.
MOTOR TEMP
Overtemperature alarm (thermal model).
Temperature has exceeded the alarm
level of the thermal model.
(programmable fault or alarm; see
Parameter 30.02)
Check motor ratings, load and cooling.
Check Parameter 30.28 THERM MOD
ALM L. If USER MODE is selected,
check that Parameters 30.09 ... 30.12
are set correctly.
Motor data is not given or motor data
does not match with inverter data.
Check the motor data given by
Parameters 99.02...99.06.
9.04 AW_1 bit 3
NO MOTOR DATA
9.02 FW_2 bit 1
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
7 - 23
Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing
ALARM MESSAGES
(in alphabetical order)
Alarm Message
Cause
Action
PANEL LOST
A Local Control device (CDP 312 or
DriveWindow) has ceased
communicating. This can be caused by
the disconnection of the selected local
control device during local control or an
internal fault in the local controlling
device.
Check Control Panel connector.
Replace Control Panel in the mounting
platform. Check PANEL LOST Fault
Function parameters.
9.05 AW_2 bit 13
(programmable fault or alarm, see
parameter 30.21)
POWDOWN FILE
Error in restoring powerdown.ddf file
If the alarm keeps reappearing, replace
the NAMC-xx board.
Error in restoring powerfail.ddf file.
If the alarm keeps reappearing, replace
the NAMC-xx board.
The motor has been restarted after the
short net break with AUTO RESTART
function. See parameter 21.09.
n.a.
SAFETY SWITC
The motor has been stopped and safety
switch is opened.
Close the safety switch.
START INHIBI
Prevention of unexpected start-up
activated from the hardware typically by
operator for equipment maintenance.
The Operator must close the prevention
of unexpected start-up switch.
Motor temperature measurement circuit
is faulty. This can be caused by a broken
temperature sensor or cable.
Check the motor temperature sensor
connections.
Process underload situation detected.
Motor load is too low. This can be
caused by a release mechanism in the
driven equipment.
Check for a problem in the driven
equipment. Check UNDERLOAD Fault
Function parameters.
9.05 AW_2 bit 8
POWFAIL FILE
9.05 AW_2 bit 7
RESTARTED
9.05 AW_2 bit 15
9.04 AW_1 bit 0
T MEAS ALM
9.04 AW_1 bit 6
UNDERLOAD
9.05 AW_2 bit 1
If the switch is closed and the alarm is
still active, check that the “Power On”
LED is lit on the NGPS board. If the
LED is off but there is a voltage at the
input terminals of the NGPS, replace
the board.
(programmable fault or alarm; see
Parameter 30.16)
7 - 24
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing
Event Messages
EVENT MESSAGES
Event Message
Cause
SYSTEM START
Inverter Software has been started. This
indicates normally an auxiliary voltage
on connection.
(in alphabetical order)
Action
Other Messages
OTHER MESSAGES
Alarm Message
Cause
(in alphabetical order)
Action
NO COMMUNICATION Control Panel CDP 312 message.
Check the fibre optic cable
The selected drive is not present on the connections in the I/O-link.
link. The link does not work because of a
hardware malfunction or problem in the
cabling.
SWC ON INHIB
Drive is in the ON INHIBIT state. See
ABB Drive Profile description.
Set MAIN CONTROL WORD bit 0 first
to 0, then back to 1 to proceed into
the next state.
ID N CHANGED
Modbus ID number of the drive has been
changed from 1 in Drive Selection Mode
of CDP 312 panel (the change is not
shown on the display).
To change the Modbus ID number
back to 1 go to Drive Selection Mode
by pressing DRIVE. Press ENTER.
Set the ID number to 1. Press
ENTER.
MACRO CHANGE
A Macro is being restored or a user
Macro is being saved.
Please wait.
ID MAGN REG
The ACx 600 is ready to start
identification magnetisation.
This warning belongs to the normal
start-up procedure. Press PAR and
check Parameter 99.07.
ID MAGN
The ACx 600 is performing identification
magnetisation.
Please wait 20 to 60 seconds.
ID DONE
The ACx 600 has performed the
identification magnetisation and is ready
to start.
-
I/O SP REF
AI1 of NIOC-01 has been selected
incorrectly for speed reference and
motor temperature measurement when
I/O control (98.02 = NO) or HAND/AUTO
function has been selected.
Use AI2 of NIOC-01 for speed
reference by setting Par. 11.01 to
value STD AI2
or
use an NAIO Analogue I/O Extension
Module. See Par. 98.06.
8.01 MSW bit 6
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
7 - 25
Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing
7 - 26
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 8 - Terms
TERMS
ACS
FULL NAME
AC Standard
ACS 600
ACS 600
MultiDrive
ACU
AI
NAMC
Auxiliary Control Unit
Analogue Input
Application and Motor Control
NAMC Control
Board
AO
APC2
AC 80
ASIC
Application and Motor Controller
board
Analogue Output
Application Program Controller
Application Program Controller
Application Specific Integrated
Circuit
BJT
CAD
CDC
CDP 311
Bipolar Junction Transistor
Computer Aided Design
Common Drive Control
Common Drives Panel 311
CDP 312
Common Drives Panel 312
CE Marking
Communauté Européenne
Marking
CMOS
DC Busbar
DDC
Complementary MOS
DDCC
Distributed Drives
Communication Circuit
Distributed Drives
Communication System
DDCS
Digital Drive Controller
DESCRIPTION
ABB standard frequency converter family.
E.g. ACS 600.
ACS 600 frequency converter family.
System drive; a member of ACS 600 product
family.
Interface for an analogue input signal.
E.g. NAMC table. The interface between
application SW and motor control SW in ACS
600.
Control board for ACS 600 and ACS 600
MultiDrive.
Interface for an analogue output signal.
System drives application controller (board).
System drives application controller.
Non-standard IC circuits. Allow more
compact and cheaper PCB design than using
standard circuits.
Semiconductor type.
APC 2, DDC and optional boards.
Control panel is used to parametrise and
monitor ACS 600 using CDI-protocol.
Control panel is used to parametrise and
monitor ACS 600 using Modbus-protocol.
CE marking: The product complies with the
requirements of relevant European
Directives.
Semiconductor type.
Direct Current supply for inverter units.
Standard control functions, torque and speed
control loops, internal start/stop logic,
internal fault diagnostic, motor and cable
protection.
Communication ASIC used in ACS 600
products.
Communication protocol used in ACS 600
products.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
8-1
Chapter 8 – Terms
TERMS
DDCTool
FULL NAME
Digital Drive Controller Tool
DI
DO
DriveSize
Digital Input
Digital Output
DriveSupport
DriveWindow
DSP
Digital Signal Processor
DSU
DTC
Diode Supply Unit
Direct Torque Control
EEPROM
EMC
Electrically Erasable
Programmable ROM
Electromagnetic Compatibility
EMI
EPROM
ESD
FCB
Electromagnetic Interference
Erasable Programmable ROM
ElectroStatic Discharge
Function Chart Builder
FCE
Function Chart Editor
FET
Flash EEPROM
FSR
Field Effect Transistor
Electrically Sector erasable
EEPROM memory
Full Scale Range
GTO
HW
I/O
Gate Turn-Off Thyristor
Hardware
Input/Output
IC
IC
Integrated Circuit
International Cooling
8-2
DESCRIPTION
Window based PC tool. Optically connected
to the DDC, setting/monitoring DDC’s
parameters local control of DDC, monitoring
actual values, testing DDC I/O’s.
Interface for a digital input signal.
Interface for a digital output signal.
Dimensioning PC tool for optional selection
of ACS 600 and motors.
Servicing, maintaining and troubleshooting
tool for ACS 600 product family.
PC tool for operating, controlling,
parametrising and monitoring ABB drives
(ACS 600).
Processor type used in NAMC board of ACS
600 product family.
Diode rectifying type of incoming supply.
Revolutionary motor and inverter control
method utilised first in ACS 600 product
family.
Non volatile memory. Look abbreviation:
ROM.
The ability of electrical equipment to operate
problem-free in electromagnetic
environment. Likewise, the equipment must
not disturb other products/systems.
See: ROM.
SW tool to make application programs (for
ACS 600 and APC2).
Editor of FCB used to draw application
blocks.
Semiconductor type.
Non volatile memory type.
E.g. the error is 0.01 % FSR (from maximum
value).
Semiconductor type.
Physical device or equipment.
Control Input/Output signal (E.g. DI, DO, AI,
AO).
International cooling standard.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 8 – Terms
TERMS
ICMC
ICU
ID
ID-run
IEC
IEEE
IGBT
IM
IOCC
IP
IR
ISO
KLIXON switch
LCD
LCI
LED
LMD-0X
Modbus
NAC
NAFA
NAIO
NAMC
NBRA
NBRC
NCPC
NCSA
FULL NAME
Integrated Control Motor Circuit
DESCRIPTION
Motor and inverter control ASIC used in ACS
600.
Incoming Unit
Section through which the ACS 600
MultiDrive connects to the mains.
Identification
E.g. ID run of ACS 600 to get initial motor
parameters.
Identification run
Start-up run to identify characteristics of a
motor for optimum motor control.
International Electrotechnical
Organisation for Electrical and Electronic
Commission
Engineering Standards.
Institute of Electrical and
US professional society that takes part in
Electronic Engineers
standardisation. E.g. IEEE Conference
Reviews.
Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor Power semiconductor used widely in
frequency converters.
International Mounting
International mounting standard.
Input Output Control Circuit
I/O ASIC used in ACS 600 products.
International Protection
Degree of protection provided by enclosures.
IR stands for voltage. I(Current)x E.g. IR compensation: An extra voltage
R(Resistance) = U(Voltage))
(torque) boost for a motor at low speeds.
International Organisation for
E.g. ISO 9000 series quality standards.
Standardisation
Temperature switch
Overtemperature monitoring sensor.
Liquid Crystal Display
Electronic display type used e.g. in CDP 312
Control Panel of ACS 600.
Load Commutated Inverter
Some ABB Megadrive products are equipped
with LCI (large synchronous motor drives).
Light Emitting Diode
Semiconductor type.
Led Monitoring Display
Led display for monitoring ACS 600 Drive
status and one signal.
Fieldbus communication protocol.
Next AC drive
Common platform or basis for drives R&D
projects. ACS 600, MultiDrive, XT are based
on NAC for example.
NAC AF100 Adapter
Fieldbus option module of ACS 600.
NAC Analogue Input/Output
Option module for ACS 600 to replace or
extend analogue I/O channels.
NAC NAMC Board
Motor and inverter control board of ACS 600.
NAC Braking Chopper
Option device of ACS 600 for efficient
braking with no regenerative input bridge.
NAC Braking Chopper Controller Board controlling the operation of braking
Board
chopper NBRA.
NAC Control Panel Cable
Option cable for remote connection of the
CDP 312 control panel.
NAC CS 31 Adapter
Fieldbus option module of ACS 600.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
8-3
Chapter 8 – Terms
TERMS
NDIO
FULL NAME
NAC Digital Input/Output
NDNA
NDSC
NECG
NAC DeviceNet Adapter
NAC Diode Supply Unit
Controller
NAC EMC Cable Glands
NED
Next Engineered Drive
NGDR
NAC Gate Driver Board
NIBA
NINP
NINT
NAC Interbus-S Adapter
NAC Input Bridge Board
NAC Interface Electronics Board
NIOC
NAC Input Output Control Board
NISA
NAC ISA/DDCS Adapter
NLWC
NAC Ligth Wave Cable
NMBA
NMFA
NPBA
NPBU
NAC Modbus Adapter
NAC Master Fieldbus Adapter
NAC Profibus Adapter
NAC PPCS Branching Unit
NPMP
NAC Panel Mounting Platform
NPOW
NAC Power Supply Board
NPSM
NAC Power Supply Option
NSNA
NTAC
NTC
NAC SucoNet Adapter
NAC Tacho (Encoder)
Negative Temperature
Coefficient resistor
NAC Varistor Board
Open System Interconnection
NVAR
OSI
PCB
PCMCIA
Printed Circuit Board
Personal Computer Memory
Card International Association
PE
Protective Earth
8-4
DESCRIPTION
Option module for ACS 600 to replace or
extend digital I/O channels.
Fieldbus option module of ACS 600.
Control board for half controlled
diode/thyristor input bridge.
Optional add-on kit of ACS 601 (R3 to R6)
for 360° cable shield earthing.
R&D project to develop engineered drive
based on NAC platform. ACS 600 MultiDrive.
PCB of ACS 600 for controlling the inverter
IGBTs.
Fieldbus option module of ACS 600.
PCB of ACS 600 for controlling the rectifier.
PCB of ACS 600 for interfacing NAMC and
Main Circuit.
PCB of ACS 600 for connecting I/O and CDP
312 control panel to the drive.
Optional device of ACS 600. Placed to a
PC's ISA board slot. Connects via fibres to
NAMC.
Optional add-on kit of ACS 600 (2 additional
fibre optic cables).
Fieldbus option module of ACS 600.
Fieldbus option module of ACS 600.
Fieldbus option module of ACS 600.
Optical PPCS branching unit used when
paralleling inverter modules.
Optional add-on kit of ACS 600: A base onto
which the control panel can be attached.
PCB of ACS 600 for powering other boards
and option modules.
Option module of ACS 600 to power external
devices.
Fieldbus option module of ACS 600.
Option pulse encoder interface for ACS 600.
PCB of ACS 600 for input bridge protection.
A standard layer model for open
telecommunication systems.
Wiring boards used in electronic devices.
DDCS/PCMCIA interface enables connecting
PC and Drives Window tool to ACS 600
series drive.
Terminal for grounding e.g. ACS 600.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
Chapter 8 – Terms
TERMS
PFC
FULL NAME
Pump and Fan Control (Macro)
PI
PID
Proportional, Integral
Proportional, Integral and
Derivate
PLC
PP
Programmable Logic Controller
Power Plate
PPCC
PPCS
Power Plate Control Circuit
Power Plate Communication
System
parts per million
pulses per revolution
ppm
ppr
PROM
PT100
PTC
PWM
R&D
R2, ..., R9
RAM
RFI
RMS
RO
ROM
RS 232
RS 485
SCR
SDCS UCM-1
SDCS-COM-1
SDCS-CON-1
SDCS-IOB-22
SDCS-IOB-23
DESCRIPTION
The macro of ACS 600 for controlling pump
or fan sections.
Controller type.
Controller type which allows to control
customer’s process’.(e.g. used in ACS 600
speed controller).
Inverter IGBTs, sensors and control circuits
integrated into one component.
ASIC of NINT board used for controlling PPs.
Optical serial link for inverter control.
1/10-6
Number of pulses given by incremental
encoder per one revolution.
Programmable ROM
See: ROM.
Platinum Wire Resistance
Temperature dependent resistor used e.g. in
Element 100
AC-motors to indicate motor temperature. R
= 100 ohm at 0°.
Positive Temperature Coefficient PTC thermistor is a semi-conductor used to
resistor
indicate exceeded temperature limit.
Pulse Width Modulation
The traditional control method of inverter.
Research and Development
Frame size 2 - 9
ACS 600/500 series: Size of the frame inside
which the converter unit is assembled.
Random Access Memory
Volatile memory.
Radio Frequency Interference
Rated Mean Squareroot
For sini wave the RMS value is maximum
value divided by squareroot of 2. E.g. 4 A
RMS: Effective value is four amperes.
Relay Output
Interface for a digital output signal.
Implemented with a relay.
Read Only Memory
Non volatile memory component type used
e.g. in NAMC of ACS 600.
Standard for data transmission physical
interface (signal usage & other electrical
parameters).
Standard for data transmission physical
interface (signal levels & other electrical
parameters).
Silicon Controlled Rectifier
Semiconductor type similar to thyristor.
UC-resistor board
Used in TSU.
Communication board
Used in TSU.
Control board
Used in TSU.
Digital connection card (115V)
Used in TSU.
Digital connection card (230V)
Used in TSU.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
8-5
Chapter 8 – Terms
TERMS
SDCS-IOE-2
SDCS-PIN-41
SDCS-PIN-51
SDCS-POW-1
SW
TSU
UART
UPS
FULL NAME
UC-measurement board
Pulse transformer board
Measurement board
Power supply board
Software
Thyristor Supply Unit
Universal Asynchronous
Receiver Transmitter
Uninterrupted Power Supply
UR fuse
VSD
XT
Ultra Rapid fuse
Variable Speed Drives
Extension
YPQ112A/B
8-6
DESCRIPTION
Used in TSU.
Used in TSU.
Used in TSU.
Used in TSU.
Computer programs.
Full controlled thyristor input bridge.
Communication controlled circuit used in
asynchronous communication protocols.
Power supply equipment with battery to
maintain output voltage during power failure.
Fuse type used to protect semiconductors.
Speed controlled electrical motor.
R&E project name. It stands for power range
extension of ACS 600 product family by
paralleling inverter modules.
DDCS Interface board for CDC system.
ACS 600 Firmware Manual, System Application Program 6.x
3BFE 63700177 R0425
EFFECTIVE: 02.05.2001
ABB Industry Oy
Drives
P.O.Box 184
FIN-00381 HELSINKI
FINLAND
Telephone
Telefax
+ 358 10 22 2000
+ 358 10 22 22681
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising